Nortel Meridian 1 Option 11c

Meridian 1
Option 11C and 11C Mini
Technical Reference Guide
Document Number: 553-3011-100
Document Release: Standard 14.00
Date: January 2002
Year Publish FCC TM
Copyright © 1991–2002 Nortel Networks
All Rights Reserved
Printed in Canada
Information is subject to change without notice. Nortel Networks reserves the right to make changes in design
or components as progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant. This equipment has been tested
and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules, and the
radio interference regulations of Industry Canada. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at their own expense.
SL-1 and Meridian 1 are trademarks of Nortel Networks.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 3 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
4
Revision history
January 2002
Standard 14.00. This is a global document and is up-issued for Release 25.40.
December 2000
Standard 13.00. This global document is up-issued to include updates and
changes required for Option 11C IP Expansion with Release 25.3x software.
April 2000
Standard 12.00. This is a global document and is up-issued for X11 Release
25.0x. Document changes include removal of: redundant content; references
to equipment types except Options 11C and 11C Mini; and references to
previous software releases.
September 1999
Issue 11.00, Standard
July 1999
Issue 10.00, Standard
May 1999
Issue 9.00, Standard
March 1998
Issue 8.00, Standard
July 1996
Release 7.00, Standard
July 1995
Release 6.00, Standard.
December 1994
Release 5.00, Standard.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 4 of 544
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
July 1994
Release 4.00, Standard.
October 1993
Release 3.00, Standard.
January 1993
Release 2.00, Issue 2.0, Standard.
April 1992
Release 2.00, Issue 1.0, Standard.
June 1991
Release 1.00, Standard.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 5 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
8
Contents
About this guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Chapter 1 — Memory, Storage and
CPU capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Chapter 2 — Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Chapter 3 — Transmission parameters . . . . . . . . 157
Chapter 4 — Cabinet distribution over
a data network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Chapter 5 — Spares planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Chapter 6 — Power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Chapter 7 — System Controller cards . . . . . . . . . . 207
Chapter 8 — SDI ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Chapter 9 — The TDS/DTR card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Chapter 10 — NTBK22 MISP card . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Chapter 11 — Meridian Digital Telephones . . . . . 265
Chapter 12 — M2317 Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Chapter 13 — Meridian Modular Telephones . . . . 283
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 6 of 544 Contents
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Chapter 14 — M3900 telephone series . . . . . . . . . 309
Chapter 15 — European Digital
telephones: 3110, 3310, and 3820 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Chapter 16 — M5317 BRI Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Chapter 17 — M2250 Attendant Console . . . . . . . 353
Chapter 18 — NT8D02 and NTDK16
Digital Line Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Chapter 19 — NT8D09 Analog Message
Waiting Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Chapter 20 — NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card . . . . 377
Chapter 21 — NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card . . . . . . . . 389
Chapter 22 — NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card . . . . . . . . 399
Chapter 23 — NTAG26 XMFR card . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Chapter 24 — NT6D70 SILC line card . . . . . . . . . . 415
Chapter 25 — NT6D71 UILC line card . . . . . . . . . . 419
Chapter 26 — NT1R20 Off Premise
Station (OPS) analog line card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Chapter 27 — Cable specifications and interfaces 439
Chapter 28 — NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card . . . . . 447
Chapter 29 — NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH
TMDI card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Chapter 30 — NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card . . . . . . . . 467
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Contents Page 7 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 31 — NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card . . . . . . . . 479
Chapter 32 — NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card . . . . . . . . 493
Chapter 33 — NTAK20 clock controller . . . . . . . . 503
Chapter 34 — NTAK93 D-channel handler
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Chapter 35 — NTBK51 Downloadable
D-channel handler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Chapter 36 — NT5D14 Line Side T-1 card . . . . . . . 525
List of terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 8 of 544 Contents
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 9 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
10
About this guide
This Technical Reference guide contains detailed technical information about
the Option 11C and Option 11C Mini systems. It includes such things as:
• circuit cards information
• spares planning
• SDI ports information
• tones and cadences
• transmission parameters
• Meridian modular telephone sets
• M2250 attendant console
This document is a global document. Contact your system supplier or your
Nortel Networks representative to verify that the hardware and software
described is supported in your area.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 10 of 544 About this guide
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 11 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
86
Chapter 1 — Memory, Storage and
CPU capacity
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Reference List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Option 11C and Option 11C Mini data storage, loading, and restoring . . 12
Data storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Data loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Data restoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Pre-programmed data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Components of pre-programmed data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Model telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Trunk route data and model trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Numbering plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
SDI ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Tone services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Benefits of pre-programmed data . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Software Installation program and pre-programmed data . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Removing pre-programmed data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Customer Configuration Backup and Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Operations performed . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
File transfer time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 12 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Equipment requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Real time CPU capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Software Program store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Resident Program store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Data store requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Unprotected data requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Notes to Table 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Protected data requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Notes for Table 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Reference List
The following are the references in this section:
• Maintenance (553-3001-511)
• Option 11C Customer Controlled Backup and Restore (CCBR) (553-
3011-330)
• Option 11C Mini Planning and Installation (553-3021-209)
• Option 11C Planning and Installation (553-3021-210)
• Option 11C and 11C Mini Upgrade Procedures (553-3021-250)
Overview
This chapter presents an outline of Real Time CPU capacity for the
Option 11C, and Option 11C Mini. In addition, it describes Option 11C and
Option 11C Mini data storage, loading and restoring, as well as the
unprotected and protected memory requirements for features applicable to the
these systems.
Option 11C and Option 11C Mini data storage, loading,
and restoring
For the Option 11C and Option 11C Mini system, configuration data is both
stored and loaded by accessing overlay programs 43 and 143. The sequence
of events where data is copied from one area to the next depends on the status
of the switch - new installation, software upgrade - and the purpose of the data
transfer, such as to make a backup copy of the customer database.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 13 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
An Option 11C with IP Expansion can be made up of both Option 11C
cabinets and Option 11C Mini chassis. However, when an Option 11C Mini
chassis is used, the NTDK97 Mini System Controller (MSC) card is replaced
with an NTDK20 Small System Controller (SSC) card and an appropriate IP
Expansion daughterboard.
Option 11C and Option 11C Mini software is stored in various areas of the
NTDK20 SSC and NTDK97 MSC cards. In terms of customer data, there are
four possible areas where these records can be stored (Refer to Figure 1):
• DRAM — stores and accesses the active version of customer records,
system data and overlay data
• Primary Flash drive c: — contains two copies of customer records
(primary and backup records)
• Backup Flash drive z: — retains the true backup copy of the customer
database
• PCMCIA device a: or b: — if equipped, this 40 Mbyte device can store
a complete backup copy of the customer database
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 14 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Data storage
The Option 11C and 11C Mini data dump performed in LD 43, is the system’s
method of backing up configuration data to its file storage devices. By
invoking one of the several data dump commands in the overlay, the user is
ensured that at least one backup copy of configuration data exists in a location
other than DRAM (Refer to Table 1).
The effects of the LD 43 commands described above are be better illustrated
by referring to Figure 1.
Note: Refer to the Option Maintenance (553-3001-511) for a complete
listing and description of LD 43 commands.
Table 1
LD 43 data dump commands
Command Description
BKO Customer records in the Primary Flash drive are copied to the PCMCIA
device.
EDD Customer data in DRAM is written to the Primary and Backup flash drives
on the NTDK20 SSC and NTDK97 MSC.
EDD NBK Customer data in DRAM is written to the Primary and Backup flash drives
on the NTDK20 SSC and NTDK97 MSC. (Same as the EDD command).
SWP A swap or exchange of database records is completed between the Pri-
mary Flash drive’s main and secondary databases (Refer to Figure 1).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 15 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Figure 1
Data storage on the NTDK20 SSC and NTDK97 MSC
The Option 11C and Option 11C Mini offer one additional area of data
storage that is truly external to the switch. This storage device can be an IBM-
type PC or Macintosh-type computer, running an Option11C software feature
called “Customer Configuration Backup and Restore” (CCBR). Through the
use of LD 143 and the CCBR feature, the user can transfer customer records
between the SSC or MSC’s Primary Flash drive to either an on-site or remote-
computer system (Refer to Table 2 for a listing of CCBR commands
supported in LD 143).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 16 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Note: Refer to Administration (553-3001-311) and Maintenance (553-
3001-511) for a complete listing and description of LD 143 commands.
Data loading
An Option 11C and 11C Mini “SYSLOAD” is a sequence of events whereby
the switch loads and verifies system and customer records into the NTDK20
SSC’s or NTDK97 MSC’s active memory area, or DRAM. The flow of data
depends on the status of the software - new installation, software release
upgrade, or a user-initiated sysload - or the commands initiated in either
LD 143, or the Install Setup Program.
Despite the various ways to initiate a Sysload, the flow of data generally
follows the path described below (Refer to Figure 2 for a graphical
illustration):
1 The Option 11C and 11C Mini searches for customer records in the
Primary Flash drive. If the files are located and verified, data is loaded
into the NTDK20 SSC’s or NTDK97 MSC’s DRAM.
2 If the records are corrupt or cannot be found in the Primary Flash drive,
the system searches the Backup Flash drive. If the customer records are
located and verified, the Option 11C and 11C Mini loads the data into
DRAM.
Table 2
LD 143 CCBR commands
Command Description
XBK Customer database records in the Primary Flash drive are backed up to
an external computer hard-drive.
XRT Customer database records are restored from an external computer
hard-drive to the Backup Flash drive and on the NTDK20 SSC and
NTDK97 MSC.
XSL The Option 11C or Option 11C Mini is remotely “sysloaded” with cus-
tomer records stored in the Primary Flash drive.
XVR Customer files stored on an external computer are verified for validity and
integrity with records in the Backup Flash drive.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 17 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
3 If the customer records cannot be located in the Backup Flash drive, the
Option 11C and 11C Mini automatically searches the PCMCIA drive. If
customer records are located and verified, data is loaded into DRAM.
4 If the customer records cannot be located in the PCMCIA drive, the
Option 11C and 11C Mini searches the Primary Flash drive for the
secondary backup (.bak) file. If the customer records are located and
verified, data is loaded into DRAM.
Figure 2
Flow of data during an Option 11C or Option 11C Mini Sysload
Sysload and a new Option 11C or Option 11C Mini installation
Software for new Option 11C and 11C Mini systems is delivered on a pre-
programmed Software Daughterboard for the Option 11C, or directly on the
MSC for the Option 11C Mini. Once this hardware is installed and the system
is powered up (SYSLOAD), the Install Setup and Loader program (LD 143)
is automatically invoked. This program is menu driven and assists in loading
the software into the system.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 18 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Data restoring
In the unlikely event configuration data becomes corrupted, a backup copy of
the current database can be restored to the Option 11C and 11C Mini. There
are four possible areas of where a backup of configuration data can be
restored from — the secondary primary database, the backup flash drive, the
PCMCIA drive, or an external computer hard-drive. (Refer to Table 2 for a
description of the commands used to restore backup data to the Option 11C
and 11C Mini.)
Pre-programmed data
When an Option 11C or Option 11C Mini system is initially installed,
customer data must be entered into the overlay programs. Telephones, for
example, must be assigned features on their keys to allow them to function
properly.
However, the Main SSC or the Mini MSC can be pre-programmed with
customer data. If you load pre-programmed data into the system during
installation, some overlay entries will be automatically configured on the
telephones. For example, you can choose a telephone model that has
predetermined feature and key assignments and a preassigned class of
Table 3
Commands used to restore data to the Option 11C and Option 11C Mini
Command Overlay Description
SWP
(see note)
43 Secondary primary files are “swapped” with the contents of
the primary flash drive (Refer to database.bak in Figure 2).
RES 43 Restore files to the primary flash drive from the PCMCIA
drive.
RIB 43 Restores the missing files in primary flash drive from the
internal backup drive.
XRT 143 Customer database records are restored from an external
computer hard-drive to the Primary and Backup Flash drives
on the NTDK20 SSC or NTDK97 MSC.
Note: The SWP command in LD 43 does not “restore” data to the primary flash drive: it swaps or replaces
the contents of the primary drive with the data stored in the primary drive’s secondary database.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 19 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
service. This can be a significant time-saver if you have to program numerous
types of telephone models.
Pre-programmed data is not mandatory for software installation. In fact, the
NTDK20 or the NTDK97, can be programmed with the minimum number of
files to allow the Option 11C and 11C Mini to operate.
During start-up, the Software Installation Program is automatically invoked.
The Option 11C or Option 11C Mini, loads system data from the NTDK20,
or the NTDK97 respectively, and prompts the user for a variety of
information, including the time and date, type of installation, feature set
required, and type of database. At this point, if the user selects any response
other than “Default database,” pre-programmed data will not be loaded on the
system.
Pre-programmed data cannot be removed from the Option 11C and 11C Mini
system once it is loaded into the system. However, pre-programmed data can
be bypassed during first-time system installations.
Note: The pre-programmed data on the Option 11C and 11C Mini
system can provide an effective starting point for programming
telephone and trunk information. Before bypassing the option of loading
pre-programmed data, take the time to determine whether the default
data can be used at this site.
Components of pre-programmed data
The following items are pre-programmed in the Default database on the Main
Option 11C NTTK13 Software Daughterboard:
• Model telephones
• Trunk route data and model trunks
• Numbering plan
• SDI ports
• Tone and digit switch
Model telephones
A model telephone can be thought of as a default set of features and class of
service assigned to a telephone.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 20 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Telephone models simplify telephone installation. During telephone
activation, the telephone prompts you to accept a default model. If a model is
chosen, all keys are automatically assigned a feature and no further key
programming is required. (The extension number is also predefined using the
default numbering plan.)
If you do not want to accept the default model, you can create other models
by following the procedures in Chapter 19 of the Option 11C Planning and
Installation (553-3021-210), or Chapter 17 of the Option 11C Mini Planning
and Installation (553-3021-209).
Note: Off-Premise Station (OPS) telephones do not have their own
telephone models. You can, however, create OPS models by entering DD
in response to the CDEN prompt in LD 10.
Trunk route data and model trunks
Pre-programmed trunk routes and trunk models simplify trunk installation
procedures. A pre-programmed trunk route supports a certain trunk type, has
a default access code, and must be assigned a trunk model. A trunk model
supports a certain card type, trunk type, and signalling arrangement.
Trunk models are assigned to default trunk routes using the administration
telephone. You can create other models by following the procedures in
Chapter 20 of the Option 11C Planning and Installation (553-3021-210) or
Chapter 18 of the Option 11C Mini Planning and Installation (553-3021-
209).
Numbering plan
The pre-programmed numbering plan automatically assigns default extension
numbers to the following (this list may not be representative of all countries):
• Local extension numbers
• Attendant extension
• Night number
• ACD queues
• Meridian Mail extensions
• Call park extensions
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 21 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
If the default numbering plan does not suit this system’s needs, you can
change it using the procedures Chapter 22 of the Option 11C Planning and
Installation (553-3021-210) or Appendix A of the Option 11C Mini Planning
and Installation (553-3021-209).
SDI ports
There are three pre-programmed SDI ports on Option 11C and 11C Mini
systems. The NTDK20 SSC or NTDK97 MSC provides TTY ports 0, 1, and
2. All three SDI interfaces can be used as either modem or maintenance ports
for TTY terminals.
Tone services
The SSC/MSC provides 30 channels of tone and cadence transmission to the
system.
The SSC/MSC also provides tone detection. Units 0-7 can be configured to
support DTR/XTD. Units 8-15 can also be configured to support DTR/XTD
Optionally, units 8-11 can be configured to support other tone detection
functions in lieu of DTR/XTD on units 8-15. These other tone functions
include one of MFC/MFE/MFK5/MFK6/MFR.
LD 56 contains default tables used for tone and cadence generation.
Benefits of pre-programmed data
The main benefit of pre-programmed data is that it simplifies installation and
activation procedures. Table 5 compares how a task would be performed
using pre-programmed data and how it would be performed without pre-
programmed data.
Table 4
LD 56 tone and cadence data
Pre-configured TDS/DTR data
TDS loop Channels 1-30
DTR or XTD Card 0, units 0-7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 22 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Software Installation program and pre-programmed data
The Software Installation program is automatically invoked when the new
Option 11C or Option 11C Mini is started up (SYSLOAD). After successfully
responding to various prompts in the program, you are given the option of
selecting a database to be loaded.
Detailed information about the Software Installation program can be found in
the Option 11C Planning and Installation (553-3021-210) or the Option 11C
Mini Planning and Installation (553-3021-209) used for first-time
installations; or the Option 11C and 11C Mini Upgrade Procedures (553-
3021-250) used for upgrades from an Option 11 or 11E to an Option 11C
system.
Table 5
Benefits of pre-programmed data
Task
Task performed using pre-
programmed data
Task performed without using
pre-programmed data
Activating
telephones
Plug telephone into socket, lift
handset, choose model,
choose extension
Enter LD 10 or 11, enter telephone type,
specify TN, assign class of service, assign
a feature to each key on telephone
LD 10 has approximately 120 prompts
LD 11 has approximately 160 prompts
Activating
trunks
Use the administration menu
to add a trunk:
• enter a route access code
• enter a TN
• enter a trunk model
Enter LD 16, enter trunk type, access code,
signalling arrangements
Enter LD 14, enter TN, route member
number, signalling arrangements, class of
service, and so on
LD 16 has approximately 200 prompts
LD 14 has approximately 50 prompts
Establishing a
numbering
plan
No effort required. Default
extension numbers become
active when telephones are
activated. Default plan is
sequential.
A numbering plan must be developed to
map TNs to DNs.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 23 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Removing pre-programmed data
Pre-programmed data cannot be removed from the Option 11C or Option 11C
Mini system once it is loaded into the system. However, pre-programmed
data can be bypassed during first-time system installations.
During start-up, the Software Installation Program is automatically invoked.
The Option 11C and 11C Mini then loads system data from the Software
Daughterboard, or MSC for the Option 11C Mini, and prompts the user for a
variety of information, including the time and date, type of installation,
feature set required, and type of database. At this point, if the user selects any
response other than “Default database,” pre-programmed data will not be
loaded on the system
Note: The pre-programmed data on the Option 11C and 11C Mini
system can provide an effective starting point for programming
telephone and trunk information. Before bypassing the option of loading
pre-programmed data, take the time to determine whether the default
data can be used at this site.
Customer Configuration Backup and Restore
The Customer Configuration Backup and Restore (CCBR) feature provides
the ability to store the configuration database of the Option 11C on an
external hard-drive of an IBM-type PC or Macintosh-type computer.
The CCBR feature can be invoked on-site with the use of a modem
eliminator, or remotely over a modem connection.
Operations performed
The CCBR feature performs two different functions of safeguarding
customer programmed data. The first involves storing the configuration
database in the unlikely event of an system failure - such as a continuous
SYSLOAD or INI - or data corruption. To correct this problem, the backup
copy of the configuration database can be restored to the Option 11C or
Option 11C Mini.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 24 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
The second function of the CCBR feature has to do with the role it plays in
upgrading software from an Option 11 or 11E to an Option 11C system. To
illustrate, if the CCBR feature is invoked in LD 43 of an Option 11 or 11E,
its configuration data can be backed up on a hard-drive of an external
computer. When the new Option 11C hardware is fully installed, and the
PCMCIA card is inserted in the System Core card, the backup copy of the
configuration data - stored on the computer - can be transferred back to the
upgraded Option 11C system as part of the software upgrade process.
Immediately upon download, the Option 11 or 11E database files will be
automatically converted to the Option 11C format.
Note: Whenever the CCBR feature is used, configuration data is always
backed up to the primary flash drive. Prior to invoking the CCBR
command, a data dump should be performed to ensure the primary
database is current.
File transfer time
Depending on the number of records in the configuration data base, it can take
over 30 minutes to backup or restore data at a rate of 1200 bps. CCBR access
time can be significantly decreased using a 19200 baud modem: 19200 baud
is the maximum data transfer rate supported by the Option 11C or Option 11C
Mini.
Equipment requirements
Communications software
Communications software compatible with XModem CRC protocol is
required to operate the CCBR feature. This requirement applies to on-site and
remote access.
On-site access
On-site access to the Option 11C or Option 11C Mini system can be made by
directly connecting a computer to SDI port 0, 1, or 2.
Note: You will need to connect a modem eliminator between the SDI
cable and the computer cable for on-site computer access.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 25 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Remote access
Remote access to the Option 11C or Option 11C Mini is established by
connecting SDI port 0, 1, or 2 on the SSC/MSC to an analog line (Central
Office line) through an on-site modem. This will allow the computer to dial
directly into the Option 11C or Option 11C Mini from a remote location.
Detailed information about the CCBR feature can be found in the Option 11C
Customer Controlled Backup and Restore (CCBR) (553-3011-330).
Real time CPU capacity
Table 6
CPU capacity
Release
Average Msecs of CPU for PBX Call
(Equivalent Basic Call)
Equivalent Basic IPE Calls per
Hour
16.90G 250 10075
18.30H 306 8225
18.40H 300 8400
20.06 338 7450
20.19 374 6750
21.0x 373 6075
22.0x 50 58000
23 50 55775
24 47 50175
25 49 46324
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 26 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Table 7
Option 11C Real Time Measurements PRI Calls (msecs) (with IP Expansion)
Figure 3
Option 11C Real Time Measurements i2004 Calls (msecs)
Option 11C memory requirements are calculated using the following tables:
• Table 9 on page 28 - Resident Program Store
• Table 10 on page 29 - IP Memory Impacts
• Table 11 on page 30 - Unprotected data store requirements
• Table 12 on page 48 - Protected data store requirements
Call Type 2527d(2530) No Expansion cabinet
2527d (2530) With IP Expansion
cabinet
pbx - tie 57 89
tie - pbx 51 86
aries - tie 56 127
tie - aries 59 99
tie - tie
Average 58 100
Call Type
ITG card on Expansion cabinet
PRI card on Expansion cabinet
2527d
ITG card on Main cabinet
PRI card on Expansion cabinet
2527d
i2004-aries 236 231
aries-i2004 197 190
i2004-i2004 323 321
i2004-tie 319 321
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 27 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Record the memory requirements on “Worksheet D: Unprotected memory
calculations” on page 141 and “Worksheet E: Protected memory
calculations” on page 142.
Network Delay
There is some impact on real-time performance (estimated to be 20%) when
digital trunks are installed in IP Expansion cabinets. However, there is still
sufficient real-time to support five fully configured Option 11C cabinets in a
typical business configuration.
Table 8
Basic LAN Requirements for Excellent Voice Quality
LAN requirement Value for Excellent Voice Quality
Packet loss rate <0.5%
PDV jitter buffer (maximum) RTD<5 ms
Round trip Delay <5 ms
PDV jitter buffer (minimum) RTD<12 ms
100BaseT/F Layer 2/Layer 3 switch Full Duplex connection
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 28 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Software Program store
Resident Program store
The Resident Program store requirements are listed in Table 9
Table 9
Resident Program Store
Program 1024 words = 1K Storage in words
Basic (BASE)
Read/Write Firmware
Overlay
0
0
46 000
Options (OPTF) 0
Multi Customer (CUST)
ROM Firmware
0
8 000
Total 54 000
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 29 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
For IP connectivity, extra memory usage is required. Table 10 summarizes
the additional memory requirements of the Survivable IP configuration.
Table 10
IP Memory impacts
Functional area Flash DRAM C-drive PCMCIA
CDR storage 4 Mb (17500)
Survivable db x x x
start-up 3K 2K 3K
100baseT/F 218981 B
multi-clock 28 words
cardlan 30K
SSD 40K
IP config 0.8K 0.8K 0.8K
voice 1K
bootP 20K 0.8K 0.8K
remote TTY 35K
TOTAL
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 30 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Data store requirements
Unprotected data requirements
Table 11 lists the unprotected data store requirements per item in words.
Table 11
Unprotected data store requirements (Part 1 of 4)
Data Store by Feature
Fixed Number of 1k
Words per Item
Calculated number
of Words Per Item
Fixed Address Globals 22389 -
500-type telephones 8.5 -
2500-type telephones 8.5 -
SL-1 sets (no digit display) 20.25 -
SL-1 sets (digit display) 22.25 -
Add-on K/L Strips 10 -
Data Service/VMS Access TNs - See Note 10 on page
40
Analog Trunks - See Note 17 on page
44
BRI Trunks 83 -
DTI 82 -
JDM/DTI2 57 -
ISDN PRI/PRI2/ISL - See Note 18 on page
46
Attendant 131 -
Customers 234 -
Console Presentation Group (CPG) Data
Block
29, 35 #Customer, #CPG
Trunk Routes - See Note 1 on page
34
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 31 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Network-Location Code 69 -
Tone and Digit Switch 59 -
Conference 166 -
Digitone Receivers 12 -
MFR - MF Receiver - See Note 20 on page
47
Tone Detect 12 -
Low Priority Input Buffers (LPIB)
(from note 4)
4 See Note 11 on page
41
High Priority Input Buffers (HPIB)
(from note 4)
4 See Note 11 on page
41
PBXOB 4 x PBXOB See Note 11 on page
41
BCSOB 4 x PCSOB See Note 11 on page
41
AML (CSL) - See Note 21 on page
47
MSDL 1273 -
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) - See Note 3 on page
35
ACD Enhancement - See Note 8 on page
39
ESN Communication Management Cen-
ter (CMAC)
350 -
NARS/BARS/CDP - See Note 4 on page
36
Table 11
Unprotected data store requirements (Part 2 of 4)
Data Store by Feature
Fixed Number of 1k
Words per Item
Calculated number
of Words Per Item
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 32 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
BGD Terminal Time 13 -
BGD/AWU Traffic Block 350 -
Call Register 161 See Note 5 on page
37
Call Park - See Note 6 on page
39
Integrated Message System Link (IMS) 16 See Note 7 on page
39
Auxiliary Processor Link (APL) 179 -
Automatic Trunk Maintenance (ATM)
Schedule Block
- No impact
ATM Data Block - No impact
Digital Telephones - See Note 9 on page
40
Multi-Tenant 32 -
Command Status Link (CSL) (143 + 483) x #Links -
Background Terminal 89 -
Display Messages 12 -
ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) See Note 16 on page
42
ISDN Primary Rate Access
(PRA)
81 -
Table 11
Unprotected data store requirements (Part 3 of 4)
Data Store by Feature
Fixed Number of 1k
Words per Item
Calculated number
of Words Per Item
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 33 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Overlay Data Space 260 -
ISDN Signalling Link (ISL) 81 -
Enhanced Busy Lamp Field (EBLF) - See Note 13 on page
42
Enhanced Night Service 1 -
Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) - See Note 14 on page
42
Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) 3 -
Group Hunt 17 -
Model Telephones - See Note 15 on page
42
Model Trunks - See Note 15 on page
42
IP Expansion See Note 22 on
page 47
Table 11
Unprotected data store requirements (Part 4 of 4)
Data Store by Feature
Fixed Number of 1k
Words per Item
Calculated number
of Words Per Item
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 34 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Notes to Table 11
The following notes are referred to in Table 11.
Note 1
The size of the trunk block is calculated from:
CT + w + x + y + z (words) where:
CT = 10
w = line block (see table below)
x = 0 if the trunk belongs to a route which does not have CDR or has CDR
with dialed digits
x = 9 if the trunk belongs to a route which has CDR with outpulse digits
y = 0 if the trunk belongs to a route which does not have the Timed Forced
Disconnect option
y = 5 if the trunk belongs to a route which has the Timed Forced Disconnect
option
z = 0 if the trunk does not have CNA defined
z = 4 if the trunk has CNA defined
Trunk Types Other MS
RAN 5 5
RLA 15 14
ADM 18 18
IDA 43 43
Others 29 29 (Includes ISA)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 35 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Note 2
The size of a TTY block (in words) is calculated from:
t + x,
where t = 2075 and
x is defined in the following table:
Note 3
For ACD features, the following additional storage per system is required:
K0 x [(K1 x CROUT) + (K2 x CPID) + (K3 x CDN) + CTM + (K4 + CRT)
+ (K5 x CCUST)] + (K6 x DN) + (K7 x PID) + (K8 x DN)
Where the multiplication constants (Ki) are:
K0 = 0 if ACD-C package is not equipped
K0 = 1 If ACD-C package is equipped
K1 = 46
K2 = 14 If long report is selected
K2 = 42 If short report is selected
K3 = 80
K4 = 30
K5 = 240
K6 = 149
Input Buff Data Output Q
CDR Link 128
HS Link 128 + 15
APL Link 128 + 179 + 4
PMS Link 128 + 2
Other 128
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 36 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
K7 = 29
+ 2 for DN Expansion
+ 1 for ACD ACNT CODE
+ 1 for 500/2500 ACD set feature
K8 = 0 if priority agent package (PAGT) is not equipped
K8 = 32 for Option 11C with PAGT
And the variables represent the following:
CCUST = total number of customers with ACD-C package
CDN = total number of ACD DNs for ACD-C customers
CPID = total number of AGENT POSITIONs for ACD-C customers
CROUT = total number of ACD routes in ACD-C customers
CTM = total number of TRUNK members in CROUT
DN = total number of ACD DNs (for system)
PID = total number of AGENT POSITIONs (for the system)
CRT = total number of ACD CRTs
Note 4
If the NTRF package is equipped, the unprotected data store requirements (on
a per customer basis) for NARS/BARS/CDP are as follows:
COS = TRAFSIZE + RLSIZE + NCOSIZE + QROUTSIZE
where:
If OHQ or MCBQ is equipped
If OHQ or MCBQ not
equipped
TRAFSIZE 216 200
RLSIZE = 2 x (45 x RL) 2 x (40 x RL)
NCOSIZE = 2 x (10 x NCOS) 2 x (6 x NCOS)
QROUTSIZE = 2 x (12 x QROUT) 0
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 37 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
QROUT = number of routes with either CBQ or OHQ
RL = number of route lists
NCOS = number of NCOS defined
Note 5
The total number of Call Registers may not exceed 2048. The recommended
number of Call Registers is:
(T + 815)/33.8 + M + X + Y
where:
T = (A/2 x C x 1.42) - (M x L)
A = the total voice loop traffic in CCS
C = the call register factor
= 1
+ 0.037 if CDR Charge Account
+ 0.150 if NARS/BARS/CDP
+ 0.150 of FCBQ and OHQ
+ 0.033 if ACD RAN
+ 0.019 if Telset Messaging
+ 0.140 if Integrated Messaging System
+ 0.083 if Ring Again
+ 0.033 if Music Trunk
+ 0.067 if Call Park
+ 0.003 if New Flexible Code Restriction
+ 0.039 if ESN signalling
+ 0.000 if Stored Number Re-dial (negligible impact)
L = average CCS per ACD trunk
M = the number of ACD incoming trunks
X = 0 if no Network ACD (NACD)
= the number of ACD calls which overflow out of Source ACD DNs
on this node
=(# Source ACD DNs) x (average overflow from Source ACD DNs)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 38 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Y = 0 if no Network ACD (NACD)
= the number of ACD calls which overflow into Target ACD DNs
in this node
= (# Target ACD DNs) x (average overflow into Target ACD DNs)
The averages for NACD overflow must be estimated, and should be
engineered for peak periods.
Assumptions for Call Register Factors:
• The peak day traffic = 1.42 x ABSBH for business offices.
• All outgoing calls require authorization (worse case assumption).
• An additional call register is required for 20 seconds to hold the
authorization code.
• Fifty percent of outgoing calls use the charge account feature (worse case
assumption).
• An additional call register is required for 20 seconds to hold the charge
account.
• The additional holding time of the call register for CDR purposes is 5
seconds.
• The average number of ports used in the multiple CDR ports feature is 2.
• A call register is required for each incoming ACD trunk.
• The intra-office ratio R = 0 (worse case assumption).
• The number of originating calls equals the number of terminating calls.
• The blocking peak of the day traffic is P0.01.
• The average NARS/BARS call takes 20 seconds to dial and 20 seconds
to complete outpulsing and delay for answer.
• The average holding time of a RAN is 15 seconds.
• The average Telset Message takes 6 seconds to dial and 20 seconds to
complete outpulsing and delay for answer.
• The average IMS call takes 8 seconds to dial, 15 seconds ringing and 40
seconds with message attendant. During the busy hour, 60 percent of
terminating calls are unanswered, of which 50 percent require IMS.
• A call register is required for active Ring Again call.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 39 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
• Music Trunk holding time is 30 seconds.
• Average Call Park holding time is 1 minute.
• Average holding time for New Flexible Code Restriction is 4 seconds.
• ESN Signaling Feature holding time is 15 seconds and 25 percent of calls
need the signaling feature.
Note 6
Size per item for Call Park:
k + ceiling (s/16), for UCALL_PARK_BLOCK
where,
s = number of System Park DN's per customer.
k = 6, size(UCALL_PARK_BLOCK) (6.0)
Note 7
IMS unprotected memory requirements are:
* (183 x N) words are already accounted for in “Note 2” on page 35.
Note 8
ACD Enhancement - an ACD-C customer (See Note 3 on page 35).
LINK_OQ_TBL 16 words
APL_LINK_DATA 179 words x N *
QUEUE_DATA_BLOC 4 words x N*
N number of APL links defined in CFN Block
Total IMS Unprotected (16 + (183 x N)) words
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 40 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Note 9
Unprotected data store (size in words) for digital telephone ports:
#AOM = Number of Add-on Modules
Note 10
The additional unprotected data store for a virtual terminal (DS access TN, or
VMS access TN) is dependent on the card to which the terminal is assigned.
The increment in words are as follows:
Where a preallocated card is one of the following: 0/1-0/7, 1/1-1/8, 2/1-2/8 or
3/8 on a Digital Line Interface (DLI) loop. (See Note 12 on page 41.)
Voice or Data Ports without Digit
Display
VOD Ports with Digit Display
M2006 18 20
M2008 18 20
M2009 24.25 26.25
M2016 26 28
M2018 35.25 37.25
M2112 26.25 28.25
M2216 26 + 24 x #AOM 28 + 24 x #AOM
M2317 41.25 43.25
M2616 26 + 24 x #AOM 28 + 24 x #AOM
M3000 51.25 53.25
Preallocated card Otherwise
DS/VMS Access TN: 15 16.25
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 41 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Note 11
The size of Input/Output buffers is specified in “messages”. Each message
uses 4 words of unprotected data store. The recommended size for I/O buffers
is:
LPIB (Low Priority Input Buffers) = 96 messages
HPIB (High Priority Input Buffers) = 32 messages - single group 32 x #
groups - multi-group
PBXOB (Non-SL-1 Output Buffer) = 160 messages
BCSOB (SL-1 Output Buffer) = 160 messages
Note 12
The DCHI supports both 1.5 Mb PRI and 2.0 Mb PRI.
Each DCHI consists of the following unprotected data blocks:
M is computed for each DCHI, depending on Mode, as follows:
2Mb PRI only: unprotected data block = 91 words.
DCH_U_BLOCK 60 words
Output Request Buffers 5 x number of OTBFs
(LD 17)
Output Buffer 261 words
Input Buffer 261 words
Unprotected call reference table 2 + M
Unprotected message link table 1 + M
PRA Mode M = NChan x [Highest Loop Interface ID(defined in LD 17 by PRI
111 nn)(zero if not defined)+ 1 (for primary channel_+1 (if
backup channel is on)
ISL Mode M = maximum number of ISL trunks defined
Shared Mode M = the sum of the values for PRA and ISL mode
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 42 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Note 13
The following applies to each customer:
• Two words are required in the attendant unprotected data block (per
attendant console). This requirement is already accounted for in the size
of the attendant data block.
• If EBLF (Enhanced Busy Lamp Fields) is on (LD 15), there is a bit
required to indicate the busy or idle status of each DN. This amounts to
7 (16 bit) words per hundred groups defined.
Note 14
Total Unprotected data store per system is increased by the following:
(2 x CR) + (4 x BGD) + TRUNK + PPM_CARD + 4
where:
CR = number of Call Registers defined
BGD = number of background terminals
TRUNK = number of trunks
PPM_CARD = number of CO or E&M trunk card
Note 15
Model telephones and trunks require card block components only.
Model trunks — average 5 words
Model telephones — average 2 words
Note 16
The following tables show unprotected memory requirements for ISDN Basic
Rate Interface.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 43 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Per System:
Per MISP:
Function Memory Requirements
MISP input buffer 170 words per system
MISP expedited input buffer 128 words per system
Function Memory Requirements
MISP loop block 270 words
MISP output buffer (transmit receive) 512 words
MISP expedited output buffer 32 words
MISP output request buffer 7 words
MISP block data block 303 words
Socket ID table 48 words
Meridian 1 expedited receive buffer 128 words
Meridian 1 receive buffer 266 words
Meridian 1 expedited transmit buffer 528 words
MISP traffic accumulating block 48 words
MISP traffic holding block 48 words
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 44 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Per DSL:
Per BRSC:
Per Line Card:
Note 17
The size of the trunk block is calculated from:
CT + x + y + z (words)
Function Memory Requirements
2 TN line blocks 2 x 9 words
SSD block 10 words
Incoming call reference table 33 words
Outgoing call reference table 33 words
Incoming call ref. usage map 4 words
Outgoing call ref. usage map 4 words
Incoming message call reg. table 33 words
Outgoing message call reg. table 33 words
BRI DSL data block 3 words
Function Memory Requirements
BRSC data block 48 words
MISP traffic accumulating block 48 words
MISP traffic holding block 48 words
Function Memory Requirements
LIne card 5 words
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 45 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
where, 9 average card block + 6 trunk timing block
CT = 15 words
x = (see the following table) --> line block
y = 9 CDR extension
z = 0 If the trunk belongs to a route which does not have the Timed
Forced Disconnect option, or
z = 6 If the trunk belongs to a route which has the Timed Forced
Disconnect option.
Trunk Type Memory Requirements
RLA 20 words
ADM 72 words
IDA (DPN) 65 words
IDA (DASS) 53 words
OTHERS 61 words
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 46 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Note 18
The DCH application supports both 1.5 Mbit PRI and 2.0 Mbit PRI2.
527 per system
197 + 2 x M
Where:
M is computed as follows for each DCHI, depending on Mode:
PRA Mode:
If PRI is defined:
M = NChan * (nn + 1)
If PRI is NOT defined:
M = NChan * [1 (for primary channel)
+ 1 (if backup channel is on)]
Where:
nn = Highest Loop Interface Id (defined in Ovl17 by PRI lll nn), and
NChan = 24 for PRI and 31 for PRI2.
ISL Mode:
M = maximum number of ISL trunks defined.
Shared Mode:
M is the sum of the values for PRA and ISL Mode.
PRI2 only:
Unprotected data block = 68 words
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 47 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Note 19
The size of the memory requirements needed for junctor groups are:
(N x (N - 1)/ 2) x 73
Where:
N = Number of junctor groups
Note 20
Memory requirement are calculated for MFR from:
7 x (# MFR Cards) + 3 x (# MFR Units)
Note 21
Memory requirements are calculated for AML from:
143 + 483 x (# Links(AML))
Note 22
To support IP Expansion in IP expansion cabinets, an additional 2.0 Mb of
memory is required on the Main and each survivable IP expansion cabinet.
An additional 0.5 Mb (only) is required on any non-survivable IP expansion
cabinets.
Memory requirements are calculated as follows:
Total memory = 2K + (5.25K + Number of Maintenance
Connections) + (16K + Number of I/O Connections)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 48 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Protected data requirements
Table 12
Protected data store requirements (Part 1 of 5)
Data Store by Feature
Fixed Number of 1k
Words per Item
Calculated number of
Words Per Item
Fixed Address globals 9220 -
500 sets - See Note 1 on page 53
2500 sets - See Note 1 on page 53
M2000 Series - -
Delta-II M2000 Series - See Note 64 on page 85
DS/VMS Access TN's - See Note 65 on page 85
AOM 10/rs -
DS/VMS/ACC/TNs - See Note 23 on page 67
Template Head Table - See Note 50 on page 79
Templates - See Note 50 on page 79
Trunks 20 See Note 19 on page 66
Attendant - See Note 2 on page 55
Auxiliary Customer 187 -
Customers - See Note 31 on page 70
CPG Level Services 46 -
Trunk Routes - See Note 28 on page 69
Code Restriction 51
New Flexible Code Restriction - See Note 16 on page 65
Peripheral Signaling 30 -
Digitone Receivers 9 -
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 49 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Tone Detectors - See Note 53 on page 80
DLI/DTI - See Note 55 on page 81
DN Translators - See Note 3 on page 56
Serial Data Interface (N x 8) -
Application Module Link (N x 18) -
Dial Intercom Group(DIG) Translator - See Note 4 on page 58
Speed Call Master Head - See Note 31 on page 70
Speed Call Head Table - See Note 14 on page 64
Speed Call List - See Note 5 on page 58
Configuration 84 -
Configuration - Aux. 112 -
Basic Automatic Route Selection
(BARS)
- See Note 6 on page 59
Flexible Tones and Cadences (FTC) - See Note 35 on page 72
Enhanced FTC (EFTC) - See Note 35 on page 72
Network Automatic Route Selection
(NARS)
- See Note 7 on page 60
Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) - See Note 8 on page 61
and Note 51
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) - See Note 9 on page 62
Network ACD (NACD) - See Note 36 on page 72
Group DND (Do Not Disturb) - See Note 10 on page 63
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) - See Note 11 on page 63
Table 12
Protected data store requirements (Part 2 of 5)
Data Store by Feature
Fixed Number of 1k
Words per Item
Calculated number of
Words Per Item
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 50 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Authority Code - See Note 12 on page 63
CAS - Main 0
CAS - Remote 15 -
History File - See Note 13 on page 64
Logical I/O - See Note 58 on page 82
Physical I/O - See Note 59 on page 82
Call Park - See Note 51 on page 79
Integrated Message System Link (IMS) 370 See Note 15 on page 65
New Flexible Code Restriction (NFCR) - See Note 16 on page 65
Soft Memory 35 -
Code Screening - See Note 18 on page 66
M2006 - See note on page 72
M2008 - See Note on page 73
M2216/M2616 - See Note on page 74
Add-on modules 20/rs -
Multi-tenant See Note 20 on page 66
ATM Schedule Block - See Note 22 on page 67
Digital Line Interface (DLI) - See Note 17 on page 66
Enhanced Serial Data Interface (ESDI) 16 + N x 9
(N = # of ports)
-
Command Status Link (CSL) 4 -
Value Added Server (VAS) 16 + N (N = # of servers) -
Table 12
Protected data store requirements (Part 3 of 5)
Data Store by Feature
Fixed Number of 1k
Words per Item
Calculated number of
Words Per Item
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 51 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
VAS DSDNs - See Note 24 on page 67
IMP - See Note 60 on page 82
Call Party Name Display (CPND) - See Note 26 on page 68
Line Load Control (LLC) 5 -
ISDN BRI - See Note 47 on page 74
ISDN PRA - See Note 27 on page 69
ISDN PRA - See Note 28 on page 69
ISDN PRI2 - See Note 56 on page 81
ISDN PRI2 - See Note 56 on page 81
DTI1 - See Note 57 on page 81
Automatic Wakeup (AWU) Count 288 -
ISDN Signaling Link (ISL) - See Note 30 on page 70
Enhanced Busy Lamp Field (EBLF) - See Note 33 on page 71
BGD Automatic Timed Job - See Note 52 on page 80
Pretranslation - See Note 33 on page 71
LAPW - See Note 61 on page 83
Name Display for DMS - See Note 62 on page 84
Table 12
Protected data store requirements (Part 4 of 5)
Data Store by Feature
Fixed Number of 1k
Words per Item
Calculated number of
Words Per Item
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 52 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
FGD ANI Database - See Note 63 on page 84
Direct Inward Dialing/Direct Outward
Dialing
(DID/DOD)
1 -
Trunk Barring - See Note 37 on page 72
Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) - See Note 39 on page 72
Flexible Feature Code (FFC) - See Note 40 on page 73
Network Attendant Console Service - See Note 41 on page 73
Group Hunt 10 -
ABCD - See Note 42 on page 73
Model Telephones - See Note 42 on page 73
Model Trunks - See Note 43 on page 73
Table 12
Protected data store requirements (Part 5 of 5)
Data Store by Feature
Fixed Number of 1k
Words per Item
Calculated number of
Words Per Item
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 53 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Notes for Table 12
The following notes are referred to in Table 12.
Note 1
The size of the protected line block for Analog (500/2500 type) telephones is
determined from the following:
Basic Line Block = 10 words
Basic Line Block (ODAS) = 13 words
Card Block component = 2 words (1/4 pcard block)
The key layout portion of the template requires (4 + nf)/rs where “nf” is the
number of features defined for the set, and “rs” is the number of sets sharing
the same template.
In addition to the basic line block, each feature requires extra data space as
follows:
Table 13
Feature data space requirements (Part 1 of 2)
DN words words
Dial Intercom Group 2 words word
Speed Call User 1 word word
System Speed Call User 1 word word
Speed Call Controller 1 word word
Call Forward Number 1-6 words (4-24 digits) words (4 - 24 digits)
Call Park 2 words words
CFCT 2 words words
CFNA/Hunting Number 4 words words
Stored Number Redial 1-8 words (4 - 32 digits) words (4 - 32 digits)
Manual Line 2 words words
Message Center DN 2 words words
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 54 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Hot Line DN 2-10 (words(1 - 31 digits) words (1 - 31 digits)
Tenant Number 1 word word
Internal Call Forward 19 words words
Last Number Redial 1-8 words words
SCI/CCOS/RMS 2 words word
Authcode 6-24 words words
Automatic Wake Up 2 words word
Message Registration 1 word word
Call Party Name Display 1 word (if name is defined for
this DN)
word (if name is defined
for this DN)
Offhook Interdigit Index 1 word word
Pre-translation Enhancement 1/2 word (for 255 calling
groups)
Word (for 255 calling
groups)
CFCT 2 words words
EHOT feature 2-10 words words
FAXS 17 words words
FFC SCP PASS 2 words words
Associate Set (AST) 2 words words
EFD/EHT/ DN 4 words words
Table 13
Feature data space requirements (Part 2 of 2)
DN words words
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 55 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Note 2
The size of the protected line block for attendant telephones is determined
from the following:
Primary Line Block = 205 words
Secondary Line Block = 6 words
Card Block Component = 4 words
In addition to the basic line block, each feature requires extra data space as
follows:
Autodial Key = 8 words
Paging Key = 2 words
Store Number Redial Key = 8 words
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 56 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Note 3
The memory requirements for the Directory Number (DN) Translator are
shown in the table below. The memory requirements are formulated as a sum,
for which each row in the table describes an additive term; a term consisting
of factor * item. Factors and items are represented by constants, variable
descriptions and combinations of these. Units are words of protected data
store.
Table 14
Directory Number (DN) data space requirements (Part 1 of 2)
Factor Factor Description Item Item Description
2 S # of different DN's appearing on SL-
1/500/2500 sets
1 # of appearances of DN's within S
12 size(DNXBLOCK) Sum
N's
1+N1+N2+N3+N4+N5+N6: see
below
number of ACD DN's 2
number of ACD DN's 2 x AI size(ACD_ID_DNBLOCK) x
# ACD position ids in each ACD DN
# DISA DN's 2 size(DISA_DNBLOC)
1 number of System Park DN's
1 number of listed DN's
# defined DN's 2
1 66 1 + size(ATTN_DNBLOC)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 57 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Where
Nn = number of different sequence of the first n digits in the numbering plan
(if DN is more than n digits).
1 If special service prefix
defined.
1
If special service prefix
defined.
3
1 If RSANI access code defined. 11 size(RSANI_BLK).
1 If CAS hold DN defined. 2 1+size(CAS_HOLD_DNBLOCK)
1 If CAS hold DN defined. 2 1+size(CAS_RLT_DNBLOCK).
# CDP steering codes defined 3 size(CDP_DATA_BLOCK)
# Testline DN's 2 size(TSTLINE_DNBLK)
# ACD DN's defined 3 size(ACD_DNBLOCK)
# DIG groups defined 2 size(DIG_DATA_BLK)
# SL1 DN's 2 size(BCS_DNENTRY)
Table 14
Directory Number (DN) data space requirements (Part 2 of 2)
Factor Factor Description Item Item Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 58 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Note 4
The equation for calculating the protected memory requirement for dial
intercom data is shown in the table below. The memory requirements are
formulated as a sum, for which each row in the table describes an additive
term consisting of factor * item. Factors and items are represented by
constants, variable descriptions and combinations of these. Units are words
of protected data store.
Refer to page 71 for computation of DIG CPND Name Pointer Table Size.
Note 5
The size of a speed call list is:
((NB - 1) x 256) + (NBR x WE)
where:
NB and WE are calculated as described in Note 14 under the Speed Call List
Head Table, and NBR is the remainder of the calculation to determine NB,
which is:
NB = EL/EB
Table 15
Protected memory for dial intercom data
Factor Factor Description Item Item Description
1 1 + configured max # of DIGs (OV 15)
actual # of DIGs config-
ured
2
actual # of DIGs config-
ured
2 x avg size(DIG_DATA_BLK) * avg # mem-
bers in each DIG
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 59 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Note 6
The protected data store requirements for BARS (on a per customer basis)
are:
BASIC_ESN + SUM + RL x (8 + 3 x RLE) + DME x (4 + I/4)
+ FCAS + SDRR x (3 + 2 x SDE) + ITGE
where:
BASIC_ESN = Size(ESN_DATA_BLOCK) +
Size(NCTL_DATA_BLOCK)
SUM = (Size(ESN_TRAN_BLOCK) x [(10 x (#digits (0-9)) x R) x N] -1
(10 x R) -1
Size(ESN_TRAN_BLOCK) = 11
Size(ESN_DATA_BLOCK) = 131
Size(NCTL_DATA_BLOCK) = 506
n = maximum level of tree (n>0)
R = the rate of digits equipped in each level of the tree (translator)
RL = number of route lists
RLE = average number of route lists entries per route list
DME = number of distinct digit manipulation entries (including the default
0th entry)
I = average number of digits that must be inserted as part of digit
manipulation
FCAS = (N + 1) + N(M + 1) + MN[4 + (100P + 15)/16]
where:
N = number of defined FCAS tables
M = average number of NPA codes per table
P = average number of the first digits in NXX codes
SCC = number of entries in the SCC table
SDRR = number of supplemental digit restricted/recognized blocks
defined for npa, nxx, loc, spn
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 60 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
SDE = average number of SDRR entries for each SDRR block
ITGE = 9 x ITEI, where ITEI is the number of Incoming Trunk Group
Exclusion Index
This number is based on the assumption that the NPA/NXX translation tree
is half full and distributed evenly. This should represent the typical case. For
a more precise calculation, use the NARS formula.
Note 7
The protected data store requirements for NARS (on a per customer basis)
are:
BASIC_ESN + SUM1 + SUM2 + SDRR x (3 + 2 x SDE) +
RL x (8 + 3 x RLE) + DME x (4 + I/E) + LOC x 6 + FCAS + SCC +
ITGE + MDID
where:
BASIC_ESN = Size(ESN_DATA_BLOCK) +
Size(NCTL_DATA_BLOCK)
Size(ESN_DATA_BLOCK) = 131
Size(NCTL_DATA_BLOCK) = 306
SUM1 = (SUM of network translator 1)
SUM2 = (SUM of network translator 2)
SUM = 11 x [(10 x R) x n] - 1
(10 x R) - 1
n = maximum level of tree (n > 0)
R = the rate of digits equipped in each level of the tree (translator)
RL = number of route lists
RLE = average number of route lists entries per route list
DME = number of distinct digit manipulation entries (including the
default 0th entry)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 61 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
I = average number of digits that must be inserted as part of digit
manipulation
LOC = number of on-net or virtual locations
FCAS = (N + 1) + N(M + 1) + MN[4 + (100P + 15)/16]
where:
N = number of defined FCAS tables
M = average number of NPA codes per table
P = average number of the first digits in NXX codes
SCC = number of entries in the SCC table
SDRR = number of supplemental digit restricted/recognized blocks
defined for npa, nxx, loc, spn
SDE = average number of SDRR entries for each SDRR block
ITGE = 9 x ITEI, where ITEI is the number of Incoming Trunk Group
Exclusion Index
MDID = (2 x number of total office codes) + (2 x number of total DID
ranges regardless of which office codes they belong to). A maximum
of 20 ranges of office codes can be defined per locations code. (That
is, one office code and 20 ranges, or 20 office codes and one range
for each office code.)
Note 8
The protected data store requirements for CDP (on a per customer basis) are:
BASIC_ESN + SC x 3 + RL x (8 + 3 x RLE) + DME x (3 + I/4)
where:
BASIC_ESN = Size(ESN_DATA_BLOCK)
+ Size(NCTL_DATA_BLOCK)
Size(NCTL_DATA_BLOCK) = 306
SC = number of steering codes
RL = average number of route lists
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 62 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
RLE = average number of route lists entries per route
DME = number of distinct digit manipulation entries
I = average number of digits that must be inserted as part of digit
manipulation
CDP steering Codes also occupy SL-1 DN tree spaces. This portion of data
store is calculated in DN tree formulas. (See See “Note 3” on page 56.).
Note 9
The ACD feature requires the following additional data store (total for
system):
For ACD-C not equipped:
(K3 x DN) + (K4 x PID) + AID + (K5 x CUST)
For ACD-C equipped:
[K1 + (K2 x CCUST)] + (K3 x DN) + (K4 x PID) + AID + (K5 x
CUST)
Where the multiplication constants (Ki) are:
K1 = 33 = Size (P_ACD_I_BLK)
K2 = 8 = Size (P_ACD_SCHED_BLK)
K3 = 72 = Size (P_ACD_BLOCK) (=53) + ptr to blk from ACD_L:IST (=1)
+ word offset (ACD_POS_TN) (=16)
K4 = 14 = Size (P_ACD_KEY_DATA) (=14) + store for ACD_POS_TN
(=1)
K5 = 3 = header (ACD_LIST) (=1) + header (ACD_AGENT_ID_TBL) (=2)
And the variables represent:
AID = total number of AGENT IDs (for the system)
CCUST = total number of customers with ACD-C package
CUST = total number of customers with ACD-C/D packages
DN = total number of ACD DNs (for the system)
PID = total number of AGENT POSITIONs (for the system)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 63 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Note 10
The protected store requirements for Group DND (on a per customer basis)
are:
1 + G x (1 + 2 x M)
where:
G = number of groups
M = number of members in each group (2 words per member)
Note 11
The protected store requirements for DISA (on a customer basis) are:
1 + (DN x 7) —> 1 + (DN x 7)
DN is the number of DISA DNs.
Note 12
The protected store requirements for Authorization Code (on a per customer
basis) are:
Size(AUTH_TABLE_BLOCK) + (A x (L/4 x 128)) + 64
+ (B x [Size(AUTH_BLOCK) + (C x Size
(RESOLUTION_BLOCK))])
where:
Size(AUTH_TABLE_BLOCK) = 153 words
Size(AUTH_BLOCK) = 1018 words
Size (RESOLUTION_BLOCK) = 64 words
L = digit length
T = total auth code
A = number of overflow blocks
B = number of auth blocks
C = number of resolution blocks per auth block
For L less than or greater than 7:
A = (T/128) + 1
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 64 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
B = 0
C = 0
For L less in the range of 4 - 7
A = (0.2 x T)/128 + 1
B = (0.8 x T)/1000 + 1
C = 8
Note 13
The History file buffer can be 1 - 64 K per customer option.
Note 14
For System Speed Call List Head Table the requirements are as follows:
k + NB/4 + NB (Round NB/r up)
where:
K = 3, and includes:
SCLENTRYS_BLK (0.5)
SCHTBLKLNGTH (0.5)
SCLHTWD (1.0)
SCLENTRYS_LST, SCLNUMDIGITS, and SCLWORDS_ENTRY
(1.0)
NB = number of blocks = EL/EB (round up any remainder)
EL = entries per list (given)
EB = entries per block, 256/WE (round up remainder)
WE = words per entry, DNS/4 (round up)
DNS = DN size (given)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 65 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Note 15
IMS protected memory requirements:
APP_SIZE_TBL = 10
MSG_SIZE_TBL = 20
LTN_TN_TBL = 255
LTN_LINK_TBL = 65
Note 16
If New Flexible Code Restriction (NFCR) is chosen for a customer, the
following memory requirements are also needed:
• A 129 word block that contains:
— A 128 word table containing the pointers to the FRL block for each
route
— A pointer to the tree root address table
• A table that contains the pointers to the NFCR trees. Its length will be
defined by the maximum number of trees (defined in the customer data
block)
• Four words will be required for each route that has defined FRL codes
• Storage for customer defined trees. Amount of memory used depends on
the size of code restriction trees the customer has defined.
It is possible to calculate an upper bound for the amount of memory that a tree
is using by applying the following:
• The INIT condition occupies 14 words
• For each digit sequence after the INIT condition:
— if the digit sequence is greater than 1 digit, then memory required for
digit sequence increases by 1.
— if the digit sequence has a count field, then memory required for
digit sequence increases by 1.
— if the digit sequence is from a BYPS, then memory required for digit
sequence increases by 1.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 66 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Note 17
DTI/DLI protected data store (in words) is comprised of:
PDD_BLOCK + (N x P_DTI_TSET_BLOCK)
+ ((T + L) x local network data)
+ (L x (P_LOOP_DLI + preallocated card data))
= 18 + (N x 11) + ((T + L) x 70) + (L x (19 + 144))
where:
N = the number of Threshold telephones
T = the number of DTI loops
L = the number of DLI loops
Note 18
The size of the protected multiple office code screening line block is
determined from the following:
• 2 words for each NXX code defined
• 2 words for each range defined (maximum 20 ranges per location code -
80 words pds)
Note 19
The trunk block size is 20 words with ODAS.
Note 20
Requirements for the voice/data port are the same as an SL-1 basic telephone
except the key layout portion of the template requires 10 + (# of non-key
features) / (# of telephones sharing the same template).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 67 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Note 21
Protected data store required by the Multi-Tenant Service feature includes the
following:
1285 words per customer that enables Tenant Service:
= size (P_TENANT_PTRS) (=582)
+ size (TEN_CPG_ORDLS) (=256)
+ size (RTE_CPG_ORDLS) (=256)
+ size (CPG_DEFS) (=288)
1285 1382
42 words per tenant access map
= size (ACCESS_ARRAY)
42 words per outgoing route access map
= size (ACCESS_ARRAY)
Note 22
The protected data store requirements for ATM schedule block are as follows:
= 24 + ((9 x NC + 1) x NH) + 13 x AR
where:
NC = number of customers
NH = number of hours to be scheduled
AR = number of routes schedules to be tested
Note 23
For all machine types, the additional protected data store for a virtual terminal
(DS, access TN, or VMS access TN) is exactly the same with one exception.
For any of the two TN types, the Card Block Component is dependent on the
card to which the terminal is assigned. The component is 0 if the TN is on a
preallocated card, and 1.5 words otherwise. See “Note 17” on page 66.
Note 24
Protected data store requirements per customer for VAS Data Services (for
each customer having at least one DSDN) are:
DSDN_VAS_TBL + (DSDN_LIST x N)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 68 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
=16 + (77 x N)
where:
N = the number of VAS having at least one DSDN is defined.
Note 25
Requirements for the voice/data port are the same except the key layout
portion of the template requires 34 + (# of non-key features) / (# of telephones
sharing the same template).
For the M2317 data port, requirements are the same .
Note 26
Protected data store requirements for CPND per system in words is:
32 + (10 x C) + SP + (DIG_TBL_SIZE x DIG) + ((1 + n/2) x NA) + SL
where:
C = number of customers configured with CPND
SP = number of single appearance Analog (500/2500 type) DNs
with name defined
DIG_TBL_SIZE = 11 for 1 digit DIG groups, 101 for 2 digit DIG groups
DIG = number of DIG groups
n = average name length
NA = number of names
SL = number of non-Analog (500/2500 type) DNs (including trunk
routes, ACD, ATTN) with or without name defined.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 69 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Note 27
Protected memory requirements for ISDN PRA are as follows:
Per system with DCHIs: P_DCH_TBL = 16 words
Per DCHI: P_DCH_BLOCK = 32 words
Note 28
The equation for calculating the protected memory required for trunk routes
is:
B + (X x 92)
where:
B = 256
X = number of routes actually defined
RD = 116 = size(P_ROUTE_DATA)
For each ISA route configured for any IFC, add 10 words for the
ISA_SRVC_BLOCK
If Protected call reference table:
If DCHI is in “PRA” mode 1 + M x (# of PRI or 2Mb PRI loops controlled by
DCHI)
where:
M = 24 for PRI, and 31 for 2Mb PRI
If DCHI is in “ISL” mode 1 + (maximum number of ISL trunks defined)
If DCHI is in “SHARED” mode 1 + (M x # of PRI/2Mb PRI loops controlled by DCHI)
+ (maximum # of ISL trunks defined)
where:
M + 24 for PRI and 31 for 2Mb PRI
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 70 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Note 29
A pointer has been added to fix memory. The name of the pointer is
“ISA_SID_MTHPTR” and is set to nil when SID is not defined for ISDN
routes.
A data block of 32 words is defined and accessed through the pointer if SID
is defined for at least one ISDN route in the system. This data block contains
the pointer to SID tables for each customer. The structure mapping onto this
data block is “ISA_CUSTID_TPTR”.
(size (ISA_CUSTID_TPTR = 100))
A data block of 128 words is allocated to each customer if at least one route
is defined as having SID. The structure mapping onto this data block is
“ISA_SID_RT_LIST”. The size of this data block is 512.
Note 30
Protected ISL trunk TN table = 1 + maximum number of ISL trunks defined
Note 31
The equation for calculating the protected memory requirements for customer
data is:
B + (X x (P + A))
where:
B = 320
X = number of customer groups actually defined
P = protected customer data = 255
A = auxiliary customer data = 59
If a background terminal is equipped, an additional auxiliary data block is
allocated which requires 43 words. This brings the total memory requirement
to 357 words.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 71 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Note 32
If the system is equipped with Speed Call package (66) and MSCL defined
by LD 17 as being greater than zero, the protected memory required for the
SCL main header table is:
N + A
where:
N = # of header words
A = number of SCL as defined in LD 17 (MSCL), otherwise no
protected storage is required.
Note 33
For each customer, an additional 256 words is needed for PREXL_SCLN in
pool CDB (compool).
Note 34
A bit is required in the customer data block to indicate if EBLF is allowed/
denied.
A bit is required in the protected attendant block whether or not the ATTN
console has CGM configured on the attendant console.
Additional protected memory is required, depending on the system
configuration, and is allocated only if EBLF is turned on.
Words required:
XX x ((ZZ - 3) x YY x 11)
where:
XX = number of customers who will have EBLF
YY = average number of hundreds group per customer
ZZ = average DN length (4, 5, 6, 7)
There are 104 words allocated in the fixed protected memory even if EBLF
is not being used.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 72 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Note 35
Flexible Tones and Cadences (FTC):
FTC Pointers: 32 words
FTC tables: 187 x (# of FTC tables) (default = 1, others can be
allocated using LD 56)
Note 36
Enhanced Flexible Tones and Cadences (EFTC)
MCAD pointers: 256 words
MCAD table: 18 x (# of MCAD tables) (default = 15, others can be
allocated using LD 56)
Note 37
Network ACD has resulted in an increase of 7 words to the Protected ACD
block (already accounted for in “Note 9” on page 62).
In addition, add 115 words per Source ACD-DN, as shown in the associated
target table {0,2}, and 174 words per target ACD-DN.
Note 38
The protected data store for TRUNK BARRING consists of two structures:
TBAR_BLOCK 66 words
RCDT_BLOCK 3 + number of access restriction tables (ARTs)
Note 39
The total protected data store increases by the following amount per system
(12 x BGD) + (5 x CUST) + (3 x ROUTE) + TRUNK
where:
BGD = number of background terminals
CUST = number of customers
ROUTE = number of trunk routes
TRUNK = number of trunks
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 73 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Note 40
The protected data store for FFC consists of three structures:
Note 41
NAS has one protected data structure added:
Note 42
The protected data store for ABCD consists of two structures:
Note 43
Model telephones require the same protected memory as the corresponding
telephone type.
Note 44
Model trunks require the same protected memory as the corresponding trunk
type.
Structure name Increase in number of words
FFC_DNXL_BLOCK 13
FFC_GRHP_BLOCK 2
FFC_ELK_PASS 3
Structure name Increase in number of words
NAS_SCHED_BLK 32 + (3 x schedule period)
Structure name Increase in number of words
ABCDHT 256
ABCDDATABLOCK 120
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 74 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Note 45
Requirements for the voice/data port are the same except the key layout
portion of the template requires
7 + (# of non-key features) / (# of telephones sharing the same
template).
Note 46
Requirements for the voice/data port are the same except the key layout
portion of the template requires
9 + (# of non-key features) / (# of telephones sharing the same
template).
Note 47
Requirements for the voice/data port are the same except the key layout
portion of the template requires
17 + (# of non-key features) / (# of telephones sharing the same
template).
Note 48
The following table shows protected memory storage requirements for ISDN
BRI.
Per System:
HT + DATA * G + MT + BT
where
HT = 16 = size (P_BRI_PROT_HT)
DATA = 5 = size (P_BRI_PROT_DATA)
G = # of groups
MT = 128 = size (P_MSDL_MISP_TABLE)
BT = 96 = size (SYS_BRSC)
and
HT is BRI protocol group table
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 75 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
DATA is BRI protocol group data block
BT is system BRSC pointer table
LAPD Protocol:
LAPD protocol group master head ptr (P_BRI_PROTMHTPTR) =
LAPD protocol group table (BRI_PROT_GRPTR[]) =
LAPD protocol group data (P_BRI_PROT_DATA) = 5
Per MISP:
MLB + MMB + SID + PIO + IO
where
MLB = 145 = size (PMISPLOOP_BLOCK)
MMB = 50 = size (P_MSDLMISP_BLOCK)
SID = 49 = size (P_SOCKET_ID_TABLE)
PIO = 5 = size (PHY_MISP_IOBLK)
IO = 259 = increase per MISP in size (IO_TABLE)
and
PIO is Physical IO block
IO is IO table
A typical large system will support about 5 MISPs.
Per DSL (Digital Subscriber Loop):
BB + ODAS + CLS + DD + BD + USID + TB + TF
where
BB = 26 = size (PBCSBLOCK) digital set
ODAS = 3 = data services addend to PBCSBLOCK
CLS = 12 = CLS: EFD, HUNT, EHT @ 4w each
DD = 17 = size (P_BRI_DSL_DATA) (nonkey function)
BD = 40 = size (P_BRI_LTID_DATA) (nonkey function)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 76 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
USID = 16 = size (P_BRI_USID_MAP)
TB = 15 = Template(base)
TF = 4 = Template(features): LTID, EFD, HUNT, EHT @ 4w each
Each MISP can control up to 4 line cards. Each line card can hold up to 8
DSL's.
Per TSP (Terminal Service Profile):
TSP + BRIDN * NDN
where
TSP = 76 = size (P_BRI_TSP_DATA)
BRIDN = 7 = size (BRI_DNBLOCK)
NDN = # BRI DN's
Each DSL can hold up to 16 TSP’s. Each TSP supports 8 physical sets and 20
logical units.
Per BRSC (): (BRSC is a Release 19 innovation that increases the number of
line cards served by one MISP from 4 to 120)
BB
where
BB = 34 = size (P_BRSC_BLOCK)
Each MISP can control 8 BRSC cards. Each BRSC can control 15 line cards.
Note 49
The size of the protected line block for SL-1 sets is determined from the
following (size in SL-1 words):
Feature Memory Requirements
Basic Line Block 21
Basic Line Block (ODAS) 24
Card Block Component 2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 77 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
The key layout portion of the template for :
M2006 10 + (# of non-key features) / rs
M2008 10 + (# of non-key features) / rs
M2216 20 + 30 x (#AOM) + (# of non-key features) / rs
M2616 20 + 30 x (#AOM) + (# of non-key features) / rs
where rs = the number of sets sharing the same template, and #AOM = the
number of add-on modules.
In addition to the basic line block requirement, each feature requires extra
data space as follows:
Table 16
Feature memory requirements (Part 1 of 3)
Feature Memory Requirements
ACD Agent Key 1
ACD Display Queue Key 2
ACD IN-CALLS Key 11
ACD Interflow Key 2
ACD night service DN 2
Associate Set (AST) 1
Authcode 6-24
Autodial Key 1-6
Automatic Wakeup 2
Call Forward key 1-6
Call Park 2
Call Party Name Display 1
CFCT feature 2
CFNA DN 4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 78 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Conference Autodial Key 1-6
Conference hotline key 3-10
Conference speed call key 1
DID Route Control 1
DIG Key 2
DN Key 2
EFD DN 4
EHT DN 4
Enhanced Hot Line DN 2-10
FAXS 17
Flash Call Key 1
Flash Override Call Key 1
Hot Line DN 2-10
HUNT DN 4
Immediate Call Key 1
Last Number Redial 1-8
Message Center DN 2
Message Registration 1
Notification Keylamp 1
Park Key 1
Pretranslation Enhancement 1/2
Table 16
Feature memory requirements (Part 2 of 3)
Feature Memory Requirements
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 79 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Note 50
The following calculation applies to Template memory requirements:
HDT + (# of templates) * (avg. template length)
Where:
HDT = 4097 = size(TEMPLATE_HD_TBL)
Note 51
The protected data store requirements for Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP)
(on a per-customer basis) are:
BASIC_ESN + SC x 3 + RL x (8 + 3 x RLE) + DME x (3 + I/4)
Priority Call Key 1
Private Call Key 2
SCI/CCOS/RMS 2
Signal Key 2
Speed Call Controller 1
Speed Call user 1
Stored number redial 1-8
Tenant Number 1
Time and Date Key 1
Voice call Key 2
Table 16
Feature memory requirements (Part 3 of 3)
Feature Memory Requirements
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 80 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
where,
BASIC_ESN = SIZE(ESN_DATA_BLOCK) +
SIZE(NCTL_DATA_BLOCK)
SIZE(ESN_DATA_BLOCK) = 131
SIZE(NCTL_DATA_BLOCK) = 506
SC = number of steering codes
RL = the number of route lists
RLE = the average number of route lists entries per route list
DME = the number of distinct digit manipulation entries
I = the average number of digits that must be inserted as part of digit
manipulation
CDP Steering Codes also occupy DN tree spaces. This portion of data store
is calculated in DN tree formula. (See“Note 3” on page 35).
Note 52
Protected data store for the BGD Automatic Timed Job feature:
= (for blocklength) + 13 * ATJE Words
Where:
ATJE = number of Automatic Timed Job Entries ranges from 1 to 12.
Note 53
Protected memory requirements for MFRs:
MFRs will use 7 words per card + 2 words per unit (up to 2 units per card)
Note 54
Protected memory requirements in words for Tone Detectors:
= size (PTDET_BLOCK) = 2 +1 word from TDET_LIST
= 3 * (# TDET's)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 81 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Note 55
DTI/DLI protected data (in words) is comprised of:
PDD_BLOCK + (N x P_DTI_TSET_BLOCK)
+ (T + L) x local network data)
+ (L x (P_LOOP_DLI + preallocated card data))
= 21 + (N x 11) + ((T + L) x 70) + (L x (19 + 144))
Where:
N = the number of Threshold Sets
T = the number of DTI loops
L = the number of DLI loops
Note 56
For each PRI or PRI2 loop configured, add 7 words for the
P_PRILP_BLOCK to the PTERM LOOP_BLOCK (= 78)
Note 57
Protected memory requirements for DCH:
P_DCH_BLOCK = 89 words
Protected call reference table:
= If DCH is in “PRA” mode:
1 + M words, where M is defined as follows:
If PRI is defined:
M = NChan * (nn + 1)
If PRI is NOT defined:
M = NChan * [1 (for primary channel) + 1 (if backup channel is on)]
Where:
nn = Highest Loop Interface Id (defined in Ovl17 by PRI lll nn), and
NChan = 24 for PRI and 31 for PRI2.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 82 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
If DCH is in “ISL” mode:
1 + (maximum number of ISL trunks defined)
If DCH is in “SHARED” mode:
1 + (M * # of PRI/PRI2 loops controlled by DCH) +
(maximum number of ISL trunks defined)
where M = 24 for PRI, and 31 for PRI2.
Note 58
The protected data store requirements for DTI2 is as follows:
DTI2_SYSTEM_DATA = 11 words
DTI2_SCAT_HT = 16 words
DTI2_SCAT = 95 words
DTI2_PDCA_HT = 16 words
DTI2_PDCA = 10 words
Note 59
The logical applications are AML, DCH, and SDI.
logical master head table = 4 words
logical application head table for
SDI = 16 words
AML = 16 words
DCH = 64 words
Total (if all three applications are used) = 100 words
Note 60
Memory requirements for physical I/O table:
I/O polling table = 3 + (# of serial I/O devices) + (# of service loops)
In addition to the above, memory is also allocated for each existing physical
card for a service loop or serial I/O device as follows:
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 83 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Service loops:
TDS = 4 MISP = 5 MSS = 4 XCT = 4PMON = 4
I/O Serial Devices:
ESDI, DCH, SDI, SDI2, SDI3, SDI4 = 7
MSDL = 13
Note 61
Limited Access to Overlays (LAPW)
The number of words required to store protected data for this feature can
range from 38 to 5950, as listed below:
Fixed Address Globals (already accounted for in the first table item):
Protected pointer to the main LAPW data structure
(LAPW_DATA_BLK) = 1 word
“Invalid login threshold” and “lock-out time” = 1 word
System defined passwords (PWD1 and PWD2) = 16 words
Port lock-out information (MAX_NUM_OT_TTYS = 16) = 2 words per
TTY
Audit trail (size of configured buffer) = 0 - 1000 words
Dynamically allocated storage per Limited Access Password (LAPW):
Configured optional data = 1 word
Password = 8 words
Overlay restriction data = 7 words
Customer and Tenant restriction data (1 word per Customer/Tenant) = 0-
32 words
Pointer to password blocks = 1 word
= 17 + # of tenants
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 84 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Note 62
Protected data store for the Name Display DMS feature. Dynamically
allocated per terminating number of a DMS number (= 3 words).
Note 63
FGD ANI database memory requirements:
guide = ANI = xxx-xxx-xxxx (10 digits) = npa-nxx-sub
Up to 31 different ANI data blocks (tables) per SL-1 system could be
configured in order to provide flexibility of ANI screening. Once an ANI data
block (table) is created:
ANI HEAD BLOCK (FGDANI_HEADER) (fixed size):
1 word + (contains master pointers to all the 31 ANI Datablocks in the
system)
31 words (contains pointers to each of the 31 ANI datablocks)
NPA BLOCK (dynamically allocated by # of NPAs configured):
6 words (TRMT_INFO in NPA_BLK) + (3 words (NPATYPE) * (# NPAs
configured for this ANI data block));
up to 160 NPAs can be configured in a NPA block
NXX HEAD BLOCK (Dynamically allocated by # of NXX blocks):
1 word + (3 words (HDBLKTYPE) * (# NXX blocks configured));
Up to 7 NXX blocks can be configured under one NPA block.
NXX BLOCKS (NXX_BLK) (Fixed size 255 words)
SUB HEAD BLOCK (Dynamically allocated by # of SUB blocks):
1 word + (3 words (SUBTYPE) * (# SUB blocks configured));
Up to 118 SUB blocks can be configured under one NXX block.
SUB BLOCKS (SUB_BLK) (Fixed size 256 words)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory, Storage and CPU capacity Page 85 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Note 64
Requirements for voice/data port are the same (see“Note 2” on page 35)
except the key layout portion of the template requires 34 + (# of nonkey
features) / (# of sets sharing the same template).
Note 65
For all machine types, the additional protected data store for a virtual terminal
(DS, access TN, or VMS access TN) is exactly the same with one exception.
For any of the two TN types, the Card Block Component is dependent on the
shelf/card to which the terminal is assigned. The component is 0 if the TN is
on a preallocated card, and size (PCARDBLOCK)/4 (=2) words otherwise.
(The following shelf/cards are preallocated: 0/1 - 0/7, 1/1 - 1/8, 2/1 - 2/8, or
3/8 on a DLI loop.) Refer to page 66.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 86 of 544 Memory, Storage and CPU capacity
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 87 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
156
Chapter 2 — Provisioning
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
List of tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
List of Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Provisioning a new system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Defining and forecasting growth .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Estimating CCS per terminal .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Comparative method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Manual calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Default method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Calculating number of trunks required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Calculating line, trunk, and console load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Line load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Trunk load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Console load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Calculating Digitone receiver requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Model 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Model 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Model 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Model 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Detailed calculation: Method 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 88 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Detailed calculation: Method 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Calculating total system load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Calculating number of loops required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Calculating number of IPE cards required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Provisioning conference/TDS loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Conference loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
TDS loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Calculating memory requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Assigning equipment and preparing equipment summary . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Calculating battery backup time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Worksheet A: Growth forecast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Worksheet B: Total load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Worksheet C: System cabinet / Main chassis requirements . . . . . . . . . . 138
Worksheet D: Unprotected memory calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Worksheet E: Protected memory calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Worksheet F: Equipment summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Worksheet G: System power consumption .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Worksheet Ga: System power consumption: Main cabinet . . . . . . . . . . 146
Worksheet Gb: System power consumption: first expansion cabinet . . 147
Worksheet Gc: System power consumption: second expansion cabinet . 148
Worksheet Gd: System power consumption: third expansion cabinet . . 149
Worksheet Ge: System power consumption: fourth expansion cabinet . 150
Worksheet Gf: Total Option 11C system power consumption .. . . . . . . 151
Worksheet Gg: Option 11C Mini power consumption: Main chassis . . 151
Worksheet Gh: Option 11C Mini power consumption: Chassis
expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Worksheet Gi: Total Option 11C Mini system power consumption . . . 152
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 89 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Worksheet H: Battery current and AC line calculation for AC systems
using NTAK75 and NTAK76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Worksheet I: Battery current calculation for customer-provided DC
reserve power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
List of tables
• Table 22: “Trunk traffic — Poisson 1 percent blocking” on page 112
• Table 23: “Trunk traffic — Poisson 2 percent blocking” on page 114
• Table 24: “Digitone receiver (DTR) requirements — Model 1” on
page 117
• Table 25; “Digitone receiver (DTR) requirements — Model 2” on
page 118
• Table 26: “Digitone receiver (DTR) requirements — Model 3” on
page 119
• Table 27: “Digitone receiver (DTR) requirements — Model 4” on
page 120
• Table 28: “Digitone receiver (DTR) load capacity — 6 to 15 second
holding time” on page 121
• Table 29: “Digitone receiver (DTR) load capacity — 16 to 25 second
holding time” on page 123
• Table 30: “Digitone receiver (DTR) requirements — Poisson 0.1 percent
blocking” on page 126
• Table 33: “Conference and TDS loop requirements” on page 131
• Table 34: “Digitone receiver provisioning” on page 132
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 90 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
List of Worksheets
• “Worksheet A: Growth forecast” on page 135
• “Worksheet B: Total load” on page 137
• “Worksheet C: System cabinet / Main chassis requirements” on
page 138.
• “Worksheet D: Unprotected memory calculations” on page 141
• “Worksheet E: Protected memory calculations” on page 142
• “Worksheet F: Equipment summary” on page 143
• “Worksheet G: System power consumption” on page 144
— “Worksheet Ga: System power consumption: Main cabinet” on
page 146
— “Worksheet Gb: System power consumption: first expansion
cabinet” on page 147
— “Worksheet Gc: System power consumption: second expansion
cabinet” on page 148
— “Worksheet Gd: System power consumption: third expansion
cabinet” on page 149
— “Worksheet Ge: System power consumption: fourth expansion
cabinet” on page 150
— “Worksheet Gf: Total Option 11C system power consumption” on
page 151
— “Worksheet Gg: Option 11C Mini power consumption: Main
chassis” on page 151
— “Worksheet Gh: Option 11C Mini power consumption: Chassis
expander” on page 152
— “Worksheet Gi: Total Option 11C Mini system power consumption”
on page 152
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 91 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
• Worksheet H: Battery current and AC line calculation for AC systems
using NTAK75 and NTAK76 on page 153
• Worksheet I: Battery current calculation for customer-provided DC
reserve power on page 154
Introduction
This chapter outlines the procedures required to determine equipment
requirements.
Provisioning a new system
The following summarizes the tasks required to provision a new system:
1 Define and forecast growth (page 91).
2 Estimate CCS per terminal (page 93).
3 Calculate number of trunks required (page 97).
4 Calculate line, trunk, and console load (page 98).
5 Calculate DTR requirements (page 99).
6 Calculate total system load (page 102).
7 Calculate number of loops required (page 102).
8 Calculate number of IPE cards required (page 103).
9 Provision Conference/TDS loops (page 108).
10 Calculate memory requirements (page 110).
11 Assign equipment and prepare equipment summary (page 110).
12 Calculate battery backup time (page 110).
Defining and forecasting growth
The first step in provisioning a new system is to forecast the number of
telephones required at two-year and five-year intervals.
The number of telephones required when the system is placed in service
(cutover) is determined by the customer. If the customer is unable to provide
a two-year and five-year growth forecast, then an estimate of annual
personnel growth in percent is used to estimate the number of telephones
required at the two-year and five-year intervals.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 92 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Example
A customer has 180 employees and needs 100 telephones to meet the system
cutover. The customer projects an annual increase of 5 percent of employees
based in future business expansion. The employee growth forecast is:
• 180 employees x 0.05 (percent growth) = 9
• 189 employees x 0.05 = 10 additional employees at 1 year
• 199 employees x 0.05 = 10 additional employees at 2 years
• 209 employees x 0.05 = 10 additional employees at 3 years
• 219 employees x 0.05 = 11 additional employees at 4 years
• 230 employees x 0.05 = 12 additional employees at 5 years
The ratio of telephones to employees is 100/180, which equals 0.556.
To determine the number of telephones required from cutover through a five-
year interval, the number of employees required at cutover, one, two, three,
four and five years is multiplied by the ratio of telephones to employees
(0.556).
• 180 employees x 0.556 = 100 telephones at cutover
• 189 employees x 0.556 = 105 telephones at 1 year
• 199 employees x 0.556 = 111 telephones at 2 years
• 209 employees x 0.556 = 116 telephones at 3 years
• 219 employees x 0.556 = 122 telephones at 4 years
• 230 employees x 0.556 = 128 telephones at 5 years
This customer requires 100 telephones at cutover, 111 telephones at two
years, and 128 telephones at five years
Each DN assigned to a 500/2500 telephone requires a TN. Determine the
number of 500/2500 TNs required for each customer and enter this
information in “Worksheet A: Growth forecast” on page 135. Perform this
calculation for cutover, two-year and five-year intervals.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 93 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Estimating CCS per terminal
Estimate the station and trunk CCS per terminal (CCS/T) for the installation
of a system using any one of the following methods:
• comparative method
• manual calculation
• default method
Comparative method
Select three existing systems which have a record of traffic study data. The
criteria for choosing comparative systems are:
• similar line size (+ 25 percent)
• similar business (such as bank, hospital, insurance, manufacturing)
• similar locality (urban or rural)
Once similar systems have been selected, their station, trunk, and intra CCS/
T are averaged. The averages are then applied to calculate trunk requirements
for the system being provisioned (see the example in Table 17).
Table 17
Example of station, trunk, and intra CCS/T averaging
Customer A Customer B Customer C Total Average
Line size 200 250 150 600 200
Line CCS/T 4.35 4.75 3.50 12.60 4.20
Trunk CCS/T 2.60 3.0 2.0 7.60 2.50
Intra CCS/T 1.70 1.75 1.50 4.95 1.65
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 94 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
If only the trunk CCS/T is available, multiply the trunk CCS/T by 0.5 to
determine the intra-CCS/T (assuming a normal traffic pattern of 33 percent
incoming calls, 33 percent outgoing calls, and 33 percent intra-system calls).
The trunk CCS/T and intra CCS/T are then added to arrive at the line CCS/T
(see the example in Table 18).
The individual CCS/T per trunk group is not added to form the trunk CCS/T.
The trunk CCS/T is the total trunk load divided by the total number of lines
at cutover.
From the preceding information, trunk CCS/T can be computed as follows:
trunk CCS/T = total trunk load in CCS/ (number of lines) = 959/234 = 4.1
Assuming a 33 percent intra-calling ratio:
intra CCS/T = 4.1 x 0.5 = 2.1
line CCS/T = 4.1 (trunk CCS/T) + 2.1 (intra CCS/T) = 6.2
Table 18
Example of CCS/T averaging when only trunk CCS/T is known
Trunk type
Number of
trunks
Grade of
service
Load in CCS
Number
of terms
CCS/T
DID 16 P.01 294 234 1.20
CO 14 P.02 267 234 1.14
Tie 7 P.05 118 215 0.54
Paging 2 10 CCS/trunk 20 207 0.09
Out WATS 4 30 CCS/trunk 120 218 0.54
FX 2 30 CCS/trunk 60 218 0.27
Private line 4 20 CCS/trunk 80 4 20.00
Total: 959 Total: 23.78
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 95 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Manual calculation
Normally, the customer can estimate the number of trunks required at cutover
and specify the grade of service to be maintained at two-year and five-year
periods (see Table 19). (If not, use the comparative method described on
page 93.)
The number of trunks can be read from the appropriate trunking table to select
the estimated usage on the trunk group. The number of lines that are accessing
the group at cutover are divided into the estimated usage. The result is the
CCS/T which can be used to estimate trunk requirements.
Example:
• Line CCS/T = 6.2
• Trunk CCS/T = 4.1
• 2 consoles = 30 CCS
Table 19
Example of manual calculation of CCS/T
Cutover Line CCS = 275 x 6.2 = 1705
Trunk CCS = 275 x 4.1 = 1128
Subtotal = 2833
Console CCS = 30
Total system load = 2863
2 years Line CCS = 304 x 6.2 = 1885
Trunk CCS = 304 x 4.1 = 1247
Subtotal = 3132
Console CCS = 30
Total system load = 3162
5 years Line CCS = 352 x 6.2 = 2183
Trunk CCS = 352 x 4.1 = 1444
Subtotal = 3627
Console CCS = 30
Total system load = 3657
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 96 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
This method is used for each trunk group in the system, with the exception of
small special services trunk groups (such as tie, WATS, and FX trunks).
Normally, the customer will tolerate a lesser grade of service on these trunk
groups. Table 20 lists the estimated usage on special services trunks.
Default method
Studies conducted estimate that the average line CCS/T is never greater than
5.5 in 90 percent of all businesses. If attempts to calculate the CCS/T using
the comparative method or the manual calculation are not successful, the
default of 5.5 line CCS/T can be used.
The network line usage is determined by multiplying the number of lines by
5.5 CCS/T. The total is then multiplied by two to incorporate the trunk CCS/
T. However, when this method is used, the intra CCS/T is added twice to the
equation, and the result could be over provisioning if the intra CCS/T is high.
Another difficulty experienced with this method is the inability to forecast
individual trunk groups. The trunk and intra CCS/T are forecast as a sum
group total. Examples of the default method and the manual calculation
method are shown in Table 21 for comparison.
Table 20
Estimated load per trunk
Trunk type CCS
Tie 30
Foreign exchange 30
Out WATS 30
In WATS 30
Paging 10
Dial dictation 10
Individual bus lines 20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 97 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Example:
• 275 stations at cutover
• 304 stations at two years
• 352 stations at five years
Cutover: 275 x 5.5 (CCS/T) x 2 = 3025 CCS total system load
Two-year: 304 x 5.5 (CCS/T) x 2 = 3344 CCS total system load
Five-year: 352 x 5.5 (CCS/T) x 2 = 3872 CCS total system load
Calculating number of trunks required
Enter the values obtained through any of the three previous methods in
Worksheet A. Add the calculations to the worksheet. Once the trunk CCS/T
is known and a grade of service has been specified by the customer, the
number of trunks required per trunk group to meet cutover, two-year, and
five-year requirements is determined as shown in the following example.
Example
The customer requires a Poisson 1 percent blocking grade of service (see
Reference Table 1). The estimated trunk CCS/T is 1.14 for a DID trunk
group. With the cutover, two-year, and five-year number of lines, the total
trunk CCS is determined by multiplying the number of lines by the trunk
CCS/T:
Cutover: 275 (lines) x 1.14 (trunk CCS/T) = 313.5 CCS
Two-year: 304 (lines) x 1.14 (trunk CCS/T) = 346.56 CCS
Five-year: 352 (lines) x 1.14 (trunk CCS/T) = 401.28 CCS
Table 21
Default method and manual calculations analysis
Default method Manual calculations Difference
Cutover 3025 2863 CCS 162 CCS
Two years 3344 3162 CCS 182 CCS
Five years 3872 3657 CCS 215 CCS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 98 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Use Reference Table 2 on page 114 to determine the quantity of trunks
required to meet the trunk CCS at cutover, two-year, and five-year intervals.
In this case:
• 17 DID trunks are required at cutover
• 18 DID trunks are required in two years
• 21 DID trunk are required in five years
For trunk traffic greater than 4427 CCS, allow 29.5 CCS/T.
Calculating line, trunk, and console load
Once the quantity of trunks required has been estimated, enter the quantities
in Worksheet A for cutover, two-year, and five-year intervals. This
calculation must be performed for each trunk group to be equipped. The total
trunk CCS/T is the sum of each individual trunk group CCS/T. This value is
also entered in “Worksheet A: Growth forecast” on page 135.
Line load
Line load is calculated by multiplying the total number of 500-telephone TNs
by the line CCS/T. The number of TNs is determined as follows:
• one TN for every DN assigned to one or more Analog (500/2500 type)
telephone
• one TN for every Meridian Digital Telephone without data option
• two TNs for every Meridian Digital Telephone with data option
Trunk load
Trunk load is calculated by multiplying the total number of digital telephone
and 500-line TNs which have access to the trunk route by the CCS/T per trunk
route.
Console load
Console load is calculated by multiplying the number of consoles by 30 CCS
per console.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 99 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Calculating Digitone receiver requirements
The NTDK20 SSC card and the NTDK97 MSC card meet all DTR
requirements. DTR provisioning methods are provided below for exceptional
cases requiring extra DTR capacity.
The Option 11C system has 50 universal card slots when four expansion
cabinets are equipped. The maximum possible number of lines is therefore:
50 cards x 16 units/card = 800 lines
Reference Tables 24 through Table 27 are based on models of traffic
environments and can be used to determine DTR needs in most cases.
When the system being provisioned does not fall within the bounds of these
models or is equipped with any special features, the detailed calculations
must be performed for each feature. The number of DTRs must accommodate
the highest result.
Some special features are:
• Authorization Code
• Centralized Attendant Service (CAS)
• Charge Account for Call Detail Recording (CDR)
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
• Integrated Messaging System Link
From the appropriate reference table (Tables 24 through Table 27), determine
the number of DTRs required and the DTR load for cutover, two-year, and
five-year intervals. Record this information in Worksheet B on “Worksheet
B: Total load” on page 137.
The following models are based on some common PBX traffic
measurements.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 100 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Model 1
Table 24, “Digitone receiver (DTR) requirements — Model 1,” on page 117
is based on the following factors:
• 33 percent intra-office calls, 33 percent incoming calls, and 33 percent
outgoing calls
• 1.5 percent dial tone delay grade of service
• no Digitone DID trunks or incoming Digitone tie trunks
Model 2
Table 25, “Digitone receiver (DTR) requirements — Model 2,” on page 118
is based on the following factors:
• the same traffic pattern as Model 1
• Digitone DID trunks or incoming Digitone tie trunks
• Poisson 0.1 percent blockage grade of service
Model 3
Table 26, “Digitone receiver (DTR) requirements — Model 3,” on page 119
is based on the following factors:
• 15 percent intra-office calls, 28 percent incoming calls, and 56 percent
outgoing calls
• 1.5 percent dial tone delay grade of service
• no Digitone DID trunks or incoming Digitone tie trunks
Model 4
Table 27, “Digitone receiver (DTR) requirements — Model 4,” on page 120
is based on the following factors:
• the same traffic pattern as Model 3
• Digitone DID trunks or incoming Digitone tie trunks
• Poisson 0.1 percent blockage grade of service
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 101 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Detailed calculation: Method 1
This method can be used when there are no incoming Digitone DID trunks
and the following is assumed:
• Digitone receiver traffic is inflated by 30 percent to cover unsuccessful
dialing attempts.
• Call holding time used in intra-office and outgoing call calculations is
135 seconds if unknown.
• Digitone receiver holding times are 6.2 and 14.1 seconds for intra and
outgoing calls respectively.
• Factor (1 - R)/ 2 in (1) outgoing (incoming calls and outgoing calls are
equal). R is the intra-office ratio.
Follow the procedure below for detailed calculation Method 1.
1 Calculate Digitone calls:
Intra-office traffic = 100 x Digitone station traffic (CCS) x R
call holding time in seconds 2
Outgoing traffic = 100 x Digitone station traffic x (1-R)
call holding time in seconds 2
Calculate total DTR traffic:
Total DTR traffic = 1.3 x [(6.2 x intra) + (14.1 x outgoing)]
100
Calculate average holding time:
Average holding time = (6.2 x intra) + (14.1 x outgoing)
(intra calls + outgoing calls)
2 See Tables 22 and 23 and use the answers from steps 2 and 3 to determine
the number of DTRs required.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 102 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Detailed calculation: Method 2
This method is used when incoming Digitone trunks are included in the
system. This method uses the same assumptions as Method 1, with the DTR
holding time assumed to be 2.5 seconds for a DID call. Follow the procedure
below for detailed calculation Method 2.
1 Calculate intra-office and outgoing Digitone calls as shown in step 1 of
Method 1:
DID calls = 100 x Digitone station traffic (in CCS)
call holding time in seconds
2 Calculate total DTR traffic:
DTR traffic = 1.3 x [(6.2 x intra) + (14.1 x outgoing)] + (2.5 x DID calls)
100
3 See Table 30, “Digitone receiver (DTR) requirements — Poisson 0.1
percent blocking,” on page 126 and use the answer from step 2 to
determine the number of DTRs required.
Calculating total system load
Total the line, trunk, console and DTR load for each customer to get the total
load figure for each customer, two-year and five-year intervals. Enter this
figure into “Worksheet B: Total load” on page 137.
Calculating number of loops required
Loop provisioning is not required with Option 11C since each card is
automatically assigned to its own loop. By default, the system is non-
blocking.
Each cabinet can house up to 10 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) cards.
Each Option 11C Mini chassis can house up to 4 IPE cards.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 103 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Calculating number of IPE cards required
Using information from “Worksheet A: Growth forecast” on page 135, enter
the number of Meridian Digital Telephone TNs, Analog (500/2500 type)
TNs, and trunk TNs required at cutover, two-year, and five-year intervals (for
all customers) in “Worksheet C: System cabinet / Main chassis requirements”
on page 138.
Divide each entry by the number of TN assignments for each card, round up
to the next higher figure, and total the number of cards required.
IPE card slot assignments with IP Expansion
If you are using IP Expansion cabinets, then trunk and line cards may be
distributed throughout each of the system cabinets in such a way as to allow
for survival operation. The intent is for a cabinet equipped with both trunk
and line cards in survival mode to still handle calls.
IPE card slot assignments without IP Expansion
If you are not using IP Expansion cabinets, then trunk and line cards should
be placed in the system cabinets in such a way as to allow for future
expansion. Line cards are placed in the left hand slots of the cabinets. If the
system is using the default numbering plan and consecutive DN numbering is
desired, the line cards should be placed one after another leaving no blank
slots in between. Trunk cards are placed in the right hand slots of the cabinets.
Plan the card slot assignments so that the trunk and line card growth is
towards the middle. For example Figure 6 on page 105 shows the slot
assignment plan for systems equipped with two expansion cabinets.
IPE card slot assignments on the Option 11C Mini Main Chassis
Digital trunks cards must be placed in the main chassis. Slot 4 must contain
the 48 port DLC. Figure 9 on page 107 shows the typical card slot assignment
for the Option 11C Mini Main.
Note: Slot 4 is keyed to prevent accidental insertion of cards other than
the 48 port DLC.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 104 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
IPE card slot assignments on the Option 11C mini chassis
expander
Any IPE card may be placed in cards slots 7 through 9. Slot 10 can contain
any IPE card or the Meridian Mail Mini. Refer to Figure 10 on page 108.
When planning the number of card slots that will be required in a system, the
following items must be considered in addition to IPE card requirements:
• Additional SDI/DCHI/ESDI ports
• Tone Detectors (International only)
• Adding Meridian Mail
Figure 4
Card slot assignment plan: one-cabinet system
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 105 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Figure 5
Card slot assignment plan: two-cabinet system without IP expansion.
Figure 6
Card slot assignment plan: three-cabinet system without IP expansion
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 106 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Figure 7
Card slot assignment plan: four-cabinet system without IP expansion
Figure 8
Card slot assignment plan: five-cabinet system without IP expansion
Power
Supply
Meridian
Mail
C
P
U
Power
Supply
Line cards
Power
Supply
Power
Supply
Trunk cards
1st line card 1st trunk card
Power
Supply
Meridian
Mail
C
P
U
Power
Supply
Line cards
Power
Supply
Power
Supply
Power
Supply
Trunk cards
1st line card 1st trunk card
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 107 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Figure 9
Card slot assignment plan: Option 11C Mini Main Chassis
SLOT
0
CPU
SLOT
1
SLOT
2
SLOT
3
48 DLC
SLOT
4
Slots 4, 5, 6
NTDK16 48-port
DLC ONLY
Slot 3 - Any IPE or CE card
Slot 2 - Any IPE or CE card
Slot 1 - Any IPE or CE card
Slot 0 - NTDK97 MSC
Main Chassis
553-9025
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 108 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Figure 10
Card slot assignment plan: Option 11C Mini Chassis Expander
t
Provisioning conference/TDS loops
Conference loops
The Conference function is provided by the NTDK20 Small System
Controller (SSC) in Option 11C, and the NTDK97 Mini System Controller
(MSC) in Option 11C Mini.
For the Option 11C, each conference loop supports 16 conferees. By default,
two conference loops are always active, more becomes active when the
expansion cabinets are equipped. Therefore the SSC supports a total of 32
conferees by itself.
Each port on a Fiber Expansion Daughterboard on the Small System
Controller supports an additional conference loop for a total of:
• 48 conferees when equipped with one Fiber Expansion Link
• 64 conferees when equipped with two Fiber Expansion Link
Slot 9 - Any IPE card
Slot 8 - Any IPE card
Slot 7 - Any IPE card
Chassis Expander
Slot 10 - Meridian Mail
Mini or any IPE card
SLOT
7
SLOT
8
SLOT
9
SLOT
10
553-9032
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 109 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
• 80 conferees when equipped with three Fiber Expansion Link
• 96 conferees when equipped with four Fiber Expansion Link
For the Option 11C Mini, the MSC provides 16 channels of conferencing with
a maximum of six conferees per conference call on conference loop 29. This
allows for up to five simultaneous three-party conferences and up to two
simultaneous six-party conferences.
TDS loops
Option 11C has been engineered such that a single SSC card, SSC, or MSC,
with 30 channels of TDS. This should be enough to meet all TDS
requirements.
To illustrate this point, two examples are given below.
Example 1
Option 11C configured with two expansion cabinets provides 30 slots for
trunk and line cards.
The SSC card can support 7260 CCS of call traffic. A digital line card
supports 16 units per card. A Universal trunk card supports 8 units per card.
The CCS per card would be:
Assume the following:
• An average station generates 6 CCS of traffic
• A 20 percent trunking ratio
• An average trunk generates 22 CCS of traffic.
Digital Line card 16 Units/card x 6 CCS/Unit = 96 CCS/card
Universal trunk card 8 units/card x 22 CCS/Unit = 176 CCS/card
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 110 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
The 30 card slots available can support a system configuration of 384 lines
(24 line cards) and 48 trunks (6 trunk cards). The total CCS for this
configuration will be:
Total CCS: (24 line cards x 96 CCS/card) + (6 trunk cards x 176 CCS/card)
= 2304 CCS + 1056 CCS
= 3360 CCS
If the number you receive is greater than one, you can add an NTAK03 TDS/
DTR card to the system.
Example 2
A system that is more heavily trunked, say a one to one ratio, can support a
configuration of 192 lines (12 line cards) and 144 trunks (18 trunk cards):
Total CCS: 12 line cards x 96 CCS/card + 18 trunk cards x 176 CCS/card
= 1152 CCS + 3168 CCS
= 4320 CCS
The SSC card, at 7260 CCS, still provides plenty of TDS capability.
Calculating memory requirements
Use “Worksheet D: Unprotected memory calculations” on page 141
and“Worksheet E: Protected memory calculations” on page 142 to calculate
memory requirements. Use the two-year figure for telephones, consoles, and
trunks for the calculation. Add 10 percent to the total memory requirements.
Assigning equipment and preparing equipment summary
Use “Worksheet F: Equipment summary” on page 143 to record the
equipment requirements for the complete system at cutover. Assign the
equipment. The equipment summary may have to be updated as a result of
assignment procedures. Use the finalized equipment summary to order the
equipment for the system.
Calculating battery backup time
Use this procedure to determine:
• system power consumption
• battery current for customer-provided DC reserve power
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 111 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
• battery backup time for the NTAK75
• battery backup time for the NTAK76
Use the circuit-card power-consumption table and worksheets provided
below.
Procedure
1 Determine the circuit card configuration in each system cabinet.
Record the card codes against their cabinet slot numbers, on
“Worksheet Ga: System power consumption: Main cabinet” on
page 146 through “Worksheet Ge: System power consumption: fourth
expansion cabinet” on page 150.
2 For each circuit card, transfer the power consumption values from
“Worksheet G: System power consumption” on page 144 to the power-
consumption column on the corresponding
Worksheets Ga - Ge.
3 Calculate the total option 11C system power consumption on
“Worksheet Gf: Total Option 11C system power consumption” on
page 151.
4 If your system is AC-powered, go to “Worksheet H: Battery current and
AC line calculation for AC systems using NTAK75 and NTAK76” on
page 153. If your system is DC-powered, go to“Worksheet I: Battery
current calculation for customer-provided DC reserve power” on
page 154.
5 Transfer the Pout (Main) and Pout (Expan.) values from
Worksheet G to Worksheet H or I.
6 Calculate Pin (Main), I Batt (Main), Pin (Expan), and I Batt (Expan) as
shown on Worksheet H or I.
7 Calculate Iline if required, as shown on Worksheet H.
8 Transfer the values calculated for I Batt (Main) and I Batt (Expan), onto
the NTAK75/QBL24A1 and the NTAK76 discharge time graphs.
9 Select the battery unit that provides the most appropriate backup time.
Note: For customer-provided DC reserve power systems, use I Batt
(Main) and I Batt (Expan) along with the battery manufacturer’s
specifications to determine battery requirements and backup times.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 112 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Table 22
Trunk traffic — Poisson 1 percent blocking (Part 1 of 3)
Trunks CCS Trunks CCS Trunks CCS
1 0.4 25 535 49 1231
2 5.4 26 562 50 1261
3 15.7 27 590 51 1291
4 29.6 28 618 52 1322
5 46.1 29 647 53 1352
6 64 30 675 54 1382
7 84 31 703 55 1412
8 105 32 732 56 1443
9 126 33 760 57 1473
10 149 34 789 58 1504
11 172 35 818 59 1534
12 195 36 847 60 1565
13 220 37 876 61 1595
14 244 38 905 62 1626
15 269 39 935 63 1657
16 294 40 964 64 1687
17 320 41 993 65 1718
18 346 42 1023 66 1749
19 373 43 1052 67 1780
20 399 44 1082 68 1811
21 426 45 1112 69 1842
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 113 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
22 453 46 1142 70 1873
23 480 47 1171 71 1904
24 507 48 1201 72 1935
73 1966 97 2721 121 3488
74 1997 98 2752 122 3520
75 2028 99 2784 123 3552
76 2059 100 2816 124 3594
77 2091 101 2874 125 3616
78 2122 102 2879 126 3648
79 2153 103 2910 127 3681
80 2184 104 2942 128 3713
81 2215 105 2974 129 3746
82 2247 106 3006 130 3778
83 2278 107 3038 131 3810
84 2310 108 3070 132 3843
85 2341 109 3102 133 3875
86 2373 110 3135 134 3907
87 2404 111 3166 135 3939
88 2436 112 3198 136 3972
Table 22
Trunk traffic — Poisson 1 percent blocking (Part 2 of 3)
Trunks CCS Trunks CCS Trunks CCS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 114 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
89 2467 113 3230 137 4004
90 2499 114 3262 138 4037
91 2530 115 3294 139 4070
92 2563 116 3326 140 4102
93 2594 117 3359 141 4134
94 2625 118 3391 142 4167
95 2657 119 3424 143 4199
96 2689 120 3456 144 4231
145 4264 147 4329 149 4395
146 4297 148 4362 150 4427
Table 23
Trunk traffic — Poisson 2 percent blocking (Part 1 of 3)
Trunks CCS Trunks CCS Trunks CCS
1 4 25 571 49 1268
2 7.9 26 562 50 1317
3 20.9 27 627 51 1348
4 36.7 28 656 52 1374
5 55.8 29 685 53 1352
6 76.0 30 715 54 1441
7 96.8 31 744 55 1472
8 119 32 773 56 1503
9 142 33 803 57 1534
Table 22
Trunk traffic — Poisson 1 percent blocking (Part 3 of 3)
Trunks CCS Trunks CCS Trunks CCS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 115 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
10 166 34 832 58 1565
11 191 35 862 59 1596
12 216 36 892 60 1627
13 241 37 922 61 1659
14 267 38 952 62 1690
15 293 39 982 63 1722
16 320 40 1012 64 1752
17 347 41 1042 65 1784
18 374 42 1072 66 1816
19 401 43 1103 67 1817
20 429 44 1133 68 1878
21 458 45 1164 69 1910
22 486 46 1194 70 1941
23 514 47 1125 71 1973
24 542 48 1255 72 2004
73 2036 97 2803 121 3581
74 2067 98 2838 122 3614
75 2099 99 2868 123 3647
76 2130 100 2900 124 3679
77 2162 101 2931 125 3712
78 2194 102 2964 126 3745
79 2226 103 2996 127 3777
Table 23
Trunk traffic — Poisson 2 percent blocking (Part 2 of 3)
Trunks CCS Trunks CCS Trunks CCS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 116 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
80 2258 104 3029 128 3810
81 2290 105 3051 129 3843
82 2322 106 3094 130 3875
83 2354 107 3126 131 3908
84 2368 108 3158 132 3941
85 2418 109 3190 133 3974
86 2450 110 3223 134 4007
87 2482 111 3255 135 4039
88 2514 112 3288 136 4072
89 3546 113 3321 137 4105
90 2578 114 3353 138 4138
91 2611 115 3386 139 4171
92 2643 116 3418 140 4204
93 2674 117 3451 141 4237
94 2706 118 3483 142 4270
95 2739 119 3516 143 4302
96 2771 120 3548 144 4335
145 4368 147 4434 149 4500
146 4401 148 4467 150 4533
Table 23
Trunk traffic — Poisson 2 percent blocking (Part 3 of 3)
Trunks CCS Trunks CCS Trunks CCS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 117 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Table 24
Digitone receiver (DTR) requirements — Model 1
Number of DTRs
Max. number of Digitone
lines
DTR load (CCS)
2 7 2
3 33 9
4 69 19
5 120 33
6 179 49
7 249 68
8 332 88
9 399 109
10 479 131
11 564 154
12 659 178
13 751 203
14 848 229
15 944 255
16 1044 282
Note: See Calculating Digitone receiver requirements on page 99 for Model 1 assumptions.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 118 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Table 25
Digitone receiver (DTR) requirements — Model 2
Number of DTRs
Max. number of Digitone
lines
DTR load (CCS)
2 2 2
3 21 7
4 52 15
5 90 27
6 134 40
7 183 55
8 235 71
9 293 88
10 353 107
11 416 126
12 483 145
13 553 166
14 623 187
15 693 208
16 770 231
Note: See Calculating Digitone receiver requirements on page 99 for Model 2 assumptions.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 119 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Table 26
Digitone receiver (DTR) requirements — Model 3
Number of DTRs
Max. number of Digitone
lines
DTR load (CCS)
2 5 2
3 22 9
4 50 19
5 87 33
6 132 49
7 180 68
8 234 88
9 291 109
10 353 131
11 415 154
12 481 178
13 548 203
14 618 229
15 689 255
16 762 282
Note: See Calculating Digitone receiver requirements on page 99 for Model 3 assumptions.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 120 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Table 27
Digitone receiver (DTR) requirements — Model 4
Number of DTRs
Max. number of Digitone
lines
DTR load (CCS)
2 4 2
3 18 7
4 41 15
5 72 27
6 109 40
7 148 55
8 193 71
9 240 88
10 291 107
11 340 126
12 391 145
13 448 166
14 505 187
15 562 208
16 624 231
Note: See Calculating Digitone receiver requirements on page 99 for Model 4 assumptions.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 121 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Table 28
Digitone receiver (DTR) load capacity — 6 to 15 second holding time (Part 1 of 3)
Average
holding
time in
seconds
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Number of
DTR’s
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 11 10 10 9 9 9 9 8 8 8
4 24 23 22 21 20 19 19 19 18 18
5 41 39 37 36 35 34 33 33 32 32
6 61 57 55 53 52 50 49 49 48 47
7 83 78 75 73 71 69 68 67 66 65
8 106 101 91 94 91 89 88 86 85 84
9 131 125 120 116 113 111 109 107 106 104
10 157 150 144 140 136 133 131 129 127 126
11 185 176 170 165 161 157 154 152 150 148
12 212 203 196 190 185 182 178 176 173 171
13 241 231 223 216 211 207 203 200 198 196
14 270 259 250 243 237 233 229 225 223 220
15 300 288 278 271 264 259 255 251 248 245
16 339 317 397 298 292 286 282 278 274 271
17 361 346 335 327 310 313 319 306 392 298
18 391 377 365 356 348 342 336 331 327 324
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 122 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
19 422 409 396 386 378 371 364 359 355 351
20 454 438 425 414 405 398 393 388 383 379
21 487 469 455 444 435 427 420 415 410 406
22 517 501 487 475 466 456 449 443 438 434
23 550 531 516 504 494 487 479 472 467 562
24 583 563 547 535 524 515 509 502 497 491
25 615 595 579 566 555 545 537 532 526 521
26 647 628 612 598 586 576 567 560 554 548
27 680 659 642 628 618 607 597 589 583 577
28 714 691 674 659 647 638 628 620 613 607
29 746 724 706 690 678 667 659 651 644 637
30 779 758 738 723 709 698 690 682 674 668
31 813 792 771 755 742 729 719 710 703 696
32 847 822 805 788 774 761 750 741 733 726
33 882 855 835 818 804 793 781 772 763 756
34 913 889 868 850 836 825 812 803 795 787
35 947 923 900 883 867 855 844 835 826 818
36 981 957 934 916 900 886 876 866 857 850
Table 28
Digitone receiver (DTR) load capacity — 6 to 15 second holding time (Part 2 of 3)
Average
holding
time in
seconds
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Number of
DTR’s
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 123 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
37 1016 989 967 949 933 919 909 898 889 881
38 1051 1022 1001 982 966 951 938 928 918 912
39 1083 1055 1035 1015 999 984 970 959 949 941
40 1117 1089 1066 1046 1029 1017 1002 990 981 972
Note: Load capacity is measured in CCS.
Table 29
Digitone receiver (DTR) load capacity — 16 to 25 second holding time (Part 1 of 3)
Average
holding
time in
seconds
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Number of
DTRs
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
4 18 18 18 18 18 17 17 17 17 17
5 31 31 31 30 30 30 30 30 30 29
6 47 46 46 45 45 45 45 44 44 44
7 64 63 63 62 62 62 61 61 61 60
Table 28
Digitone receiver (DTR) load capacity — 6 to 15 second holding time (Part 3 of 3)
Average
holding
time in
seconds
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Number of
DTR’s
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 124 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
8 83 82 82 81 80 80 79 79 79 78
9 103 102 101 100 100 99 99 98 98 97
10 125 123 122 121 121 120 119 119 118 118
11 147 145 144 143 142 141 140 140 139 138
12 170 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160
13 193 192 190 189 188 186 185 184 184 183
14 218 216 214 213 211 210 209 208 207 206
15 243 241 239 237 236 234 233 232 231 230
16 268 266 264 262 260 259 257 256 255 254
17 294 292 290 288 286 284 283 281 280 279
18 322 319 317 314 312 311 309 308 306 305
19 347 344 342 339 337 335 334 332 331 329
20 374 371 368 366 364 361 360 358 356 355
21 402 399 396 393 391 388 386 385 383 381
22 431 427 424 421 419 416 414 412 410 409
23 458 454 451 448 445 442 440 438 436 434
24 486 482 478 475 472 470 467 465 463 461
25 514 510 506 503 500 497 495 492 490 488
26 544 539 535 532 529 526 523 521 518 516
Table 29
Digitone receiver (DTR) load capacity — 16 to 25 second holding time (Part 2 of 3)
Average
holding
time in
seconds
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Number of
DTRs
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 125 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
27 573 569 565 561 558 555 552 549 547 545
28 603 598 594 590 587 584 581 578 576 573
29 631 626 622 618 614 611 608 605 602 600
30 660 655 651 646 643 639 636 633 631 628
31 690 685 680 676 672 668 665 662 659 656
32 720 715 710 705 701 698 694 691 688 686
33 751 745 740 735 731 727 724 721 718 715
34 782 776 771 766 761 757 754 750 747 744
35 813 807 801 796 792 788 784 780 777 774
36 341 835 829 824 820 818 814 810 807 804
37 872 865 859 854 849 845 841 837 834 831
38 902 896 890 884 879 875 871 867 863 860
39 934 927 921 914 909 905 901 897 893 890
40 965 952 952 945 940 936 931 927 923 920
Note: Load capacity is measured in CCS.
Table 29
Digitone receiver (DTR) load capacity — 16 to 25 second holding time (Part 3 of 3)
Average
holding
time in
seconds
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Number of
DTRs
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 126 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Table 30
Digitone receiver (DTR) requirements — Poisson 0.1 percent blocking (Part 1 of 2)
Number of DTRs DTR load (CCS) Number of DTRs DTR load (CCS)
1 0 26 469
2 2 27 495
3 7 28 520
4 15 29 545
5 27 30 571
6 40 31 597
7 55 32 624
8 71 33 650
9 88 34 676
10 107 35 703
11 126 36 729
12 145 37 756
13 166 38 783
14 187 39 810
15 208 40 837
16 231 41 865
17 253 42 892
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 127 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
18 276 43 919
19 299 44 947
20 323 45 975
21 346 46 1003
22 370 47 1030
23 395 48 1058
24 419 49 1086
25 444 50 1115
Table 31
Digitone receiver (DTR) load capacity — 16 to 25 second holding time (Part 1 of 3)
Average
holding
time in
seconds
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Number of
DTRs
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
4 18 18 18 18 18 17 17 17 17 17
5 31 31 31 30 30 30 30 30 30 29
6 47 46 46 45 45 45 45 44 44 44
7 64 63 63 62 62 62 61 61 61 60
Table 30
Digitone receiver (DTR) requirements — Poisson 0.1 percent blocking (Part 2 of 2)
Number of DTRs DTR load (CCS) Number of DTRs DTR load (CCS)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 128 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
8 83 82 82 81 80 80 79 79 79 78
9 103 102 101 100 100 99 99 98 98 97
10 125 123 122 121 121 120 119 119 118 118
11 147 145 144 143 142 141 140 140 139 138
12 170 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160
13 193 192 190 189 188 186 185 184 184 183
14 218 216 214 213 211 210 209 208 207 206
15 243 241 239 237 236 234 233 232 231 230
16 268 266 264 262 260 259 257 256 255 254
17 294 292 290 288 286 284 283 281 280 279
18 322 319 317 314 312 311 309 308 306 305
19 347 344 342 339 337 335 334 332 331 329
20 374 371 368 366 364 361 360 358 356 355
21 402 399 396 393 391 388 386 385 383 381
22 431 427 424 421 419 416 414 412 410 409
23 458 454 451 448 445 442 440 438 436 434
24 486 482 478 475 472 470 467 465 463 461
25 514 510 506 503 500 497 495 492 490 488
26 544 539 535 532 529 526 523 521 518 516
Table 31
Digitone receiver (DTR) load capacity — 16 to 25 second holding time (Part 2 of 3)
Average
holding
time in
seconds
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Number of
DTRs
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 129 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
27 573 569 565 561 558 555 552 549 547 545
28 603 598 594 590 587 584 581 578 576 573
29 631 626 622 618 614 611 608 605 602 600
30 660 655 651 646 643 639 636 633 631 628
31 690 685 680 676 672 668 665 662 659 656
32 720 715 710 705 701 698 694 691 688 686
33 751 745 740 735 731 727 724 721 718 715
34 782 776 771 766 761 757 754 750 747 744
35 813 807 801 796 792 788 784 780 777 774
36 341 835 829 824 820 818 814 810 807 804
37 872 865 859 854 849 845 841 837 834 831
38 902 896 890 884 879 875 871 867 863 860
39 934 927 921 914 909 905 901 897 893 890
40 965 952 952 945 940 936 931 927 923 920
Note: Load capacity is measured in CCS.
Table 31
Digitone receiver (DTR) load capacity — 16 to 25 second holding time (Part 3 of 3)
Average
holding
time in
seconds
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Number of
DTRs
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 130 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Table 32
Digitone receiver (DTR) requirements — Poisson 0.1 percent blocking (Part 1 of 2)
Number of DTRs DTR load (CCS) Number of DTRs DTR load (CCS)
1 0 26 469
2 2 27 495
3 7 28 520
4 15 29 545
5 27 30 571
6 40 31 597
7 55 32 624
8 71 33 650
9 88 34 676
10 107 35 703
11 126 36 729
12 145 37 756
13 166 38 783
14 187 39 810
15 208 40 837
16 231 41 865
17 253 42 892
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 131 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
18 276 43 919
19 299 44 947
20 323 45 975
21 346 46 1003
22 370 47 1030
23 395 48 1058
24 419 49 1086
25 444 50 1115
Table 33
Conference and TDS loop requirements
Network loops
required at 2 years
TDS
loops required
Conference loops
required
1 - 12 1 1
13 - 24 2 2
25 - 36 3 3
37 - 48 4 4
49 - 60 5 5
61 - 72 6 6
73 - 84 7 7
85 - 96 8 8
97 - 108 9 9
109 - 120 10 10
Table 32
Digitone receiver (DTR) requirements — Poisson 0.1 percent blocking (Part 2 of 2)
Number of DTRs DTR load (CCS) Number of DTRs DTR load (CCS)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 132 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Table 34
Digitone receiver provisioning (Part 1 of 3)
DTR CCS DTR ports DTR CCS DTR ports
1-2 2 730-761 32
3-9 3 762-793 33
10-19 4 794-825 34
20-34 5 826-856 35
35-50 6 857-887 36
51-69 7 888-919 37
70-89 8 920-951 38
90-111 9 952-984 39
112-133 10 985-1017 40
134-157 11 1018-1050 41
158-182 12 1051-1084 42
183-207 13 1085-1118 43
208-233 14 1119-1153 44
234-259 15 1154-1188 45
260-286 16 1189-1223 46
287-313 17 1224-1258 47
314-342 18 1259-1293 48
343-371 19 1294-1329 49
372-398 20 1330-1365 50
399-427 21 1366-1400 51
428-456 22 1401-1435 52
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 133 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
457-487 23 1436-1470 53
488-515 24 1471-1505 54
516-545 25 1506-1540 55
546-576 26 1541-1575 56
577-607 27 1576-1610 57
608-638 28 1611-1645 58
639-667 29 1646-1680 59
668-698 30 1681-1715 60
699-729 31 1716-1750 61
1751-1785 62 2871-2905 94
1786-1820 63 2906-2940 95
1821-1855 64 2941-2975 96
1856-1890 65 2976-3010 97
1891-1925 66 3011-3045 98
1926-1960 67 3046-3080 99
1961-1995 68 3081-3115 100
1996-2030 69 3116-3465 101
2031-2065 70
2066-2100 71
2101-2135 72
2136-2170 73
2171-2205 74
Table 34
Digitone receiver provisioning (Part 2 of 3)
DTR CCS DTR ports DTR CCS DTR ports
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 134 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
2206-2240 75
2241-2275 76
2276-2310 77
2311-2345 78
2346-2380 79
2381-2415 80
2416-2450 81
2451-2485 82
2486-2520 83
2521-2555 84
2556-2590 85
2591-2625 86
2626-2660 87
2661-2695 88
2696-2730 89
2731-2765 90
2766-2800 91
2801-2835 92
2836-2870 93
Note: Provisioning assumes an 11 second holding time.
Table 34
Digitone receiver provisioning (Part 3 of 3)
DTR CCS DTR ports DTR CCS DTR ports
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 135 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Worksheet A: Growth forecast
Customer: ________________________________
Date: __________________
Prepare one worksheet for each customer and one worksheet for the complete
system.
Stations Cutover 2 years 5 years CCS/T
Meridian Digital
Telephones
Meridian Digital
Telephone TNs
500 telephones
500 TNs
2500 telephones
2500 TNs
2-way
1-way in
1-way out
DID
Tie
CCSA
InWATS
OutWATS
FX
Private line
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 136 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Line CCS/T____________
Total trunk CCS/T____________
Intra CCS/T____________
Dial dictation
Paging
RAN
AIOD
DTI
E&M 2W
E&M 4W
CO
Stations Cutover 2 years 5 years CCS/T
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 137 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Worksheet B: Total load
Customer:________________________________________
Date: ______________
Prepare one worksheet for each customer for cutover, 2-year, and 5-year
intervals, and one worksheet for the system for cutover, 2-year, and 5-year
intervals.
Line usage
Meridian Digital sets: TN________ x _______CCS/T=___________ CCS
500: TN____________ x _____________ CCS/T=___________ CCS
2500: TN____________ x _____________ CCS/T=___________ CCS
Total line load=___________ CCS
Trunk usage
Number of TNsCCS/T perTotal CCS load
Trunk routeaccessing routetrunk routeper trunk route
____________ ____________ x ____________ =____________CCS
____________ ____________ x ____________ =____________CCS
____________ ____________ x ____________ =____________CCS
____________ ____________ x ____________ =____________CCS
____________ ____________ x ____________ =____________CCS
____________ ____________ x ____________ =____________CCS
Total trunk load =____________CCS
Console usage
Number of consoles____________x 30 CCS
= Total console load =____________CCS
Digitone receivers
Number of DTRs (from tables)____________
= Total DTR load= ____________CCS
= Total load =____________CCS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 138 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Worksheet C: System cabinet / Main chassis requirements
Customer:________________________________________
Date: ______________
Prepare one worksheet for the complete system at cutover, 2-year, and 5-year
intervals.
IPE card calculations
Cutover 2 years 5 years
Number of digital line cards =
number of digital ports (M2250 uses 2 ports)
16
Number of analog line cards =
number of analog ports in service
16
Number of analog waiting line cards =
number of analog ports with message waiting
16
Number of universal trunk cards =
total number of CO/DID/RAN/paging trunks
8
Number of E&M trunk cards =
total number of E&M/paging/dictation trunks
4
Total cards
Note: For higher reliability, do not configure more than one M2250 console on one digital line card. Use
paging trunks on universal trunk cards or E&M trunk cards, depending on what combination minimizes the
total number of trunk cards required.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 139 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Worksheet C: System cabinet / Main chassis requirements
(continued)
To determine the number of chassis required for Option 11C, go to “Option
11C Mini Calculations” on page 140. To determine the number of cabinets
required for Option 11C, follow the guidelines below:
Option 11C Calculations without Meridian Mail
The first cabinet provides a total of 9 slots for trunk and line cards:
For systems requiring SDI/DCH cards, subtract one available card slot from
the first cabinet for each additional SDI/DCH card required.
Option 11C Calculations with Meridian Mail
Subtract one available card slot from the first cabinet:
Number of IPE cards
Number of cabinets required
(maximum 5 cabinets)
1-9 1
10-19 2
20-29 3
30-39 4
40-49 5
Number of IPE cards
Number of cabinets required
(maximum 5 cabinets)
1-8 1
9-18 2
19-28 3
29-38 4
39-48 5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 140 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Option 11C Mini Calculations
The main chassis provides a total of 3 locations for trunk and line cards, with
the chassis expander providing 4 additional locations:
For systems requiring extra TDS/DTR or SDI/DCH cards, subtract one
available card slot from the main chassis for each additional TDS/DTR or
SDI/DCH card required.
Number of chassis required:____________
Number of IPE cards
Number of chassis required
(maximum 2 chassis)
1-3 1
4-7
a
a. If you are adding a Meridian Mail Mini card, it must be located in slot 10 of the chas-
sis expander, which reduces the maximum number of IPE cards to 6.
2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 141 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Worksheet D: Unprotected memory calculations
Customer:________________________________________
Date: ______________
Prepare one worksheet for the complete system.
Total from table__________
Total words from table__________
Capacity ______ 64 ___ k words (k = 1024 words)
Items Words Total
Fixed amount of storage required
500 and 2500 TNs
Add-on modules
Network groups 2
Trunk units
Consoles
Customer groups
Network loops 30
Peripheral Signalling 2
Trunk routes
SDI cards
TDS loops
Conference loops 3
DTR loops
Call registers
Low priority input buffers
High priority input buffers
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 142 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Worksheet E: Protected memory calculations
Customer: ________________________________________
Date: ______________
Prepare one worksheet for the complete system.
Total from table __________
Add 10% __________
Total words from table __________
Capacity ______ 64 ____ k words (k = 1024 words)
Items Words Total
Fixed amount of storage required
500 and 2500 TNs
Add-on modules
Trunk units
Consoles
Customer groups
Trunk routes
Code restricted trunk routes
DTR loops (in excess on 1)
Speed call head table
Speed call lists (10 numbers)
Speed call lists (50 numbers)
TDS loops (in excess of 1)
History file
Note: Record totals on the next page.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 143 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Worksheet F: Equipment summary
Customer:________________________________________
Date: ______________
Prepare one worksheet for the complete system.
Equipment summary Quantity Based on
Line and trunk cards Cutover
DTRs 2 years
TDS loops 2 years
Call registers 2 years
High priority input buffers Cutover
Low priority input buffers Cutover
System cabinets 2 years
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 144 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Worksheet G: System power consumption
For Option 11C Mini, go to Worksheet Gg: Option 11C Mini power
consumption: Main chassis on page 151.
Table 35
Circuit Card Power Consumption (Part 1 of 2)
Circuit card Type
% active sets
(off-hook)
Power
consumption
Mail Meridian Mail steady state 35W
NT1R20 Off premise Station analog line card 50% 22W
NT6R16 Meridian Mail Mini steady state 35W
NT5D26 EXUT Card for ASia Pacific DID-enabled 28W
NT8D02 Digital line card 100% 25W
NT9D09 Message-waiting line card 50% 26W
NT8D14 Universal trunk card DID-enabled 28W
NT8D15 E&M trunk card N/A 29W
NT5K07 Universal Trunk Card DID-enabled 28W
NT5K19 Extended E&M trunk card N/A 29W
NT5K82 XCOT Card for Switzerland DID-enabled 28W
NT5K83 XFEM trunk card for Switzerland N/A 29W
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card N/A 10W
NTAK03 TDS/DTR card N/A 8W
NTAK09 1.5Mb DTI/PRI card N/A 10W
NTAK10 2.0Mb DTI card N/A 12W
NTAK79 2.0Mb PRI card N/A 12W
NTBK22 MISP card N/A 12W
NTBK50 2.0Mb PRI card N/A 12W
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 145 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
NTCK16BC XFCDT Card DID-enabled 28W
NTDK16 48 port Digital Line Card (Option 11C Mini) 100% 75w
NTDK20 SSC card (Option 11C) N/A 15w
NTDK22 10 m Fiber Daughterboard (Option 11C) N/A 3W
NTDK23 10 m Receiver card (Option 11C) N/A 3W
NTDK24 3 km Fiber Daughterboard (Option 11C) N/A 3W
NTDK25 3 km Receiver card (Option 11C) N/A 3W
NTDK26 Upgrades Daughterboard (Option 11C) N/A 2W
NTDK79 3 km Fiber Daughterboard (Option 11C) N/A 3W
NTDK80 3 km Receiver card (Option 11C) N/A 3W
NTDK85 Dual Fiber Daughterboard (Option 11C) N/A 7.5W
NTDK97 Mini System Controller (Option 11C Mini) N/A 15 w
NTRB21 1.5mb TMDI N/A 12W
Table 35
Circuit Card Power Consumption (Part 2 of 2)
Circuit card Type
% active sets
(off-hook)
Power
consumption
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 146 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Worksheet Ga: System power consumption: Main cabinet
Slot Circuit card Type
Power consumption
from Table 35
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Total
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 147 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Worksheet Gb: System power consumption: first expansion
cabinet
Slot Circuit card Type
Power consumption
from Table 35
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Total
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 148 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Worksheet Gc: System power consumption: second
expansion cabinet
Slot Circuit card Type
Power consumption
from Table 35
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Total
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 149 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Worksheet Gd: System power consumption: third expansion
cabinet
Slot Circuit card Type
Power consumption
from Table 35
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Total
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 150 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Worksheet Ge: System power consumption: fourth expansion
cabinet
Slot Circuit card Type
Power consumption
from Table 35
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Total
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 151 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Worksheet Gf: Total Option 11C system power consumption
Worksheet Gg: Option 11C Mini power consumption: Main
chassis
Pout Main (total for slots 1-10 in main cabinet)
Pout Expan (total for slots 11-20 in the first expansion cabinet)
Pout Expan (total for slots 21-30 in the second expansion cabinet)
Pout Expan (total for slots 31-40 in the third expansion cabinet)
Pout Expan (total for slots 41-50 in the fourth expansion cabinet)
Total
Slot Circuit card Type
Power consumption
from Table 35
1 NTDK97 MSC 15 w
2
3
4, 5, 6 NTDK16 48 port DLC 75w
Total
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 152 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Worksheet Gh: Option 11C Mini power consumption: Chassis
expander
Note: For an IP Expansion system use the Option 11C Worksheets.
Worksheet Gi: Total Option 11C Mini system power
consumption
Slot Circuit card Type
Power consumption
from Table 35
7
8
9
10
Total
Pout Main (total for slots 1-6 in main chassis)
Pout Expan (total for slots 7-10 in the chassis expander)
Total
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 153 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Worksheet H: Battery current and AC line calculation for
AC systems using NTAK75 and NTAK76
Pin (Main) = Pout (Main)
0.80
= _____
= _____
I line (Main) in AC amps =Pin_(Main)
V x 0.6
I Batt (Main)
80% efficiency
Option 11C
CE & PE
NTAK75/76
battery unit
To AC power
source
Main cabinet
Pout (Main) = _____
PF = 0.6,
V = 110VAC or
208VAC
VBatt = 48VDC
Note: Pline (Main) = 750VA +/- 10% maximum during battery charging
Pin (Expan) = Pout (Expan)
0.80
= _____
= _____
I line (Expan) in AC amps =Pin_(Expan)
V x 0.6
I Batt (Expan)
80% efficiency
Option 11C
CE & PE
NTAK75/76
battery unit
To AC power
source
Expansion cabinet
Pout (Expan) = _____
PF = 0.6,
V = 110VAC or
208VAC
VBatt = 48VDC
Note: Pline (Expan) = 750VA +/- 10% maximum during battery charging
I Batt (Main) in DC amps =Pin (Main) = _____
48
I Batt (Expan) in DC amps =Pin (Expan) = _____
48
power supply
NTDK78 AC/DC
power supply
NTDK78 AC/DC
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 154 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Worksheet I: Battery current calculation for customer-
provided DC reserve power
I Batt (Main) in DC amps = Pin (Main) = _____
48
Pin (Main) = Pout (Main)
0.80
= _____
I Batt (Main)
80% efficiency
customer-provided
reserve power
system
power supply
Option 11C
CE & PE
Main cabinet
Pout (Main) = _____
V Batt = 48VDC
I Batt (Expan) in DC amps =Pin (Expan) =_____
48
Pout (Expan) = _____
Pin (Expan) = Pout (Expan)
0.80
= _____
Expansion cabinet V= 48V
80% efficiency
Option 11C PE
customer-provided
reserve power
system
power supply
I Batt (Expan)
V Batt = 48VDC
NTDK72 DC
NTDK72 DC
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning Page 155 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Figure 11
Discharge Time for the NTAK76 Battery
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 156 of 544 Provisioning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Figure 12
Discharge Time for the NTAK75/QBL24A1 Batteries
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 157 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
176
Chapter 3 — Transmission parameters
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Transmission A-Law and µ-Law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Loss Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Frequency Response . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Input impedance and balance impedance . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Return Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Transhybrid Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Idle Channel Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Impulse Noise . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Variation of gain versus level . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Method 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Method 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Total distortion including quantization distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Method 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Method 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Spurious in-band signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Spurious out-of-band signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Discrimination against out-of-band signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Intermodulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Group Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 158 of 544 Transmission parameters
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Absolute group delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Group delay distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Longitudinal balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Crosstalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Introduction
The Meridian 1 Option 11C system accommodates two companding laws to
convert signals from analog to digital and from digital to analog:
• µ-Law which is used in North America and Japan.
• A-Law which is used in most other areas of the world, including Europe.
The following transmission specification applies to both standard µ-Law and
A-Law cards. There are other countries which have their own transmission
plans and thus use unique cards which have had adjustments made to
accommodate their transmission specifications. These adjustments were
generally in A/D and D/A gains.
The transmission characteristics are given in the following section. Except
where indicated otherwise, the design objectives given are met when
measured between 2 wire and 4 wire analog input and output interfaces
terminated with their nominal impedance.
IMPORTANT
The reference frequency for µ-Law is 1024 Hz and A-Law is 820 Hz.
The reference level is -10 dBmO (as an alternative a reference level of
0 dBmO may be used).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Transmission parameters Page 159 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Transmission A-Law and µ-Law
Loss Plan
Insertion loss
The insertion loss of a private branch exchange (PBX) connection is defined
as the difference between the power delivered from the (test) reference source
into the input port and the power at the output port. For insertion loss tests
both the signal source and the measurement instrument have impedances of
600 ohms. The test frequency is 820 Hz for A-Law and 1024 Hz for µ-Law.
The insertion losses between various Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE)
ports are connection - specific in order to be compatible with end-to-end
network connection loss requirements. The Meridian 1 Option 11C loss
specifications are in agreement with North American standards, which are
formulated to provide satisfactory end-to-end performance for connections
within private networks and between private and public networks.
The loss plan strategy for IPE combines electrical loss with terminal acoustic
parameters for optimum transmission performance. For this reason, some
connections have asymmetrical loss in order to conform with network loss
plans. This asymmetry is resolved at a remote point (another switch) in the
overall connection.
Tables 37, 38, and 39 provide loss values measured in decibels (dB) for
connections between:
• IPE ports (lines and trunks)
• Digital ports (PRI or DTI)
CAUTION
Tables 37, 38, and 39 are in matrix format. Be aware of the direction of
the arrows when searching for a loss value.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 160 of 544 Transmission parameters
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Table 36
Guide to loss values tables
IPE Port Digital Port
IPE Ports Table 37
Digital Ports Table 38 Table 39
Table 37
Insertion Loss from IPE Ports to IPE Ports (measured in dB) (Part 1 of 2)
IPE Ports
IPE Ports
500/2500 Line Digital
Line
2/4 Wire E&M
Trunk
4 Wire (ESN)
E&M Trunk
CO/FX/WATS
Loop Tie
Trunk
500/2500 Line
6
6
‘
Digital Line
2.5
3.5
0
0
2/4 Wire E&M
Trunk
6
3
3.5
-0.5
1
1
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Transmission parameters Page 161 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
4 Wire (ESN)
E&M Trunk
5.5
2.5
3
-1
0.5
0.5
0
0
CO/FX/WATS
Loop Tie
Trunk
2.5
0
0
-3.5
0.5
0
0
-0.5
0.5
0.5
Table 38
Insertion Loss Digital Ports To IPE Ports (measured in dB) (Part 1 of 2)
IPE Ports
Digital Ports
500/2500
Line
Digital
Line
2/4 Wire E&M
Trunk
4 Wire (ESN)
E&M Trunk
CO/FX/WATS
Loop Tie
Trunk
Tie Trunk
8.5
2.5
6
0
3.5
-2.5
3
-3
2.5
-2.5
Satellite Tie
Trunk
(See note 1)
2.5
2.5
-3
0
0.5
0.5
0
0
-0.5
-0.5
Table 37
Insertion Loss from IPE Ports to IPE Ports (measured in dB) (Part 2 of 2)
IPE Ports
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 162 of 544 Transmission parameters
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Notes to Table 38
1 A satellite tie trunk connects a satellite or tributary PBX to a main PBX.
A tributary PBX does not have its own directory number for incoming
calls.
2 The toll office designation is for a trunk to an office in the public
switched network with a higher rank than the local office (class 5).
3 The 1.5Mb PRI and DTI have digital pads which are controlled by
Meridian 1 software to provide the insertion loss given above. The 2Mb
PRI and DTI have programmable digital pads. The default value for these
pads gives the insertion loss in Table 38. The pad values can be printed
and changed in overlay 73 (LD 73).
CO/FX/WATS
Loop Tie Trunk
0.5
4.5
2
-1
2.5
2.5
2
2
0.5
-0.5
Toll Office
(See note 2)
8.5
2.5
6
0
3.5
-2.5
3
-3
5.5
0.5
Primary Rate
Interface (PRI)
(See note 3)
6.5
3.5
6
0
3.5
0.5
3
0
2.5
-2.5`
Table 38
Insertion Loss Digital Ports To IPE Ports (measured in dB) (Part 2 of 2)
IPE Ports
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Transmission parameters Page 163 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Table 39
Electrical loss Digital ports to Digital ports (measured in dB)
Digital ports
Digital Ports
Tie Trunk Satellite Tie
Trunk
(note 1)
CO/FX/WATS
Loop Tie
Trunk
Toll Office
Trunk
(note 2)
Primary Rate
Interface
(PRI) (note 3)
Tie Trunk
0
0
Satellite Tie
Trunk
(See note 1)
0
0
0
0
CO/FX/WATS
Loop Tie Trunk
0
6
0
0
3
3
Toll Office
(See note 2)
0
0
6
0
6
0
0
0
Primary Rate
Interface (PRI)
(See note 3)
0
0
6
0
3
0
0
0
0
0
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 164 of 544 Transmission parameters
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Notes to Table 39
1 A satellite tie trunk connects a satellite or tributary PBX to a main PBX.
A tributary PBX does not have its own directory number for incoming
calls.
2 The toll office designation is for a trunk to an office in the public
switched network with a higher rank than the local office (class 5).
3 The 1.5Mb PRI and DTI have digital pads which are controlled by
Meridian 1 software to provide the insertion loss given above. The 2Mb
PRI and DTI have programmable digital pads. The default value for these
pads gives the insertion loss in Table 39. The pad values can be printed
and changed in LD 73.
Insertion loss limits
Table 40 gives the analog insertion loss limits for trunk and line connections.
Table 40
Insertion loss limits for trunk and line connections
Connection Insertion Loss Variation Limits (dB)
Line — Line +1.0
Line — Analog Trunk + 0.7
Line — Digital Trunk +0.7
Analog Trunk — Analog Trunk +0.7
Analog Trunk — Digital Trunk +0.7
Digital Trunk — Digital Trunk +0.2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Transmission parameters Page 165 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Frequency Response
Frequency Response, or Attenuation Distortion, at a given frequency is the
difference between the loss at the test frequency and the loss at the reference
frequency. Table 41 gives the frequency response for 2 wire and 4 wire
interfaces.
Notes to Table 41
1 The symbol (+) denotes a loss and the symbol (-) denotes a gain.
2 Reference Sources:
µ-Law -1024 Hz -10 dBmO
A-Law - 820 Hz -10 dBmO
Table 41
Frequency Response for 2 wire and 4 wire interfaces
Frequency (Hz)
2 Wire Interface 4 Wire Interface
Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
200 0 5 0 3
300 -0.5 1.0 -0.5 0.5
3000 -0.5 1 -0.5 0.5
3200 -0.5 1.5 -0.5 1.5
3400 0 3.0 0 3.0
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 166 of 544 Transmission parameters
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Input impedance and balance impedance
Input Impedance for a port is the impedance as seen looking into the port from
the tip and ring.
The Balance Impedance is the output source impedance of the port and is
designed to match the impedance of the transmission line plus the far end
trunk.
Return Loss
The return loss measures how closely the input impedance matches the
required impedance (source impedance). Return loss at an impedance
discontinuity in a transmission path is the ratio (in dB) of the power level of
an incident signal to the power level of the resulting reflected signal.
Echo Return Loss (ERL) is a weighted average of the return loss value over
the frequency range of 500 to 2500 Hz.
Single Frequency Return Loss (SFRL) is the lowest value of return loss in the
frequency range of 200 to 3200 Hz.
Table 42
Input impedance/balance impedance
Connection System Input Impedance Balance Impedance
500/2500 Line IPE 600 600
2 Wire E&M Trunk IPE 600 600
4 Wire E&M Trunk IPE 600 600
DID/DOD/LOOP TIE
Trunk
IPE 600/900 600/3COM
(3 COM is the EIA
termination of 350 +
1000//0.21 µ F)
C.O.Trunk IPE 600/900 600/3COM
(3 COM is the EIA
termination of 350 +
1000//0.21 µ F)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Transmission parameters Page 167 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
The line or trunk undergoing testing is connected to a 4 wire E&M trunk,
which is terminated with 600 OHMS. The return loss is measured against its
characteristic input impedance (see Table 43).
Reference Source for µ-Law or A-Law is 0 dBmO.
Transhybrid Loss
The source impedance of a two wire interface must match the terminating
impedance (line plus telephone set or line plus far end trunk). If the source
impedance does not match, there will be a problem with stability and listener
echo.
The match of the output source impedance to the line or trunk impedance is
measured by connecting the interface to a 4 wire trunk. The reflected signal
from the hybrid is then measured when the 2 wire interface is terminated with
the balance impedance given in Table 42.
The values for the transhybrid (return) loss of a 2 wire interface when
terminated in its balance impedance is given in Table 44.
Reference Level is 0 dBmO.
Table 43
Return Loss
Interface Echo Return Loss (dB)
Single Frequency
Return Loss (dB)
4 Wire Trunk >28 >22
2 Wire Line >18 >12
2 Wire Trunk >22 >17
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 168 of 544 Transmission parameters
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Idle Channel Noise
Idle channel noise is noise in the absence of a signal. It is the short-term
average absolute noise power, measured with either C-message weighting for
µ−Law or Psophometric weighting for a A-Law. The 3 k Hz flat measurement
uses equal weighting for all frequencies in the 20-3000 Hz range. The values
are shown in Table 45.
Table 44
Transhybrid loss
Input Frequency (Hz) Transhybrid Return Loss (dB)
300 16
500 20
2500 20
3400 16
Table 45
Idle Channel Noise
Connection
µ-Law C Message
Noise dBrnC0
A-Law Psophometric
dBmP0
3 kHz
dBm0
Line — Line <20 >65 <29
Line — Trunk <20 >65 <29
Trunk — Trunk <20 >65 <29
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Transmission parameters Page 169 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Impulse Noise
Impulse noise is defined as noise bursts or spikes that exceed normal peaks of
idle-channel noise. Impulse noise is measured by counting the number of
spikes exceeding a pre-set threshold; it is the number of counts above 55
dBm0 during a five minute interval, under fully loaded busy hour PBX traffic
conditions.
Variation of gain versus level
The variation of gain verses level (tracking error) measures how closely
changes in input levels causes corresponding changes in output levels.
The tracking error is measured in decibels and is defined as the deviation in
gain or loss through a range of input level relative to the gain or loss at the
reference frequency and level of 0 dBmO.
The two methods of measuring the tracking error are listed below.
Method 1
When a noise signal as defined in CCITT, recommendation 0.131 is applied
at the input of any interface, the gain versus level deviation at the output
meets the limits set out in Table 47.
Alternatively, when a sine wave input in the frequency range 700 - 1100 Hz
is applied at the input of any interface, the gain vs level deviation at the output
meets the limits given in Table 48.
Table 46
Impulse Noise
Time Level Counts
5 Minutes >55 dBmO 0
Table 47
Variation of gain versus level method 1
Input Level dBm0 Gain Variation dB
-55 to -10 +/-0.5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 170 of 544 Transmission parameters
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Reference frequency:
• 700 - 1100 Hz
• 820 Hz A-Law
• 1024 Hz µ-Law
Method 2
With a sine wave in the frequency range of 700-1100 Hz applied to the input
port of any interface, the variation of the gain versus level at the output port
meets the limits given in Table 49.
Reference frequency:
• 700-1100 Hz
• 820 Hz A-Law
• 1024 Hz µ-Law
Total distortion including quantization distortion
The quantization distortion is the difference between the original analog
signal and the analog signal (signal plus noise) resulting from the decoding
process. There are two methods of measuring the quantization distortion:
Table 48
Variation of gain versus level method 1
Input Level
dBm0
Gain Variation
dB
-10 to +3 +/-0.5
Table 49
Variation of gain versus level method 2
Input Level dBm0 Gain Variation dB
-37 to -50 +/-1
0 to 37 +/-0.5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Transmission parameters Page 171 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Method 1
With a noise signal corresponding to CCITT recommendation 0.131 applied
to the input interface, the total distortion measured at the output interface lies
above the limit given in Table 50.
Method 2
With a sine wave at the reference frequency is applied to the input interface,
the total distortion measured at the output port interface lies above the limit
given in Table 51.
Reference frequency:
• 1020 Hz µ-Law
• 820 or 420 Hz A-Law
Table 50
Total distortion method 1
Input Signal
dBmO
Analog — Analog
dB
Digital — Analog
dB
-55 11.1 13.1
-40 26.1 28.1
-34 30.7 32.7
-27 to -6 32.4 34.4
-3 24.0 26.8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 172 of 544 Transmission parameters
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Spurious in-band signal
When a sine wave signal in the range of 700-1100 Hz, at a level of 0 dBmO
is applied to the input port, the output level (at any frequency other than that
of the applied signal,) is less than -40 dBmO when measured selectively in
the band 300-3400 Hz.
Spurious out-of-band signal
When a sine wave signal in the range of 300-3400 Hz, at a level of 0 dBmO
is applied to the input port, the level of spurious out-of-band image signals
measured selectively at the output port is lower than -25 dBmO.
Discrimination against out-of-band signals
With any sine wave signal above 4.6 kHz applied to the input port at -25
dBm0, the level of any image frequency produced at the output is at least 25
dB below the level of the test signal.
Intermodulation
When two sine wave signals, f1 and f2, in the range of 450 to 2050 Hz, not
harmonically related and of equal level in the range -21 to -4 dBmO are
applied to the input, they do not create any 2f2-f1 intermodulation product
greater than 35 dB below the power level of the input signal.
Table 51
Total distortion method 2
Input signal
dBm0
Analog — Analog
dB
Digital — Analog
dB
-45 22 24
-40 27 29
-30 to 0 33 35
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Transmission parameters Page 173 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Group Delay
Absolute group delay
The absolute group delay is the minimum group delay measured in the
frequency band 500-2800 Hz. The absolute group delay meets the limits
given in Table 52.
Group delay distortion
The group delay distortion is the difference between the absolute group delay
(minimum delay) and the group delay in the range 500 to 2800 Hz.
Table 52
Absolute group delay
Interface type
Absolute Group
Delay Microseconds
Analog — Analog 3000
Analog — Digital 2700
Digital — Digital 2400
Table 53
Group delay distortion
Frequency range
Group delay distortion
Microseconds
500-600 1800
600-1000 900
1000-2600 300
2600-2800 1500
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 174 of 544 Transmission parameters
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Longitudinal balance
Longitudinal balance defines the amount of impedance balance that exists
between the tip and ring conductor with respect to ground. Longitudinal
balance is measured by injecting a longitudinal signal on the tip and ring
conductors with respect to ground and measuring the amount of signal (noise)
that is introduced between the tip and ring. The equation for calculating
longitudinal balance is:
Longitudinal Balance = 20 Log Vs/Vm
Vs is the disturbing longitudinal voltage and Vm is the tip to ring metallic
noise voltage. Ideally the metallic noise voltage would be negligible and the
longitudinal balance would approach infinity.
Crosstalk
Crosstalk is speech signal (signalling) energy transferred from one voice
channel to another. The crosstalk coupling loss for every possible type of
connections over the frequency range of 200 to 3200 Hz is shown in Table 55.
Table 54
Longitudinal balance for loop start interfaces
Frequency
Hz
Minimum balance
dB
Average balance
dB
200 58 63
500 58 63
1000 58 63
3000 53 58
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Transmission parameters Page 175 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Test Source:
Frequency 200-3200 Hz 0 dBmO.
Table 55
Crosstalk
Connection type
Minimum Attenuation
dBm0
Design Objective
dBm0
Line — Line >65 >75
Line — Trunk >65 >75
Trunk — Trunk >65 >75
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 176 of 544 Transmission parameters
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 177 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
186
Chapter 4 — Cabinet distribution over
a data network
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Reference List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Monitoring IP link voice quality of service for IP Expansion cabinets . . 178
Meridian Data . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Network Requirements . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Reference List
The following are the references in this section:
• Maintenance (553-3001-511)
• Features and Services (553-3001-306)
• Administration (553-3001-311)
Overview
Option 11C IP Expansion allows connectivity of IP Expansion cabinets either
point to point or over a distributed campus data network. The campus data
network connectivity is provided through IP daughterboards in the Main and
IP Expansion cabinets.
Figure 13 on page 178 provides an example of Main and IP expansion
cabinets and Mini chassis connected over a campus data network using both
100BaseT and 100BaseF connectivity.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 178 of 544 Cabinet distribution over a data network
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
In order to satisfy PBX voice quality requirements, engineering guidelines
are imposed on the campus data network. Refer to “Basic LAN requirements
for Excellent Voice Quality” on page 181 and “LAN recommendations for
Excellent Voice Quality” on page 184.0
Note: Contact your local Data Administrator to obtain specific IP
information.
Figure 13
IP Expansion configuration of cabinets over a campus data network
Monitoring IP link voice quality of service for IP Expansion
cabinets
Behavioral characteristics of the network are dependent on the factors like
Round Trip Delay (RTD), queuing delay in the intermediate nodes, packet
loss and available bandwidth. The service level of each IP link will be
measured and maintained on the Main for IP Expansion operation.
Information for latency and packet loss will be collected from the hardware
and processed.
Campus data
Network
IP Expansion 4
Main
IP Expansion 1
IP Expansion 2
100baseT
100baseF
IP Expansion 3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cabinet distribution over a data network Page 179 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Based on system configured thresholds, the level of service will be derived
and reported to the craftsperson with the PRT QOS <cab#> command in LD
117. See Administration (553-3001-311) and Maintenance (553-3001-511).
Data Network Ratings (Excellent, Good, Fair, Poor) along with the actual
parameter values for network delay are displayed in Table 56.
The values in Table 56 assume that there is no echo cancellation mechanism
and no particular mechanism for recovering lost packets.
The command PRT PDV <cab#> in LD 117 displays both the current size of
the PDV buffer and the number of PDV underflows.
In addition, a warning message is printed when a parameter threshold (or
combination of thresholds) is reached. These thresholds are not user
configurable.
In LD 117, the command CHG PDV <port#> <delay> is used to set Packet
Delay Variation (PDV buffer size) on a per link basis. The <delay> parameter
can take values from 0.5 ms to 8 ms. This value should be initially tested at
default settings. Increase the <delay> parameter value by 0.5 ms increments
if an unacceptable level of voice quality is experienced (“pops and clicks”).
Decrease this value if echo is experienced. The goal is to operate with the
smallest buffer possible.
The PDV buffer size for each IP connection is configured at the Main and is
automatically downloaded to the IP Expansion cabinet.
Table 56
Campus data network voice quality measurements
Voice QoS Rating
Network Round Trip
Delay
(PDV Max 7.8 ms)
Network Round Trip
Delay
(PDV Min 0.5 ms)
Network Packet
Loss
Excellent <5 ms <12 ms <0.5%
Good 5 - 25 ms 12 - 32 ms 0.5 - 1%
Fair 25 - 45 ms 32 - 52 ms 1 - 1.5 ms
Poor >45 ms >52 ms >1.5%

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 180 of 544 Cabinet distribution over a data network
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Meridian Data
The Meridian 1 PBX supports the switching of data through its TDM fabric.
This allows for several applications in which the voice network can be used
to transport data traffic. One such application would allow a communication
device at a given location, such as a PC, to access a server at another location.
Speeds up to 64Kbps can be achieved, as normal voice channels are assigned
to a data call for the duration of the session. Connectivity is achieved through
data modules which stand alone or exist as modules within digital sets. At the
PBX, several card options are supported, including the XDLC. As a result, a
highly reliable physical path is achieved through the Meridian 1 TDM fabric.
Please refer to Features and Services (553-3001-306) for more information.
The reliability of this data application relies on a highly robust layer 1, in this
case, the TDM fabric. The above NTP gives the following bit error rate as a
measure of this reliability:
• In-house error rate <= 1 error x 10
-7
(1 error in 10Mbits)
• Trunk error rate <=1 error x 10
-5
(1 error in 100Kbits)
In the case of IP Expansion, a packet loss of < 1% has been quoted to achieve
acceptable voice quality. This potentially means 1 error in 100 bits can be
fully tolerated for voice, but this is absolutely not suitable for Meridian 1 data
traffic. Therefore, Meridian 1 data can be transported to the same level of
reliability on an IP Expansion cabinet if the customer’s LAN can achieve 1
error in 100Kbits. Otherwise, it must be recognized that packet loss could
impact any application being transported. The zero bandwidth parameter for
the CHG IPR command in LD 117 must be set to NO to ensure that packet
loss due to synchronization of the IP link is avoided.
Network Requirements
When a Main and an IP Expansion Cabinet are connected by an Campus Data
Network, the quality of voice depends on the network. The network
requirements defined here must be met.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cabinet distribution over a data network Page 181 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Basic LAN requirements for Excellent Voice Quality
Summary of requirements:
• 100Base-Tx/F Layer 2 switch that supports full duplex connection
(Layer 3 switching is supported). The Data Port on the Campus Data
Network/LAN must have Auto-negotiation disabled and the Speed/
Duplex set to 100 Full Duplex.
• Packet Loss < 0.5%
• Idle System Bandwidth approximately 0 Mbps, Peak Bandwidth under
high traffic conditions 14 Mbps, Theoretical Maximum peak bandwidth
24 Mbps
• Network Delay - Round Trip Delay (RTD) < 5 msec (*)
* with PDV jitter buffer set to maximum, RTD < 5 ms
* with PDV jitter buffer set to minimum, RTD < 12 ms
• Support of Port Priority Queuing recommended
• Support of VLAN configuration recommended
The network must provide full duplex capability between the Main and all IP
Expansion cabinets for excellent voice quality. A Layer 2 or Layer 3 switch
that supports full duplex connection over 100BaseT/F is required to achieve
this minimum network requirement.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 182 of 544 Cabinet distribution over a data network
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Figure 14
Basic LAN Configuration for excellent voice quality
Bandwidth
The IP Expansion system is designed for non-blocking transmission between
Main and IP Expansion cabinets. The throughput of the network must be
guaranteed.
When using either an Option 11C cabinet or an Option 11C Mini chassis as
your Main system controller, the idle system bandwidth is approximately
0 Mbps. Under high traffic conditions, a peak bandwidth of 14Mbps is
required for excellent voice quality. The theoretical maximum peak
bandwidth is 24Mbps.
Note: If there is no traffic flow, there are no bandwidth requirements.
Only active channels use bandwidth.
SD
B ay N et wo r ks
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Power
Di agnos ti c s
B aySt ack 350T 10/100AutosenseSwi tch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 13 1 4 15 16
r ks
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Power
Di agnos ti c s
B aySt ack 350T 10/100AutosenseSwi tch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 13 1 4 15
B aySt ack 350T 10/100AutosenseSwi tch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 13 1 4 15 16
1 0 0
1 0
A cti vi t y
100
10
Act iv it y
9 10 11 12 13 14 1 5 16
H ALF Q FD X
SD
B ay N et wo r ks
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Power
Di agnos ti c s
B aySt ack 350T 10/100AutosenseSwi tch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 13 1 4 15
B aySt ack 350T 10/100AutosenseSwi tch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 13 1 4 15 16
r ks
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Power
Di agnos ti c s
B aySt ack 350T 10/100AutosenseSwi tch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 13 1 4 15
B aySt ack 350T 10/100AutosenseSwi tch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 13 1 4 15 16
1 0 0
1 0
A cti vi t y
100
10
Act iv it y
9 10 11 12 13 14 1 5 16
H ALF Q FD X
BayStack 450-12T
100Base Tx Full Duplex 100Base Tx Full Duplex
Round Trip Delay
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cabinet distribution over a data network Page 183 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
PDV Jitter Buffer
Packet Delay Variation (PDV) jitter buffer is used to smooth out any
variations in the arrival rate of the UDP/IP voice packets with respect to the
rate at which the voice samples are played. The minimum and maximum
values for excellent voice quality are given in Table 56 on page 179.
The PDV jitter buffer is also used to re-sequence out of order voice packets.
Note 1: If you experience buffer underflow errors or clicking and
popping noises on a voice call, the size of the PDV buffer needs to be
increased.
Note 2: Increase the PDV buffer as little as possible (0.5 ms) in order to
keep the round trip delay as short as possible. The goal is to operate with
as small a buffer as possible to keep the round trip delay as short as
possible.
Table 57
Bandwidth Requirements
Talk Slot
Voice Traffic
(Mbps)
Signaling
Traffic (Mbps)
Total
(Mbps)
320 23.5 0.5 24.0
160 13.3 0.5 13.8
75 7.8 0.5 8.3
40 5.6 0.5 6.1
16 4.1 0.5 4.6
0 0.0 0.11 0.11
CAUTION
Excessive delay will cause a degradation in voice quality in the form
of echo.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 184 of 544 Cabinet distribution over a data network
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
LAN recommendations for Excellent Voice Quality
It is recommended that the Port Based Virtual LAN (VLAN) feature should
be utilized to isolate the Option 11C from the broadcast domain of the
customer’s LAN equipment. This will reduce the risk of link outages due to
broadcast storms.
Packet Prioritizing Scheme
The packet prioritizing scheme can be used to effectively utilize bandwidth.
However, the network delay requirement that the one way trip delay not
exceed 2.5 ms must be met. Support of priority queuing is recommended.
Port priority queuing will help maintain excellent voice quality during heavy
usage or congestion. Refer to Figure 15 on page 184 for an example of port
priority queuing.
Figure 15
Example of Port Priority Queueing Configuration
SD
B ay N et wo r ks
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Power
Di agnos ti c s
B aySt ack 350T 10/100AutosenseSwi tch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 13 1 4 15 16
r ks
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Power
Di agnos ti c s
B aySt ack 350T 10/100AutosenseSwi tch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 13 1 4 15
B aySt ack 350T 10/100AutosenseSwi tch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 13 1 4 15 16
1 0 0
1 0
A cti vi t y
100
10
Act iv it y
9 10 11 12 13 14 1 5 16
H ALF Q FD X
SD
B ay N et wo r ks
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Power
Di agnos ti c s
B aySt ack 350T 10/100AutosenseSwi tch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 13 1 4 15
B aySt ack 350T 10/100AutosenseSwi tch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 13 1 4 15 16
r ks
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Power
Di agnos ti c s
B aySt ack 350T 10/100AutosenseSwi tch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 13 1 4 15
B aySt ack 350T 10/100AutosenseSwi tch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 13 1 4 15 16
1 0 0
1 0
A cti vi t y
100
10
Act iv it y
9 10 11 12 13 14 1 5 16
H ALF Q FD X
BayStack 450-12T
Low
Priority
High
Priority
VLAN1
VLAN2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cabinet distribution over a data network Page 185 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Media conversion devices
Third-party media conversion devices can be used to extend the range of the
100BaseT and 100BaseF IP solutions. One such device, the IMC Networks
Ethernet Compatible Media Converter with a McLIM Tx/Fx-SM/Plus
module, provides acceptable transmission between cabinets located up to 40
km apart. This solution is illustrated in Figure 16. However caution must be
used when extending the length of cable used in the point-to-point
configuration. The round trip delay parameters specified in Table 57 must not
be exceeded.
Figure 16
Example of third-party media device used with 100BaseT hardware
IP Security
IP security in IP Expansion configuration is addressed in two ways:
• Filtering to protect CPU integrity and call processing stability.
— ARP Filtering - ARPs are filtered when the IP link between Main
cabinet and IP Expansion cabinet is up.
— IP Filtering - Only packets from/to M1 nodes (cabinets) IP addresses
are processed when the IP link between the Main cabinet and IP
Expansion cabinet is up.
Note: IP Expansion cabinets, during IP link up mode, cannot be
"pinged" from other data network nodes. However the Main cabinet can
ping IP Expansion cabinets and vice-versa.
• Voice Channels Security (Privacy)
— Multiplexed Voice Channels Packets - PCM samples from all active
channels are packetized every 125usec. There is no single voice
packet associated with the call as with standard VoIP protocols.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 186 of 544 Cabinet distribution over a data network
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
— Dynamic Allocation of the channel in the packet - Channel position
in the packet is dynamically allocated on a per call basis. Therefore,
Set A has different channels allocated for different calls.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 187 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
196
Chapter 5 — Spares planning
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Reference List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Definitions and assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Calculating spares requirements . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Failure rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
NFT values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
NTAK76 battery back-up unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
NTAK75 extended battery back-up unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Reference List
The following are the references in this section:
• Option 11C and 11C Mini Fault Clearing (553-3011-500)
Introduction
Spares planning is used to determine desired inventory levels of spares
(replaceable) items. Spares planning is used by repair houses and centralized
depots in order to ensure that there is an adequate stock of replaceable items
on hand.
This section will provide the information necessary to calculate spares for the
Option 11C system.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 188 of 544 Spares planning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Definitions and assumptions
Failure rate: Spares planning is based on the Failure rate of the replaceable
part. The failure rate is defined as the estimated number of failures for that
item during one million (10
6
) hours of operation.
Sparing interval: the sparing interval is the period of time that the stock of
items should last without being replenished. This period is assumed to be one
year after the installation of the system.
Stock confidence level: the stock confidence level is the allowed probability
of not going out of stock during the sparing interval. This is assumed to be
greater than 99.9 percent.
Turnaround time for repair: the turnaround time for repair is the length of
time it takes to repair a failed spares item.
The turnaround time from a repair house is estimated to be 10 working days
(240 hours). (See Figure 17).
Figure 17
Single depot or repair house service
The turnaround time from a centralized depot is estimated to be 2 working
days (48 hours). (See Figure 18.)
1 2 3 4 5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Spares planning Page 189 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Figure 18
Centralized depot service
Actual turnaround periods will vary in the field.
Population range: the population range is the quantity of each type of
Meridian 1 switch in the area served by the depot.
Spare stock size: the spare stock size for a given item depends on the sparing
interval, stock confidence level, failure rate, turnaround time for repair, and
population range.
Calculating spares requirements
The quantity of a replaceable item that is required to stock a depot for one
year can be calculated using a formula:
N x F x T
The spares planning formula has the following components:
N — The number of a spares item in use.
1 2 3 4 5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 190 of 544 Spares planning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
F — The failure rate of a particular spares item.
T — The turnaround time for repairing a failed spares item in hours.
The formula will produce an NFT value. The number of spares required for a
one year period may be found by looking up the NFT value in the table
provided in this section.
The following procedure is an example of spares planning for the
NT8D14AA Universal Trunk Card.
Determining spares quantities for a one year sparing interval
1 Determine the number (N) of the particular item that is being serviced by
the depot.
For example, a single depot services 10,000 Universal Trunk Cards.
2 Determine the failure rate (F) for the specified item.
From the Failure rates listed in Table 58 on page 191, the failure rate for
the Universal Trunk Card is 3.4.
3 Determine the turnaround time (T) in hours.
Assume a centralized depot with a turnaround time of 48 hours.
4 Calculate the NFT value by multiplying N x F x T.
NFT = (10,000 units x 3.4 failures x 48 hrs) / 1,000,000 hrs = 1.632
From the NFT values in Table 59 on page 193, the number of spares
required for NFT value 1.632 = 8.
That is, eight NT8D14AA Universal Trunk Cards are needed to last an
interval of one year when servicing 10, 000 Universal Trunk Cards.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Spares planning Page 191 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Failure rates
The failure rates in Table 58 are for Option 11C system components.
Note: Rates for circuit cards are based on 40°C ambient temperature.
Table 58
Failure rates for Option 11C system components (Part 1 of 2)
NT code Description
Failure rate per 10
6
hrs.
NTAK02 SDI/DCH circuit card 2.9
NTAK04 AC/DC power supply 3.6
NTAK10 2.0Mb DTI 2.4
NTAK20 clock controller .54
NTBK22 MISP circuit card 7.66
NTBK50 2.0Mb PRI 3.4
NTBK51 DDCH 1.22
NTDK16 48 port Digital Line Card 1.8
NTDK22 10 m Fiber Daughterboard 2.19
NTDK23 10 m Receiver card 2.15
NTDK24 3 km Fiber Daughterboard 2.19
NTDK25 3 km Receiver card 2.15
NTDK26 Upgrade Daughterboard 0.46
NTDK72 DC power supply 3.6
NTDK78 AC/DC power supply 3.6
NTDK79 3 km Fiber Daughterboard 2.19
NTDK80 3 km Receiver card 2.15
NTDK81 Software Daughterboard 0.83
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 192 of 544 Spares planning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
NTDK85 Dual Fiber Expansion Daughterboard 2.28
NTDK91 Option 11C Mini Main Chassis 1.7
NTDK92 Option 11C Mini Chassis Expander 1.7
NTDK97 Mini System Controller (MSC) 3.39
NTZK06 M2006 telephone 3.08
NTZK08 M2008 telephone 3.10
NTZK16 M2616 telephone 3.88
NTZK22 M2216ACD-1 telephone 4.68
NTZK23 M2216ACD-2 telephone 5.37
NT1F05 M2009 telephone 12.22
NT6G00 M2250 TCM Console N/A
NT8D02 Digital Line Card 1.8
NT8D09 Message Waiting Line Card 5.8
NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card 3.4
NT8D15 E & M/DICT/PAG Trunk Card 3.7
Table 58
Failure rates for Option 11C system components (Part 2 of 2)
NT code Description
Failure rate per 10
6
hrs.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Spares planning Page 193 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
NFT values
Table 59 translates NFT values to the number of spares required in stock:
N—Number in use
F—Failure rate
T—Turnaround time (in hours)
Table 59
Number of spares required (Part 1 of 2)
NFT values
Number
of spares
0 0.0010 1
0.0010 0.0452 2
0.0452 0.1890 3
0.189 0.425 4
0.425 0.734 5
0.734 1.090 6
1.09 1.50 7
1.50 1.95 8
1.95 2.43 9
2.43 2.94 10
2.94 3.46 11
3.46 4.01 12
4.01 4.58 13
4.58 5.16 14
5.16 5.76 15
5.76 6.37 16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 194 of 544 Spares planning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
NTAK76 battery back-up unit
The batteries supplied with the NTAK76 have an average useful life of four
years, meaning the batteries are depleted to 80% of capacity, and backup time
is diminished. After this period of time the batteries should be replaced. For
more information refer to theOption 11C and 11C Mini Fault Clearing (553-
3011-500)The mean time between failures (MTBF) of the NTAK76 without
batteries is 370 years at 25° C.
6.37 6.99 17
6.99 7.62 18
7.62 8.26 19
8.26 8.91 20
8.91 9.57 21
9.57 10.20 22
10.2 10.90 23
10.9 11.50 24
11.5 12.20 25
12.2 12.90 26
12.9 13.60 27
13.6 14.30 28
14.3 15.00 29
15.0 15.80 30
Table 59
Number of spares required (Part 2 of 2)
NFT values
Number
of spares
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Spares planning Page 195 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
NTAK75 extended battery back-up unit
The batteries supplied with the NTAK75 have an average useful life of four
years, meaning the batteries are depleted to 80% of capacity, and backup time
is diminished. After this period of time the batteries should be replaced. For
more information refer to Option 11C and 11C Mini Fault Clearing (553-
3011-500). The mean time between failures (MTBF) of the NTAK75 without
batteries is 100 years at 25° C.
Table 60
Dimensions of NTAK75 and NTAK76 batteries
Card Length Width Depth
NTAK75 19” (480 mm) 11.5” (290 mm) 11” (280 mm)
NTAK76 12.25” (312 mm) 9.75” (250 mm) 6.25” (160 mm)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 196 of 544 Spares planning
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 197 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
206
Chapter 6 — Power supplies
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Features of the Option 11C power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Dimensions and weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
AC/DC power supply features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
DC power supply features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Ringing Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Power supply LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Under-voltage . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Over-voltage . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Temperature sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Reserve power LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
PFTU operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Reserve power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Discharge requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Backup options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Battery charging in AC-powered systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Reserve time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Features of the Option 11C Mini power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Dimensions and weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 198 of 544 Power supplies
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
AC power supply features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Over-voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Under-voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Introduction
This chapter describes the Option 11C AC/DC power supplies (NTAK04,
NTAK05, NTDK72, and NTDK78) reserve power requirements, and the
operation of the Power Fail Transfer Unit (PFTU). The NTDK15 power
supply for the Option 11C Mini is described on page 204.
Features of the Option 11C power supply
Dimensions and weight
The AC/DC and DC power supplies measure approximately 12.5 inches
(305 mm) high, 5 inches (127 mm) wide and 10 inches (245 mm) deep.
It weighs approximately 12 lb (5.5 kg), while the DC power supply weighs
approximately 8 lb (3.5 kg).
AC/DC power supply features
The NTAK04 and NTDK78 AC/DC power supply has the following features:
• A current limiting circuit which limits the surge of current on the input
line when the system is first switched on.
• Accommodates a reserve power system. The system continues to operate
on DC reserve power in case of AC power failure.
Note: The NTAK04 or NTDK78 AC/DC power supply cannot power up
on battery alone. If the NTAK04 or NTDK78 is powered down while
operating on DC reserve power, then AC power is required to power up
the system.
• Battery charging for the reserve power system. Charging current in a
worst-case scenario (when Meridian Mail is installed) is 1.0 amp.
• Power (± 15V) for one attendant console.
• Generation of a system line transfer signal and power (-52V) for the
Power Fail Transfer Unit (250 MA maximum).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Power supplies Page 199 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
• Differential mode and common mode EMI filtering of input.
• Input power (-52VDC) for the Meridian Mail power supply (NTAK13).
DC power supply features
The DC power supply has the following features:
• Power (± 15V) for one attendant console.
• Generation of a system line transfer signal and power (-52V) for the
Power Fail Transfer Unit (250 MA maximum).
Voltage
The AC/DC power supply and the DC power supply provide +5.1, +8.5, +15,
-15V, -150V, -52V power supplies and filtered -48V.
There is a 1.0 second start-up delay on the +5V rail.
Ringing Generator
The AC/DC power supply and the DC power supply provide the ringing
generator for telephones:
• Ringing voltage: 70, 75, 80, 86V.
• Ringing frequency: 20, 25, 50 Hz, switch selectable.
• Ring sync: A pulse 500 us wide, 6 or 11 ms (±3 ms) before the positive
going zero crossing of the ringing waveform (11 ms for 20/25 Hz).
• Power: The output capability is 8VA which is capable of ringing 8CA4
ringers.
Power supply LED
The LED on the power supply faceplate labelled “DC” will be turned off
whenever there is a problem with the power supply.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 200 of 544 Power supplies
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Under-voltage
Under-voltage to the AC/DC or DC power supply will result in partial failure
of the Option 11C system. The faceplate LED labelled “DC” will be turned
off.
Table 61 outlines the nominal and under-voltage limits of the power supply.
WARNING
Under-voltage, in the case of +5.1V, will result in the complete
shutdown of the system.
Table 61
Nominal and under-voltage limits of NTAK04, NTAK05, NTDK72, and NTDK78 power
supplies
Nominal Under-voltage limit Power supply status
+5.1V +3.8V Complete Shutdown
8.5V +6.4V Partial failure
-150V -100.0V Partial failure
+15V +11.2V Partial failure
-15V -11.2V Partial failure
-48V -36.0V Partial failure
Ring (Pk V) 70V Partial failure
-52V -45V Partial failure
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Power supplies Page 201 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Over-voltage
An OVP (Over-Voltage Protection) circuit will shut down the power supply
if the output voltage exceeds the limits given in Table 62.
All outputs in a shutdown state are reset by the SSC card.
The system power will not automatically reset when there is overvoltage on
the -52V DC output. Manual intervention is required. The manual int button
is located on the faceplate of the SSC card.
Temperature sensor
The power supplies are sensitive to the temperature of the cabinet and the
system power. A thermostat is located at the top of the power supply unit. The
AC or DC input breaker will be tripped for temperatures higher than 80°C
(176°F).
Reserve power LED
The NTAK04 and NTDK78 AC/DC power supplies oversee the status of the
reserve power system. When the breaker on the NTAK28, NTAK75, or
NTAK76 breaker assembly trips, the “Batt” LED on the NTAK04 or
NTDK78 faceplate is turned off.
Table 62
Nominal and over-voltage limits of NTAK04, NTAK05, NTDK72 and NTDK78 power supplies
Nominal voltage Overvoltage limit Power supply status
+5.1V +6.4V Complete Shutdown
+8.5V +10.6V Complete Shutdown
-150V -187.5V Complete Shutdown
+15V +18.7V Complete Shutdown
-15V -18.7V Complete Shutdown
-48V N/A N/A
Ring (Pk V) 150V Complete Shutdown
-52V -58V Complete Shutdown
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 202 of 544 Power supplies
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
PFTU operation
Power is switched over to the Power Fail Transfer Unit (PFTU) during any of
the following conditions:
• The CPU sends a signal to the PFTU
• A power failure occurs
• A CPU failure occurs
• The PFTU is manually activated
• The fiber link to an expansion cabinet fails (PFTU for that cabinet only)
The Option 11C power supply connects to the PFTU through the AUX
connector at the bottom of the main cabinet, and in each expansion cabinet.
Table 63 provides the pinouts at the cross connect terminal for the Auxiliary
cable.
Table 63
Auxiliary cable pinouts
Cable Signal
BL-W 1 Dot BRTN
BL-W 2 Dot BRTN
O-W 1 Dot -48 V AUX
O-W 2 Dot PFTS
G-W 1 Dot -15V AUX
G-W 2 Dot +15V AUX
BR-W 1 Dot -
BR-W 2 Dot -
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Power supplies Page 203 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Reserve power
Discharge requirements
Reserve batteries must be able to provide 500 watts of power to each cabinet.
This is a worst-case figure based on the maximum power consumption per
cabinet.
Backup options
The options available when backing up the AC-powered Option 11C system
are as follows:
• Use customer-supplied batteries along with the NTAK28 breaker
assembly.
• Connect an Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS) to the Option 11C
system.
• Use Nortel Networks supplied NTAK75 or NTAK76 battery units.
Customer supplied reserve batteries with NTAK28
Customer supplied batteries may be used as long they meet the requirements
set out in Table 64. One NTAK28 breaker assembly is required per cabinet.
NTAK75 or NTAK76 battery units
Two battery units are available. The NTAK75 supplies a minimum of two
hours backup at full load, while the NTAK76 supplies a minimum of fifteen
minutes backup at full load.
CAUTION
Always follow the manufacturer’s instructions when installing
batteries.
Table 64
Reserve battery requirements
Sealed cells Cell float voltage String float voltage
23 2.30 — 2.36 52.95 — 54.25
24 2.20 — 2.26 52.95 — 54.25
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 204 of 544 Power supplies
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS)
A 750VA Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS) may be connected to AC-
powered systems in order to provide a continuous supply of AC-power.
If two cabinets are equipped, two 750VA UPSs or one 1.5KVA UPS can be
used.
Battery charging in AC-powered systems
During normal operation, the AC/DC power supply (NTAK04 or NTDK78)
provides a constant float voltage to the reserve batteries. This charger voltage
is not adjustable and will not provide equalization voltages. See Table 65.
Reserve time
Table 66 outlines the Ampere hours required (AHR) per cabinet during a
power failure. The reserve times are based on nominal load for a typical
installation.
Features of the Option 11C Mini power supply
This section describes the Option 11C NTDK15 Mini AC power supply.
Table 65
NTAK04 or NTDK78 AC/DC power interface to reserve power systems
Minimum Nominal Maximum
Float Voltage 52.95 Volts 53.6 Volts 54.50 Volts
Charge Current
a
a. The charge current available to the reserve batteries depends on the system configuration and the line size.
1.0 Amps — 7.0 Amps
Table 66
Reserve time
Duration of Power Failure AHRs required per Option 11C cabinet
30 – 40 minutes 6 AHR
1.5 – 2 hours 12 AHR
3 – 4 hours 25 AHR
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Power supplies Page 205 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Dimensions and weight
The AC power supply is factory installed in the chassis and is not accessible.
The power supply measures approximately 1.75 in. (44 mm) high, 8 in. (203
mm) wide and 10 in. (254 mm) deep.
It weighs approximately 3 lb (1.4 kg).
AC power supply features
The Option 11C Mini AC power supply has the following features:
• A current limiting circuit which limits the surge of current on the input
line when the system is first switched on.
• All outputs fully regulated.
• Universal 100-240 VAC input.
• 363 Watt total output power.
• Meets CISPR B emission per EN 55022.
• Power status indicator LED is located on the top front left corner of the
chassis.
The Green LED indicates all voltages are within specification. The LED
is off when one or more voltages are not within specification.
• Ringing voltage: 70, 75, 80, or 86 Vrms depending on DIP switch
settings.
• Ringing frequency: 20, 25, or 50 Hz depending on DIP switch settings.
Note: The DIP switch discussed here is located on the front top plate of
the chassis, and can only be accessed with the chassis faceplate removed.
• Cooling is provided by a fan mounted inside the chassis.
• Power: The output capability is 5VA which is capable of ringing 5C4A
ringers.
• Provides ring synchronization (zero current crossing) signal.
• Power on/off switch.
• Power status output to CPU.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 206 of 544 Power supplies
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Voltage
The Option 11C Mini AC power supply provides +5.1, +8, +15, -15, and -
48V. -120V/-150V is selected or disabled by DIP switch settings.
There is a 1.0 second start-up delay on the +5V rail.
Over-voltage
An OVP (Over-Voltage Protection) circuit will shut down all outputs if the
+5 V output voltage exceeds the over-voltage threshold.
Under-voltage
An under-voltage protection circuit will shut down all outputs if +5V output
is below the under-voltage threshold.
There is a 1.0 minute recovery delay from an under-voltage condition.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 207 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
226
Chapter 7 — System Controller cards
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Reference List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
NTDK20 Small System Controller card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Expansion Daughterboards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
NTDK97 Mini System Controller card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Reference List
The following are the references in this section:
• Option 11C Mini Planning and Installation (553-3021-209)
• Option 11C Planning and Installation (553-3021-210)
Introduction
This chapter describes the System Core cards used with Option 11C, and
Option 11C Mini.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 208 of 544 System Controller cards
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
These cards are:
• the NTDK20 Small System Controller card used with Option 11C and
Option 11C Mini
• the NTDK97 Mini System Controller card (MSC) card used exclusively
with Option 11C Mini when one main chassis and one chassis expander
(only) are connected.
NTDK20 Small System Controller card
The NTDK20 Small System Controller (SSC) card is used with the
Option 11C and Option 11C Mini in an IP Expansion system. It controls call
processing, stores system and customer data, and provides various expansion
interfaces (see Figure 22 on page 215). The NTDK20 SSC card is comprised
of the following components and features:
• Flash daughterboard memory, DRAM and Backup memory
• Two expansion daughterboard interfaces
• One PCMCIA socket
• Three Serial Data Interface (SDI) ports
• 32 channels of Conferencing (64 if two single port Expansion
Daughterboards are present, or 96 if two dual port Expansion
Daughterboards are present)
• One Ethernet (10 Mbps interface) port
• 30 channels of tone and digit switch (TDS) and a combination of eight
Digitone receivers (DTR) or dial tone detectors (XTD)
• Networking and Peripheral Signalling
• Additional tone service ports (four units of MFC/MFE/MFK5/MFK6/
MFR or eight DTR/XTD units)
Memory
The majority of system and customer configured data is both controlled and
stored on the NTDK20 SSC card’s Flash ROM. An active and backup copy
of customer data is also kept on the Flash ROM.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
System Controller cards Page 209 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Additional memory, referred to as DRAM on the NTDK20 SSC card, stores
and processes temporary automated routines and user-programmed
commands. The NTDK20 SSC card also retains a copy of customer files in
the event of data loss, in an area called the Backup flash drive.
The NTDK20 SSC card’s Flash daughterboard (the NTTK13), performs the
significant portion of system software storage and data processing for the
Option 11C.
NTTK13
The NTTK13 is a 48 Mbyte daughterboard comprised of Flash ROM and
Primary Flash drive.
• The Flash ROM holds 32 Mbytes of ROM memory, comprising
operating system data and overlay programs. Flash ROM is expandable
using an expansion flash daughterboard.
• The Primary Flash drive contains 16 Mbytes of storage space. Most of
the data storage is allocated to the Primary Flash drive - the main storage
area of customer configured data.
The boot code on existing SSC (Option 11C) cards must be NTDK34FA
Release 07 or later to support the NTDK81 or NTTK13 Flash
Daughterboards. It is recommended that the boot code be upgraded to the
latest issue every time the software is upgraded. The boot code can be found
on the programmed PCMCIA card.
Note: New Option 11C systems will have the latest version of software
pre-programmed on the software daughterboard.
Other system data such as the Secure Storage Area (SSA) also resides in the
Flash drive. The SSA holds data that must survive power-downs.
Boot ROM is a 2 Mbyte storage device located on the NTDK20 SSC card’s
motherboard. It is comprised of boot code, system data, patch data and the
backup copy of the Primary Flash drive’s customer database.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 210 of 544 System Controller cards
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
The NTDK20 SSC card is equipped with 8 Mbytes of temporary memory
space called DRAM. DRAM functions much like RAM on a computer
system, whereby system and user files are stored while the system is up and
running. DRAM on the Option 11C stores operating system files, overlay
data, patch codes, and the active copy of the customer database.
Expansion Daughterboards.
Expansion Daughterboards mounted on the NTDK20 SSC card (Figure 22 on
page 215) allow the connection of the main cabinet to expansion cabinets in
multi cabinet Option 11C systems. Each port on each daughterboard also
provides an additional 16-channel conference loop and up to 3 SDI ports on
the expansion cabinet. Table 67 provides the ports, cables and connection
data on the expansion daughterboards. A description of and purpose for each
daughterboard is given below:
• The NTDK22 Expansion Daughterboard is used when the expansion
cabinet is within 10 m (33 ft.) of the main Option 11C cabinet. It connects
to one A0618443 Fiber Optic plastic cable.
One of these boards is required for each expansion cabinet located within
10 m (33 ft.) of the main cabinet that is to be connected using the
A0618443 Fiber Optic plastic cable.
• The NTDK84 Expansion Daughterboard has the same features as the
NTDK22 except that it can interface with two expansion cabinets.
• The NTDK24 Expansion Daughterboard is used when the expansion
cabinet is up to 3 km (1.8 mi.) of the main cabinet. It connects to one
glass multi-mode fiber optic cable which is dedicated to the Option 11C
system.
One NTDK24 daughterboard is required for each expansion cabinet
located up to 3 km (1.8 mi.) of the main cabinet.
• The NTDK85 Expansion Daughterboard has the same features as the
NTDK24 except that it can interface with two expansion cabinets.
• The NTDK79 Expansion Daughterboard provides the same functions as
the NTDK24 except that it connects to Single Mode glass fiber optic
cable.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
System Controller cards Page 211 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
• The NTDK99 (single-port) and NTDK83 (dual-port) 100BaseT IP
Daughterboards provide connectivity to IP expansion cabinets located
within 100m.
• The NTTK01 (single-port) and NTTK02 (dual-port) 100BaseF IP
Daughterboards provide connectivity to IP expansion cabinets located
within 2 km.
Note: Third party media conversion devices can be used to extend the
range of IP Expansion cabinets from the Main Option 11C cabinet. Refer
to later in this chapter for more information.
A sample of these daughterboards is shown in Figure 19.
Table 67
Expansion Daughterboards
Daughterboard Number of ports Cable type
Max. distance
between Main and
expansion cabinets
NTDK22 one A0618443 Fiber
Optic plastic cable
10 m (33 ft.)
NTDK84 two
NTDK24 one glass fiber optic
cable
3 km (1.8 mi)
NTDK85 two
NTDK79 one Single Mode glass
fiber optic cable
NTDK99 one 100baseT cable (see
“EMC grounding clip”
on page 213)
100 m (328 ft.), or
over 20 km (12 mi)
with a third party
converter
NTDK83 two
NTTK01 one 100baseF fiber optic
cable
2 km (1.2 mi), or over
20 km (12 mi) with a
third party converter
NTTK02 two
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 212 of 544 System Controller cards
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Figure 19
Expansion Daughterboards
NTDK84
NTDK22
NTDK24 NTDK85
NTDK83
NTDK02
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
System Controller cards Page 213 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
EMC grounding clip
Option 11C and Option 11C Mini Main cabinets connected with 100BaseT
IP connectivity, must route the cables though the EMC grounding clip. This
ensures electrical contact between the ground rail and 100BaseT cable for
EMC containment
The NTDK41AA EMC grounding clip is used on the Option 11C system on
each IP Expansion cabinet.
Figure 20
EMC grounding clip on Option 11C Main cabinet
EMC Grounding
Clip
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 214 of 544 System Controller cards
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
The NTTK43AA EMC grounding clip is used on the Option 11C Mini Main
chassis and IP Expansion chassis.
Figure 21
EMC Grounding Clip on Option 11C Mini Cabinet
.
For further information or installation instructions, refer to the Option 11C
Mini Planning and Installation (553-3021-209) and Option 11C Planning
and Installation (553-3021-210).
CAUTION
Use of the EMC grounding clip is required for EMC compliance.
100BaseT cables
secured with a cable tie
100BaseT Cable
EMC Grounding Clip
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
System Controller cards Page 215 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Figure 22
NTDK20 SSC card and Expansion Daughterboard
Software Daughterboard
1st Expansion Cabinet
Expansion Daughterboard
Consists of:
Flash ROM Drive
Primary Flash Drive
Boot ROM Drive
Contains Backup
Flash Drive
PCMCIA Drive
Security Device
Connector for 2nd
Expansion Daughterboard
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 216 of 544 System Controller cards
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Fiber Receiver cards.
Fiber Receiver cards in fiber expansion cabinets, allow for fiber connectivity
between the Main Option 11C and 11C Mini and up to four fiber expansion
cabinets/chassis.
There are three versions of the Fiber Receiver card, each of which has a
corresponding fiber daughterboard:
1 The NTDK23 Fiber Receiver card is used when the expansion cabinet is
within 10 m (33 ft.) of the main cabinet. It connects to one A0618443
Fiber Optic plastic cable.
2 The NTDK25 Fiber Receiver card is used when the expansion cabinet is
between 10 m (33 ft.) and 3 km (1.8 mi.) of the main cabinet. It connects
to one glass multi-mode fiber optic cable which is dedicated to the
Option 11C system.
3 The NTDK80 Fiber Receiver card provides the same functions as the
NTDK25 except that it connects to Single Mode fiber optic cable and is
used for connections over 3 km.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
System Controller cards Page 217 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Figure 23
Fiber Receiver card in fiber expansion cabinet (NTDK23 shown)
PCMCIA interface
The NTDK20 SSC card has a PCMCIA interface through a socket located on
its faceplate. The PCMCIA socket can accommodate a Software Delivery
card used for software upgrading and as backup media.
Security device for the IP Expansion
The SSC card on the Option 11C Main cabinet must contain a NTDK57AA
Security device which is keycoded to match the NTDK57DA Security device
on each IP expansion cabinet.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 218 of 544 System Controller cards
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
This maintains the requirement of a single keycode for each Option 11C
system with survivable IP expansion cabinets. Refer to Table 22, “NTDK20
SSC card and Expansion Daughterboard,” on page 215 for the location of the
device.
The main objectives of this security scheme are
1 to allow the system to operate as a single system when all links are up.
2 to allow the Survivable IP Expansion cabinet to continue operating with
its existing configuration in the event of a failure of the Main, or of the
link to the Main.
3 to prevent users from configuring or using more TNs or features than
have been authorized.
The IP expansion cabinet security device will provide the following
capabilities at the expansion cabinet:
• System software can be installed but no calls will be processed or
features activated until communication with a main has been established
and a match between the security id of the main and the IP Expansion
cabinet has been confirmed.
• System software can be upgraded.
• Local data dump is not permitted, as well as all Overlay 43 and
Overlay 143 commands.
SDI ports
The NTDK20 SSC card contains three SDI ports used to connect on-site
terminals or remote terminals through a modem. The default settings on the
ports are as follows:
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
System Controller cards Page 219 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Table 68
Default SDI port settings on the NTDK20 SSC card
Refer to “SDI ports” on page 227 of this guide for more information on the
SDI ports.
Conferencing
Thirty-two conference channels are provided by the NTDK20 SSC card’s
conference devices. Conference capability can be increased by mounting
expansion daughterboards on the NTDK20 SSC card. Each daughterboard
increases the total number of conference channels by 16: the maximum
number of conference ports is 64.
Each conference device provides 16 ports of conferencing capabilities (one
conference participant for each port). A conference call can have three to six
participants. To illustrate, you can have a maximum of five 3-party
conferences for each device, or two 6-party conferences plus one 3-party
conference. It is not possible to conference between conference devices.
IP expansion 10BaseT port
The Option 11C system provides one 10 Mbps Ethernet connection to a Local
Area Network (LAN). The 10BaseT Ethernet port available on the SSC of an
IP Expansion cabinet is functional. However, the Ethernet port on the IP
Expansion cabinet does not have a default IP configuration. This means that
the IP port configuration must be performed before it can be used.
It is not recommended to use the remote 10BaseT port in normal mode as
maintenance or alarm management are not available. In survival mode it
assumes the system level configuration of the main cabinet port.
TTY Port Baud rate
Data
bits
Stop
bits
Parity Use
0 Set by a DIP switch 8 1 None MTC/SCH/BUG
1 1200 8 1 None MTC/SCH/BUG
2 1200 8 1 None MTC/SCH/BUG
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 220 of 544 System Controller cards
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
External connections to the ethernet port is provided by a 50-pin connector
located in the main cabinet. An NTDK27 Ethernet Adaptor cable adapts this
50-pin connector to the standard 15-pin AUI interface for a MAU.
Network Switching and signalling
Option 11C has thirty DS-30X loops. The main cabinet accommodates the
first ten loops, the first expansion cabinet accommodates the second ten
loops, the second expansion cabinet provides the third ten, the third expansion
cabinet provides the fourth ten, and the fourth expansion cabinet provides the
fifth ten.
Each IPE circuit card has a loop entirely dedicated to it. Every group of four
IPE card slots is programmed as an individual superloop. The superloop
configuration is as follows:
Table 69
Option 11C superloops
Main
Cabinet
First
Expansion
Cabinet
Second
Expansion
Cabinet
Third
Expansion
Cabinet
Fourth
Expansion
Cabinet
Card
Slot
CE
Loop
Super
Loop
Card
Slot
CE
Loop
Super
Loop
Card
Slot
CE
Loop
Super
Loop
Card
Slot
CE
Loop
Super
Loop
Card
Slot
CE
Loop
Super
Loop
1 20 0 11 — 8 21 — 32 31 — 40 41 — 64
2 21 0 12 8 22 32 32 40 42 64
3 22 0 13 12 23 32 33 44 43 64
4 23 0 14 12 24 32 34 44 44 64
5 24 4 15 12 25 36 35 44 45 68
6 25 4 16 12 26 36 36 44 46 68
7 26 4 17 16 27 36 37 48 47 68
8 27 4 18 16 28 36 38 48 48 68
9 28 8 19 16 29 40 39 48 49 72
10 8 20 16 30 40 40 48 50 72
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
System Controller cards Page 221 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
There are a total of 640 timeslots (channels) for each Option 11C system.
Each superloop provides 120 timeslots, while an IPE slot provides 30
timeslots.
Tone services
The NTDK20 SSC card incorporates the functions of the existing NTAK03
TDS/DTR, NT5K20 XTD and NT5K48 XTD cards.
NTDK97 Mini System Controller card
The NTDK97 Mini System Controller (MSC) card is used exclusively with
the Option 11C Mini Main cabinet when one (only) expander chassis is
connected to the Mini Main. It controls call processing and stores system and
customer data. The NTDK97 MSC card is comprised of the following
components and features:
• Flash memory, DRAM, Boot ROM, and Backup memory
• One PCMCIA socket
• Three Serial Data Interface (SDI) ports
• 16 channels of Conferencing
• One Ethernet (10 Mbps interface) port
• 30 channels of tone and digit switch (TDS) and a combination of eight
Digitone receivers (DTR) or dial tone detectors (XTD)
• Networking and Peripheral Signalling
• Additional tone service ports (four units of MFC/MFE/MFK5/MFK6/
MFR or eight DTR/XTD units)
Memory
Flash Memory
The majority of system and customer configured data is both controlled and
stored on the NTDK97 MSC card’s Flash ROM. (This memory is located on
the motherboard. It is not on a separate daughterboard as is the case for the
NTDK20.)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 222 of 544 System Controller cards
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
The NTDK97AB contains 48 MBytes of flash memory storage:
• 32 MBytes are used for operating system programs and overlay
programs.
• 16 Mbytes are used for the Primary Flash Drive, also referred to as the c:
drive. The Primary Flash Drive stores the primary copy of the customer
data, patches, and other configuration data.
Boot ROM and Backup Memory
Boot ROM and backup memory is a 2 Mbyte storage device located on the
NTDK97 MSC card. The boot code is stored in this memory. This memory
also contains the backup flash drive, also referred to as the z: drive. The
backup flash drive stores a backup copy of key system data, the customer
database, and patches. The minimum release of bootcode for the MSC is
NTDK34FA Release 03. You should upgrade the boot code to the latest issue
each time the software is upgraded. The boot code can be found on the
programmed PCMCIA card.
DRAM
The NTDK97 MSC card is equipped with 16 Mbytes of temporary memory
space called DRAM. (This memory is located on the motherboard. It is not
on a separate SIMM.) DRAM functions much like RAM on a computer
system, whereby system and user files are stored while the system is up and
running. DRAM on the Option 11C Mini stores operating system files,
overlay data, patch codes, and the active copy of the customer database.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
System Controller cards Page 223 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Figure 24
NTDK97 MSC card
PCMCIA interface
The NTDK97 MSC card has a PCMCIA interface socket located on its
faceplate. The PCMCIA socket can accommodate a Software Delivery card
used for software upgrading and as backup media.
SDI ports
The NTDK97 MSC card contains three SDI ports used to connect on-site
terminals or remote terminals through a modem. The default settings on the
ports are as follows:
Security Device
PCMCIA Drive
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 224 of 544 System Controller cards
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Table 70
Default SDI port settings on the NTDK97 MSC card
Refer to “SDI ports” on page 227 of this guide for more information on the
SDI ports.
Conferencing
Sixteen conference channels are provided by the NTDK97 MSC card’s
conference device.
The conference device provides 16 ports of conferencing capabilities (one
conference participant per port). A conference call can have three to six
participants. To illustrate, you can have a maximum of five 3-party
conferences per device, or two 6-party conferences plus one 3-party
conference.
Ethernet Interface
The NTDK97 MSC card is equipped with a 10 Mbps Ethernet port. A 15 pin
connector located in the back of the main chassis provides an external
connection to the ethernet port. This is for a standard 15-pin AUI interface for
a MAU.
Network Switching and signalling
Option 11C Mini has 10 DS-30x loops. The main chassis accommodates the
first 6 (loops 4, 5, and 6 occupy slot 4). The chassis expander accommodates
the last 4.
TTY Port Baud rate
Data
bits
Stop
bits
Parity Use
0 Set by a DIP switch 8 1 None MTC/SCH/BUG
1 1200 8 1 None MTC/SCH/BUG
2 1200 8 1 None MTC/SCH/BUG
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
System Controller cards Page 225 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Each IPE circuit card has a loop entirely dedicated to it. Every group of four
Option 11C card slots is programmed as an individual superloop. The
superloop configuration is as follows:
Each superloop provides 120 timeslots, while an IPE slot provides 30
timeslots.
Tone services
The NTDK97 MSC card incorporates the functions of the existing NTAK03
TDS/DTR, NT5K20 XTD, and NT5K48 XTD cards.
Table 71
Option 11C Mini superloops
Main Chassis Chassis Expander
Card Slot CE Loop Super Loop Card Slot CE Loop Super Loop
1 20 0 7 26 4
2 21 0 8 27 4
3 22 0 9 28 8
4 23 0 10 8
5 24 4
6 25 4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 226 of 544 System Controller cards
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 227 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
242
Chapter 8 — SDI ports
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
System controller cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
NTAK03 TDS/DTR card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Connecting to the ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Connecting to the ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Characteristics of the low speed port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Characteristics of the high speed port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
ESDI settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
NTDK23, NTDK25, and NTDK80 Fiber Receiver cards . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Connection to external equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Introduction
This chapter describes the ports on the Option 11C system. Serial Data
Interface (SDI) ports are used to connect devices such as terminals and
modems to the Option 11C. The two types of SDI ports supported are:
• Data Terminal Equipment (DTE); typically a TTY or computer
• Data Communication Equipment (DCE); typically a modem
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 228 of 544 SDI ports
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
SDI ports are found on the SSC card, the optional TDS/DTR card, and the
optional SDI/DCH card. An additional SDI port is located on the Fiber
Receiver card to allow remote TTY access.
The possible Option 11C SDI port configurations are summarized in
Table 72.
System controller cards
The NTDK20 Small System Controller card (used with Option 11C), and the
NTDK97 MSC card (used with Option 11C Mini) are each equipped with
three SDI ports.
Each port can be used to connect a modem or terminal to the system. If
connection to a terminal is desired, an A0378652 NO modem (NULL modem
without hardware handshaking) is required.
For the Option 11C, the SDI port connector is located at the bottom rear of
the cabinet next to the connectors to the cross connect terminal. (An NTBK48
three-port cable is required to connect to system equipment.) Refer to
Figure 25 on page 229.
Table 72
SDI Port configurations
Circuit Card
Number of
Ports
DTE DCE RS232 RS422
SSC
NTDK20
3 Yes No Port 0 No
TDS/DTR
NTAK03
2 Ports 0/1 No Ports 0/1 No
SDI/DCH
NTAK02
4 Ports 0/1/
2/3
Ports 0/1/
2/3
Ports 0/1/
2/3
Ports 1/3
NTDK23
Fbr Rcvr card
1 Yes No Yes No
NTDK25 and
NTDK80
Fbr Rcvr card
1 Yes No Yes No
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
SDI ports Page 229 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Figure 25
Option 11C SDI cable connector
NTBK48 cable
connection
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 230 of 544 SDI ports
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
For the Option 11C Mini, the SDI port connector is located on the bottom left
side at the rear of the main chassis.
Figure 26
Option 11C Mini SDI cable connector
The Baud rate for port 0 is selected by setting switches on the faceplate of the
SCC, SSC, and MSC cards. Baud rates for ports 1 and 2 are set using overlay
programs.
SDI connector
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
SDI ports Page 231 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
The baud rates available on all three ports are 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, and
19200 baud.
NTAK03 TDS/DTR card
Table 74 shows the default settings.
The NTAK03 TDS/DTR card is replaced by the NTDK20 SSC card in
Option 11C, and the NTDK97 MSC in Option 11C Mini. However, it is still
supported and can be retained to gain access to extra ports.
Connecting to the ports
The methods by which external devices may be connected to the TDS/DTR
card are:
• Use the NTAK19EC two port SDI cable. The NTAK19EC cable does not
have to be terminated at the cross connect terminal since it is equipped
with connectors.
• Use the NE-A25-B cable and terminate it at the cross connect terminal.
Tables 75 and 76 give the pinouts for the TDS/DTR card.
Table 73
Default port configuration
TTY Number Card Port Use Configuration
0 0 0 MTC/SCH/BUG 1200/8/1/NONE
1 0 1 MTC/SCH/BUG 1200/8/1/NONE
2 0 2 CTY 1200/8/1/NONE
Table 74
Default port configuration
TTY Number Card Port Use Configuration
0 0 0 MTC/SCH/BUG 1200/8/1/NONE
1 0 1 MTC/SCH/BUG 1200/8/1/NONE
2 0 2 CTY 1200/8/1/NONE
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 232 of 544 SDI ports
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Table 75
NTAK03 connections at the cross-connect terminal— Port 0
Pair Color Signal
Designations
I=input O=output
1T
1R
W-BL
BL-W
DSR
DCD
I
I
2T
2R
W-O
O-W
-
DTR
-
O
3T
3R
W-G
G-W
RTS
CTS
O
I
4T
4R
W-BR
BR-W
RX
TX
I
O
5T
5R
W-S
S-W
SG
-
O
-
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
SDI ports Page 233 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Other pertinent information on the TDS/DTR ports is given below:
• Baud rates: 00; 600; 1200; 2400; 4800; 9600; 19,200
Default 1200.
• Data bits: 5, 6, 7, 8
Default 8.
• Parity: none, odd, even.
Default none.
• Stop bits: 1, 1.5, 2
Default 1
• Flow control: none, XON/XOFF, CTS/RTS
Default none.
Table 76
NTAK03 connections at the cross-connect terminal— Port 1
Pair Color Signal
Designations
I=input
O=output
6T
6R
R-BL
BL-R
DSR
-
I
-
7T
7R
R-O
O-R
-
DTR
-
O
8T
8R
R-G
G-R
RTS
CTS
O
I
11T
11R
BK-BL
BL-BK
RX
TX
I
O
13T
13R
BK-G
G-BK
-
DCD
-
I
22T
22R
V-O
O-V
SG
-
O
-
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 234 of 544 SDI ports
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card
The optional SDI/DCH card provides a maximum of four serial I/O ports,
which are grouped into two pairs:
• port 0 and port 1
and
• port 2 and port 3
Ports 1 and 3 may be configured as DCH or ESDI. Ports 0 and 2 may only be
configured as SDI. Each pair is controlled by a switch, as shown in Table 77.
In the U.K, DPNSS (Digital Private Network Signalling System) can replace
the DCH function.
Table 77
Switch settings
Port 0 Port 1 SW 1-1 SW 1-2
SDI DCH/DPNSS OFF OFF
SDI DCH/DPNSS OFF ON
— ESDI ON ON
Port 2 Port 3 SW 1-3 SW 1-4
SDI DCH/DPNSS OFF OFF
SDI DCH/DPNSS OFF ON
— ESDI ON ON
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
SDI ports Page 235 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Two ports offer the option for DTE/DCE configuration. This option is
selected from a jumper on the card. Table 78 shows the jumper settings:
Table 78
Jumper settings
Port
Jumper
location
Strap for
DTE
Strap for
DCE
Jumper
location
RS422 RS232
0 J10 C - B B - A
1 J7
J6
C - B
C - B
B - A
B - A
J9
J8
C - B
C - B
B - A
B - A
2 J5 C - B B - A
3 J4
J3
C - B
C - B
B - A
B - A
J2
J1
C - B
C - B
B - A
B - A
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 236 of 544 SDI ports
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Connecting to the ports
The methods by which external devices may be connected to the SDI/DCH
card are:
• Use the NTAK19FB four port SDI cable. This cable does not have to be
terminated at the cross connect terminal since it is equipped with
connectors.
• Use the NE-A25-B cable and terminate it at the cross connect terminal.
Tables 79 through 82 give the pinouts for the SDI/DCH card.
Table 79
NTAK02 pinouts — Port 0 at the cross-connect terminal
RS232
Cable Signal
Designations
I=input O=output
Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE
1T
1R
W-BL
BL-W
0
DTR
0
DCD
-
O
-
I
2T
2R
W-O
O-W
DSR
DCD
CH/CI
DTR
I
I
O
O
3T
3R
W-G
G-W
RTS
CTS
CTS
RTS
O
I
I
O
4T
4R
W-BR
BR-W
RX
TX
TX
RX
I
O
O
I
5T
5R
W-S
S-W
-
SG
-
SG
-
-
-
-
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
SDI ports Page 237 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Characteristics of the low speed port
Ports 0 and 2 are asynchronous, low speed ports. They transfer data to and
from the line one bit at a time.
Table 80
NTAK02 connections at the cross-connect terminal — Port 1
RS422 RS232
Cable Signal
Designations
I=input
O=output
Designations
I=input
O=output
Signal
Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE
5T
5R
W-S
S-W
SCTEA
-
SCTA
-
O
-
I
-
O
-
I
-
SCT
-
SCT
-
6T
6R
R-BL
BL-R
SCTEB
DTR
SCTB
DCD
O
O
I
I
-
-
-
-
CH/CI
DTR
-
DCD
7T
7R
R-O
O-R
DSR
DCD
CH/CI
DTR
I
I
O
O
I
I
O
O
DSR
DCD
CH/CI
DTR
8T
8R
R-G
G-R
RTS
CTS
CTS
RTS
O
I
I
O
O
I
I
O
RTS
CTS
CTS
RTS
9T
9R
R-BR
BR-R
SCRA
SCTA
SCTEA
RXCA
I
I
O
O
I
I
O
O
SCR
SCT
SCT
-
10T
10R
R-S
S-R
SCRB
SCTB
SCTEB
RXCB
I
I
O
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
11T
11R
BK-BL
BL-BK
RXDA
TXDA
TXDA
RXDA
I
O
O
I
I
O
O
I
RXD
TXD
TXD
RXD
12T
12R
BK-O
O-BK
RXDB
TXDB
TXDB
RXDB
I
O
O
I
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
25T
25R
V-S
S-V
SG
-
SG
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SG
-
SG
-
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 238 of 544 SDI ports
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Table 81
NTAK02 connections at the cross-connect terminal — Port 2
RS422 RS232
Cable Signal
Designation
s
I=input
O=output
Designations
I=input
O=output
Signal
Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE
13T
13R
BK-G
G-BK
-
-
-
-
-
O
-
I
-
DTR
-
DCD
14T
14R
BK-BR
BR-BK
-
-
-
-
I
I
O
O
DSR
DCD
CH/CI
DTR
15T
15R
BK-S
S-BK
-
-
-
-
O
I
I
O
RTS
CTS
CTS
RTS
16T
16R
Y-BL
BL-Y
-
-
-
-
I
O
O
I
RX
TX
TXD
RXD
17T
17R
Y-O
O-Y
O
-
I
-
O
-
I
-
-
SG
-
SG
Table 82
NTAK02 connections at the cross-connect terminal — Port 3 (Part 1 of 2)
RS422 RS232
Cable Signal
Designations
I=input
O=output
Designations
I=input
O=output
Signal
Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE
17T
17R
Y-O
O-Y
SCTEA
-
SCTA
-
O
-
I
-
O
-
I
-
SCT
-
SCT
-
18T
18R
Y-G
G-Y
SCTEB
DTR
SCTB
DCD
O
O
I
I
-
-
-
-
CH/CI
DTR
-
DCD
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
SDI ports Page 239 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
The characteristics of the low speed port are as follows:
• Baud rate: 300; 600; 1200; 2400; 4800; 9600; 19,200
Default 1200.
• Parity: Odd, even, none.
Default none.
• Stop bits: 1, 1.5, 2
Default 1
• Flow control: XON/XOFF, CTS, none.
Default none.
• Duplex: Full.
19T
19R
Y-BR
BR-Y
DSR
DCD
CH/CI
DTR
I
I
O
O
I
I
O
O
DSR
DCD
CH/CI
DTR
20T
20R
Y-S
S-Y
RTS
CTS
CTS
RTS
O
I
I
O
O
I
I
O
RTS
CTS
CTS
RTS
21T
21R
V-BL
BL-V
SCRA
SCTA
SCTEA
RXCA
I
I
O
O
I
I
O
O
SCR
SCT
SCT
-
22T
22R
V-O
O-V
SCRB
SCTB
SCTEB
RXCB
I
I
O
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
23T
23R
V-G
G-V
RXDA
TXDA
TXDA
RXDA
I
O
O
I
I
O
O
I
RXD
TXD
TXD
RXD
24T
24R
V-BR
BR-V
RXDB
TXDB
TXDB
RXDB
I
O
O
I
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
25T
25R
V-S
S-V
-
SG
-
SG
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SG
-
SG
-
Table 82
NTAK02 connections at the cross-connect terminal — Port 3 (Continued) (Part 2 of 2)
RS422 RS232
Cable Signal
Designations
I=input
O=output
Designations
I=input
O=output
Signal
Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 240 of 544 SDI ports
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
• Interface: RS-232-D
• Data bits: 5, 6, 7, 8
Default 8.
Characteristics of the high speed port
Ports 1 and 3 are synchronous, high speed ports with the following
characteristics:
• Baud rate: 1200; 2400; 4800; 9600; 19,200; 56,000; 64,000.
• Data bit: Transparent (1).
• Duplex: Full.
• Clock: Internal or external.
• Interface: RS-232-D, RS-422-A.
ESDI settings
Port 9 is pre-programmed as an ESDI port and supports Meridian Mail. It
functions as a Command Status Link with settings as shown in Table 83.
Table 83
ESDI settings (Part 1 of 2)
Setting Code
ESDI YES
SYNC YES
DUPX FULL
BPS 4800
CLOK EXT
IADR 003
RADR 001
T1 10
T2 002
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
SDI ports Page 241 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
NTDK23, NTDK25, and NTDK80 Fiber Receiver cards
Both the NTDK23, NTDK25 and NTDK80 Receiver cards used in
Option 11C support one Serial Data Interface (SDI) port.
Parameter settings
Baud rates are selected by setting switches located in the faceplate of each
Fiber Receiver card. The available settings are:
• 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 and 19200 baud
Other RS232 parameters are fixed as shown in Table 84.
T3 040
N1 128
N2 08
K 7
RXMT 05
CRC 10
ORUR 005
ABOR 005
USER CMS
Table 84
Fixed parameter settings
Parameter Setting
Parity None
Mode Asynchronous
Stop Bits 1
Data Bits 8
Table 83
ESDI settings (Part 2 of 2)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 242 of 544 SDI ports
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
The port can be used for MTC/SCH/BUG modes.
Connection to external equipment
The connection to external devices (such as TTYs, Modems and so on) is
achieved through the nine-pin SDI connector located in the expansion
cabinet. It is extended to the external equipment with an NTAK1118 single
port SDI cable.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 243 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
260
Chapter 9 — The TDS/DTR card
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Tone Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Tone Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
SDI function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Tones and Cadences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Introduction
The TDS/DTR card function was incorporated into the NTDK20 SSC used
with Option 11C. However, it is still supported on the system.
The TDS/DTR functionality is also incorporated into the NTDK97 MSC card
used with Option 11C Mini. The TDS/DTR is not required in a 2 chassis
Option 11C Mini configuration.
The TDS/DTR card can occupy any of slot numbers 1 - 9 in the main cabinet.
it must be manually programmed in LD 13 (for DTR) and LD 17 (for TDS
and TTY).
The TDS/DTR card can not be placed in the expansion cabinet or slot 10 of
the main cabinet.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 244 of 544 The TDS/DTR card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
The TDS/DTR card provides:
• 30 channels of Tone and Digit Switch
• Two Serial Data Interface ports
• 8 tone detection circuits configured as Digitone Receivers
Features
Tone Transmitter
The TDS/DTR tone transmitter provides 30 channels of tone transmission.
Up to 256 tones are available as u-Law or A-Law and up to 256 bursts and
cadences are downloaded from the CPU.
The TDS/DTR card does not provide the Music on Hold feature as do other
Meridian 1 TDS cards. The music source must come from a standard
Meridian 1 trunk card.
Tone Detector
The TDS/DTR card provides eight channels of DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-
Frequency) detection in A-Law or µ-Law.
In North America, pre-programmed data is configured for µ-Law tone
detection.
SDI function
The TDS/DTR card provides two SDI (Serial Data Interface) ports.
Refer to the “SDI ports” on page 227 in this guide for more information on
the TDS/DTR card SDI ports.
Tones and Cadences
The following tables give the tones and cadences provided by the NTAK03
TDS/DTR card.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The TDS/DTR card Page 245 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Table 85
NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 µ-Law tones and cadence (Part 1 of 6)
Tone #
Frequency
(Hz)
dB below
overload
Precision
Ringing
Tones
DTMF Digits MF Digits
1 350/440 -23/-23
√
2 (533 + 666) x 10 -23/-23
√
3 440 -23
√
4 350/440 -19/-19
√
5 440/480 -25/-25
√
6 480 -23
√
7 480/620 -30/-30
√
8 1020 -16
√
9 600 -23
√
10 600 -16
√
11 440/480 -22/-22
√
12 350/480 -23/-23
√
13 440/620 -24/-24
√
14 940/1630 -12/-10 P
15 700/1210 -12/-10 1
16 700/1340 -12/-10 2
17 700/1480 -12/-10 3
18 770/1210 -12/-10 4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 246 of 544 The TDS/DTR card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
19 770/1340 -12/-10 5
20 770/1480 -12/-10 6
21 850/1210 -12/-10 7
22 850/1340 -12/-10 8
23 850/1480 -12/-10 9
24 940/1340 -12/-10 0
25 940/1210 -12/-10 *
26 940/1480 -12/-10 #
27 700/1630 -12/-10 Fo
28 770/1630 -12/-10 F
29 850/1630 -12/-10 I
30 reserved
31 reserved
32 reserved
33 400 -19
√
34 [400 x
(120@85%)]
-19
√
35 940/1630 -17/-15 P
36 700/1210 -17/-15 1
37 700/1340 -17/-15 2
38 700/1480 -17/-15 3
Table 85
NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 µ-Law tones and cadence (Part 2 of 6)
Tone #
Frequency
(Hz)
dB below
overload
Precision
Ringing
Tones
DTMF Digits MF Digits
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The TDS/DTR card Page 247 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
39 770/1210 -17/-15 4
40 770/1340 -17/-15 5
41 770/1480 -17/-15 6
42 850/1210 -17/-15 7
43 850/1340 -17/-15 8
44 850/1480 -17/-15 9
45 940/1340 -17/-15 0
46 940/1210 -17/-15 *
47 940/1480 -17/-15 #
48 700/1630 -17/-15 Fo
49 770/1630 -17/-15 F
50 850/1630 -17/-15 I
51 reserved
52 reserved
53 1300/1500 -13/-13 0
54 700/900 -13/-13 1
55 700/1100 -13/-13 2/CC
56 900/1100 -13/-13 3
57 700/1300 -13/-13 4
58 900/1300 -13/-13 5
59 1100/1300 -13/-13 6
Table 85
NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 µ-Law tones and cadence (Part 3 of 6)
Tone #
Frequency
(Hz)
dB below
overload
Precision
Ringing
Tones
DTMF Digits MF Digits
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 248 of 544 The TDS/DTR card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
60 700/1500 -13/-13 7
61 900/1500 -13/-13 8
62 1100/1500 -13/-13 9
63 700/1700 -13/-13 ST3P/RB/
C11
64 900/1700 -13/-13 STP/C12
65 1100/1700 -13/-13 KP/CR/KP1
66 1300/1700 -13/-13 ST2P/KP2
67 1500/1700 -13/-13 ST/CC
68 400 -11
√
69 400 -14
√
70 400 x 50 -14
√
71 (533 + 666) x 20 -23/-23
√
72 reserved
73 350/440 -15/-15
√
74 480/620 -15/-15
√
75 440/480 -15/-15
√
76 400 -25
√
77 400/450 -14/-14
√
78 480/620 -19/-19
√
Table 85
NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 µ-Law tones and cadence (Part 4 of 6)
Tone #
Frequency
(Hz)
dB below
overload
Precision
Ringing
Tones
DTMF Digits MF Digits
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The TDS/DTR card Page 249 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
79 440/480 -19/-19
√
80 480 -19
√
81 420 -9
√
82 440 -29
√
83 reserved
84 350/440 -17/-17
√
85 400/450 -17/-17
√
86 400 -17
√
87 1400 -26
√
88 950 -12
√
89 1400 -12
√
90 1800 -12
√
91 470 0
√
92 940 0
√
93 1300 0
√
94 1500 0
√
95 1880 0
√
96 350/440 -10/-10
97 TBD
Table 85
NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 µ-Law tones and cadence (Part 5 of 6)
Tone #
Frequency
(Hz)
dB below
overload
Precision
Ringing
Tones
DTMF Digits MF Digits
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 250 of 544 The TDS/DTR card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Note: Tones #1 - 16 (inclusive) and #234 - 249 (inclusive) are included
for Norwegian and Malaysian specifications.
98 TBD
99 TBD
100 TBD
101 600 -19
√
102 800 -19
√
103 1400 -23
√
104 820 -7
Table 86
NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 A-Law tones and cadences (Part 1 of 10)
Tone # Frequency (Hz)
dB below
overload
Precision
Ringing
Tones
DTMF Digits MF Digits
1 940 X 1630 -14/-13 P
2 700 X 1210 -14/-13 1
3 700 X 1340 -14/-13 2
4 700 X 1480 -14/-13 3
5 770 X 1210 -14/-13 4
6 770 X 1340 -14/-13 5
7 770 X 1480 -14/-13 6
Table 85
NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 µ-Law tones and cadence (Part 6 of 6)
Tone #
Frequency
(Hz)
dB below
overload
Precision
Ringing
Tones
DTMF Digits MF Digits
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The TDS/DTR card Page 251 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
8 850 X 1210 -14/-13 7
9 850 X 1340 -14/-13 8
10 850 X 1480 -14/-13 9
11 940 X 1340 -14/-13 0
12 940 X 1210 -14/-13 *
13 940 X 1480 -14/-13 #
14 700 X 1630 -14/-13 F0
15 770 X 1630 -14/-13 F
16 850 X 1630 -14/-13 I
17 1400 -37
89 940/1630 -13/-12 P
90 700/1210 -13/-12 1
91 700/1340 -13/-12 2
92 700/1480 -13/-12 3
93 770/1210 -13/-12 4
94 770/1340 -13/-12 5
95 770/1480 -13/-12 6
96 850/1210 -13/-12 7
97 850/1340 -13/-12 8
98 850/1480 -13/-12 9
99 940/1210 -13/-12 0
Table 86
NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 A-Law tones and cadences (Part 2 of 10)
Tone # Frequency (Hz)
dB below
overload
Precision
Ringing
Tones
DTMF Digits MF Digits
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 252 of 544 The TDS/DTR card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
100 940/1340 -13/-12 *
101 940/1480 -13/-12 #
102 700/1630 -13/-12 F0
103 770/1630 -13/-12 F0
104 850/1630 -13/-12 I
105 350/440 -17/-17
√
106 400/450 -17/-17
√
107 1400 -26
√
108 440 -23
√
109 420 -9
√
110 950 -12
√
111 1400 -12
√
112 1800 -12
√
113 940/1630 -12/-10 P
114 700/1210 -12/-10 1
115 700/1340 -12/-10 2
116 700/1480 -12/-10 3
117 770/1210 -12/-10 4
118 770/1340 -12/-10 5
119 770/1480 -12/-10 6
Table 86
NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 A-Law tones and cadences (Part 3 of 10)
Tone # Frequency (Hz)
dB below
overload
Precision
Ringing
Tones
DTMF Digits MF Digits
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The TDS/DTR card Page 253 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
120 850/1210 -12/-10 7
121 850/1340 -12/-10 8
122 850/1480 -12/-10 9
123 940/1340 -12/-10 0
124 940/1210 -12/-10 *
125 940/1480 -12/-10 #
126 700/1630 -12/-10 F0
127 770/1630 -12/-10 F
128 850/1630 -12/-10 I
129 350/440 -22/-22
√
130 400 -19
√
131 400 -25
√
132 400/450 -22/-22
√
133 1400 -15
√
134 950 -19
√
135 1400 -20
√
136 1800 -20
√
137 420 -19
√
138 940/1630 -18/-17 P
139 700/1210 -18/-17 1
Table 86
NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 A-Law tones and cadences (Part 4 of 10)
Tone # Frequency (Hz)
dB below
overload
Precision
Ringing
Tones
DTMF Digits MF Digits
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 254 of 544 The TDS/DTR card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
140 700/1340 -18/-17 2
141 700/1480 -18/-17 3
142 770/1210 -18/-17 4
143 770/1340 -18/-17 5
144 770/1480 -18/-17 6
145 850/1210 -18/-17 7
146 850/1340 -18/-17
√
8
147 850/1480 -18/-17
√
9
148 940/1340 -18/-17
√
0
149 940/1210 -18/-17
√
*
150 940/1480 -18/-17
√
#
151 700/1630 -18/-17 F0
152 770/1630 -18/-17 F
153 850/1630 -18/-17 I
154 (533 + 666) X 10 -23
√
155 (533 + 666) X 20 -23
√
156 400 -12
√
157 820 -14
√
158 420 -12
√
Table 86
NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 A-Law tones and cadences (Part 5 of 10)
Tone # Frequency (Hz)
dB below
overload
Precision
Ringing
Tones
DTMF Digits MF Digits
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The TDS/DTR card Page 255 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
159 420 -25
√
160 420 X 25 -12
√
161 (553 + 666) X 10 -23
√
162 (553 + 666) X 20 -23
√
163 420 -22
√
164 480 -22
√
165 330 -11
√
166 330/440 -11/-14
√
167 1700 -19
√
168 440 -14
√
169 380 -8
√
170 1400 -32
√
171 820 -7 P
172 850 -8 1
173 420 -32 2
174 reserved 3
175 420 -6 4
176 420 -2 5
177 1020 -13 6
Table 86
NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 A-Law tones and cadences (Part 6 of 10)
Tone # Frequency (Hz)
dB below
overload
Precision
Ringing
Tones
DTMF Digits MF Digits
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 256 of 544 The TDS/DTR card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
178 1800 -17 7
179 1400 -23 8
180 950 -29 9
181 1400 -29 0
182 1800 -29 *
183 950 -22 #
184 470 0 F0
185 940 0 F
186 1880 0 I
187 400 -22
188 420 X 25 -17
189 950 -16
190 950 -25
191 940/1630 -9/-7
192 700/1210 -9/-7
193 700/1340 -9/-7
194 700/1480 -9/-7
195 770/1210 -9/-7
196 770/1340 -9/-7
197 770/1480 -9/-7
198 850/1210 -9/-7
Table 86
NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 A-Law tones and cadences (Part 7 of 10)
Tone # Frequency (Hz)
dB below
overload
Precision
Ringing
Tones
DTMF Digits MF Digits
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The TDS/DTR card Page 257 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
199 850/1340 -9/-7
200 850/1480 -9/-7
201 940/1340 -9/-7
202 940/1210 -9/-7
203 940/1480 -9/-7
204 700/1630 -9/-7
205 770/1630 -9/-7
206 850/1630 -9/-7
207 420 -10
208 420 -8
209 420 -4
210 1400 -18
211 1400 -9
212 350/420 -9/-9
213 420 -14
214 450 -12
215 450 -22
216 820 -16
217 350/420 -14/-14
218 940/1630 -14/-12
219 700/1210 -14/-12
Table 86
NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 A-Law tones and cadences (Part 8 of 10)
Tone # Frequency (Hz)
dB below
overload
Precision
Ringing
Tones
DTMF Digits MF Digits
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 258 of 544 The TDS/DTR card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
220 700/1340 -14/-12
221 700/1480 -14/-12
222 770/1210 -14/-12
223 770/1340 -14/-12
224 770/1480 -14/-12
225 850/1210 -14/-12
226 850/1340 -14/-12
227 850/1480 -14/-12
228 940/1340 -14/-12
229 940/1210 -14/-12
230 940/1480 -14/-12
231 700/1630 -14/-12
232 770/1630 -14/-12
233 850/1630 -14/-12
234 940 X 1630 -17/-15 p
235 700 X 1210 -17/-15 1
236 700 X 1340 -17/-15 2
237 700 X 1480 -17/-15 3
238 770 X 1210 -17/-15 4
239 770 X 1340 -17/-15 5
240 770 X 1480 -17/-15 6
Table 86
NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 A-Law tones and cadences (Part 9 of 10)
Tone # Frequency (Hz)
dB below
overload
Precision
Ringing
Tones
DTMF Digits MF Digits
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The TDS/DTR card Page 259 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
241 850 X 1210 -17/-15 7
Table 86
NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 A-Law tones and cadences (Part 10 of 10)
Tone # Frequency (Hz)
dB below
overload
Precision
Ringing
Tones
DTMF Digits MF Digits
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 260 of 544 The TDS/DTR card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 261 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
264
Chapter 10 — NTBK22 MISP card
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Reference List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
NTBK22 Multi-Purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP) . .. . . . . . . 261
Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Micro Processing Unit (MPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
High-Level Data Link Controller (HDLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Meridian 1 CPU to MISP bus interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
MISP network bus interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Reference List
The following are the references in this section:
• Option 11C ISDN BRI Hardware Installation and Maintenance (553-
3011-311)
Overview
NTBK22 Multi-Purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP)
The NTBK22 Multi-Purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP) card is
specific to Option 11C system and is supported on the Main cabinet. It
performs Data Link (Layer 2) and Network (Layer3) processing associated
with ISDN BRI and the OSI protocol. A description of the ISDN BRI feature
is contained in Option 11C ISDN BRI Hardware Installation and
Maintenance (553-3011-311).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 262 of 544 NTBK22 MISP card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Functional description
Each MISP can support 4 line cards (UILC or SILC or any combination of the
two). Each line card supports 8 DSLs, therefore each MISP supports 32
DSLs. Since each DSL uses two B-channels and one D-channel the MISP
supports 64 B-channels and 32 D-channels. If the MISP is carrying packet
data, it must dedicate one of its D-channels to communicate with the external
packet handler. In this case the MISP supports only 31 DSLs.
The main functions of the MISP are:
• to communicate with the CPU to report ISDN BRI status and receive
downloaded application software and configuration parameters
• to manage data link layer and network layer signaling that controls call
connection and terminal identification
• to control terminal initialization and addressing
• to assign B-channels for switched voice and data transmission by
communicating with the BRI terminal over the D-channel and allocating
to it an idle B-channel with appropriate bearer capabilities
• to separate D-channel data from signaling information and route the data
to the packet handler
• to send call control messages to ISDN BRI terminals over the D-channel
The MISP supports the downloading of ISDN applications from the
Option 11C software daughterboard. The MISP will be downloaded with the
appropriate application code:
• on the first enabling of the MISP card
• when Option 11C Software is upgraded
• when MISP Applications are added/changed
The applications for the MISP are copied from the software cartridge into
RAM on the MISP card. Only the new/different applications are downloaded.
This information is then copied into the Flash ROM on the MISP for storage.
This process requires approximately 10 minutes to complete and is carried out
while the MISP pack is operational. The next time the system or MISP card
resets, the application is loaded from the MISP Flash ROM provided there are
no new or different applications on the software cartridge.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTBK22 MISP card Page 263 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Micro Processing Unit (MPU)
The MPU coordinates and controls data transfer and addressing of the
peripheral devices and communicates with the Meridian 1 CPU using a
message channel on the CPU bus. The tasks that the MPU performs depend
on the interrupts it receives. The interrupts are prioritized by the importance
of the tasks they control.
High-Level Data Link Controller (HDLC)
The HDLC is a format converter that supports up to 32 serial channels that
communicate at speeds up to 64 kbps. The HDLC converts messages into the
following two message formats:
• a serially transmitted, zero-inserted, CRC protected message that has a
starting and an ending flag
• a data structure
Meridian 1 CPU to MISP bus interface
Information exchange between the CPU and the MISP is performed with
packetized messages transmitted over the CPU bus. This interface has a
16-bit data bus, an 18-bit address bus, and interrupt and read/write control
lines.
This interface uses shared Static Random Access Memory (SRAM) as a
communication exchange center between the CPU and the MPU. Both the
CPU and the MPU can access this memory over the transmit and receive
channels on the bus.
MISP network bus interface
The network bus interface:
• converts bit interleaved serial data received from the network bus into
byte interleaved data for transmission over the 32 time slots used by the
HDLC controller
• accepts byte interleaved data transmitted from the HDLC controller and
converts it into a bit interleaved data stream for transmission over the
network bus
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 264 of 544 NTBK22 MISP card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Power consumption
Power consumption is +5V at 2 A; +15V at 50 mA; and -15V at 50 mA.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 265 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
270
Chapter 11 — Meridian Digital
Telephones
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Reference List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Volume control . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Line engineering . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Local alerting tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Powering requirements . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Data characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Reference List
The following are the references in this section:
• Administration (553-3001-311)
• Maintenance (553-3001-511)
Introduction
Meridian Digital Telephones are connected to the system through a 2-wire
loop carrying two independent 64 kb/s PCM channels with associated
signaling channels. One of the two PCM channels is dedicated to voice, while
the other is dedicated to data traffic. Line cords and handset cords on all
Meridian digital telephones are equipped with snap-in TELADAPT
connectors for quick and easy connecting procedures.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 266 of 544 Meridian Digital Telephones
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
The telephone interfaces with the Digital Line Card (DLC) in the Option 11C
system.
Functional description
This chapter describes the features and capabilities of Meridian 1 digital
telephones.
Volume control
Speaker volume (or piezo-disc transducer volume in digital telephones not
equipped with a Handsfree unit) is controlled by one key with two toggle
positions. Operating the “Volume Up” or “Volume Down” pad of the key
increases or decreases the volume for the tone or sound which is currently
active.
Line engineering
Meridian Digital Telephones operate through twisted pair wiring. The
maximum permissible loop length is 3500 ft. of 24AWG standard twisted
wire with no bridge taps.
Local alerting tones
Four alerting tones and a buzz sound are provided. The alerting tone cadences
cannot be changed from the telephone, but can be altered for individual
Meridian Digital Telephones by software controlled adjustments in the
system. Refer to Administration (553-3001-311) and Maintenance (553-
3001-511) for more information. All other tones such as dial tone or overflow
tones, are provided by the system from a Tone and Digit Switch.
Alerting tone characteristics
The tone frequency combinations are as follows:
Tone Frequencies Warble rate (Hz)
1 (667 Hz, 500 Hz) 10.4
2 (667 Hz, 500 Hz) 2.6
3 (333 Hz, 250 Hz) 10.4
4 (333 Hz, 250 Hz) 2.6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Meridian Digital Telephones Page 267 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Note: A 500 Hz buzz signal is provided for incoming call notification
while the receiver is off-hook.
Powering requirements
Both the M2009 telephone and M2018 telephone are loop powered. Loop
power uses +15 V and -15 V sources, and assumes 3500 feet maximum loop
length of 24 AWG wire and a minimum of 13.5 V at the telephone terminals.
The Handsfree unit, which is integrated in the Meridian M2112, requires an
auxiliary power supply. Power can be obtained from either a QUT1 25 V AC
closet power supply or a local plug-in transformer (AO273077) over a
separate pair of wires.
If the power supply fails, Handsfree will not operate, but all other features
will continue to function, provided the power failure does not affect the
system. The loop-powered functions of all Meridian digital telephones
remain operational only if the system is equipped with a backup battery.
Additional power is obtained over a separate pair of wires. Maximum
Handsfree current is 110 mA with a minimum of 16 V AC to be present at the
telephone terminal. The following rules apply:
• For the QUT1 closet power supply:
— The power supply loop for the Handsfree unit should follow the
same rules as the loop powering requirements, i.e. the maximum
allowable loop length and wire gauge are 3500 ft. of 24 AWG wire.
— Each M2112 Handsfree must be powered by one tap of one winding,
however, it is permissible to connect two (2) 12.5 V AC windings in
series to provide 25 V AC power for Handsfree.
• For the local plug-in transformer:
— A single winding transformer equipped with a 3 m (10 ft.) cord of 22
AWG two-conductor stranded and twisted wire with a modular
duplex adapter (NE-267QA) at the end is required.
— The following minimum specifications have to be met by this
transformer:
– No load output voltage:21 V AC max.
– Voltage at rated current:16 V AC ±10%
– Rated load current:375 mA
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 268 of 544 Meridian Digital Telephones
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Data
If the Asynchronous Data Option (ADO) is installed, an external power
supply is needed in addition to the power from the line (see Table ). A 110 V
AC 60 Hz, 100 V AC 50/60 Hz or a 220 V AC 50 Hz multi-output power
supply unit provides nominal voltages of +5 V, +12 V and -12 V DC. The
power supply connects to the back of the telephone through a 5-pin Molex
power connector.
If the AC power supply fails, data calls cannot be processed. All external
power supplies are equipped with short circuit and thermal shutdown
protection.
The following units are available:
Table 87
External power supply for Meridian Digital Telephones ADO (Part 1 of 2)
North American version
NPS50220-03L5 Multi-output external power supply
(CPC-# A0336823), UL listed and CSA approved.
Input: 57 - 63 Hz 115 - 132 V AC
Output: +5 V DC, 1.0 A (pin 3 for supply, pin 2 for return)
+12 V DC, 200 mA (pin 6 for supply, pin 1 for return)
-12 V DC, 200 mA (pin 4 for supply, pin 1 for return)
Japanese version
NPS50220-03L8 Multi-output external power supply
(CPC-# A0336891), Japan Standard (“T” Mark).
Input: 47 - 63 Hz 85 - 115 V AC
Output: +5 V DC, 1.0 A (pin 3 for supply, pin 2 for return)
+12 V DC, 200 mA (pin 6 for supply, pin 1 for return)
-12 V DC, 200 mA (pin 4 for supply, pin 1 for return)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Meridian Digital Telephones Page 269 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Data characteristics
The Asynchronous Data Option (ADO) communicates with the data terminal
equipment having characteristics as shown in Table 88.
European version
NPS50220-03L5 Multi-output external power supply
(CPC-# A0336166), conforming to NPS50561 general
requirements and UL1012.
Input: 57 - 53 Hz 200 - 240 V AC
Output: +5 V DC, 1.0 A (pin 3 for supply, pin 2 for return)
+12 V DC, 200 mA (pin 6 for supply, pin 1 for return)
-12 V DC, 200 mA (pin 4 for supply, pin 1 for return)
Table 88
Meridian Digital Telephone ADO characteristics
Data type ASCII
Synchronization External
power supply for Meridian
Digital Telephones ADO
Asynchronous, Start-Stop
Number of Bits 8 bits
Parity none (unchecked)
Data rate 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bits per second
(autobaud)
Stop bits 2 bits for 110 bits per second; 1 bit for all other speeds
Transmission Full duplex
Table 87
External power supply for Meridian Digital Telephones ADO (Part 2 of 2)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 270 of 544 Meridian Digital Telephones
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Voice and Voice Signaling Channel
The Digital telephone Interface Chip functions as a control to switch the
handset, speaker, keyboard scanning, and LCD controls on and off.
Data and Data Signaling Channel
The ADO supports asynchronous ASCII operation. A data byte is received
from your terminal or personal computer, a control byte is added, and the two
bytes are transferred to the associated line card. In the other direction, two
data bytes are received from the line card, and the data byte is delivered to
your terminal in a bit serial format, at the terminal's bit rate.
The Meridian Digital ADO (equipped with the RS-232-C EIA interface)
supports the following features for ASCII, asynchronous, character mode,
interactive data terminals:
• HAYES dialing
• Keyboard dialing (KBD) - all transmission speeds supported
• Call origination to local and remote hosts
• Call termination
• Ring Again Capability
• Auto Dial
• Speed Call
• Automatic or Manual answering of incoming data calls
• Manual Modem pooling
• Remote loopback
Details for accessing and operating the various features are given in the
Asynchronous Data Option (ADO) User Guide (P0661883).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 271 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
282
Chapter 12 — M2317 Telephone
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
LCD indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Alphanumeric display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Handsfree operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Safety considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Environmental considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Dimensions and weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Line engineering . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Powering requirements . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Data communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Data characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Features description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Firmware features . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Software features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 272 of 544 M2317 Telephone
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Introduction
The M2317 Telephone can provide simultaneous voice and data
communications. It connects to the system using digital transmission. The
M2317 Telephone is intended for professionals and managers, and secretaries
in group answer positions. It interfaces with the system through the Digital
Line Card (DLC). It is connected to the switching equipment through a two-
wire loop carrying two independent 64 kb/s Time Compressed Multiplex
(TCM) channels with associated signaling channels. One of the two TCM
channels is dedicated to voice, and the other to data traffic.
The M2317 Telephone is equipped with a microphone and speaker to permit
Handsfree operation.
Figure 27 shows the M2317 Telephone.
Figure 27
M2317 Telephone

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
M2317 Telephone Page 273 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Physical description
The M2317 Telephone is fully modular. The telephone line cord and the
handset cord are both equipped with TELADAPT connectors at each end,
which permits quick replacement when required.
The M2317 Telephone is equipped with 32 keys (see Figure 28) which are
arranged as follows:
Fixed keys These are 16 keys to which a fixed function is assigned. They
consist of:
• 12 dial pad keys
• 1 Release key
• 1 Hold key
• 1 Volume control key (with 2 toggle positions)
• 1 Handsfree/Mute key (with associated LCD indicator)
Feature keys There are 11 feature keys on the telephone faceplate. Each has
an associated LCD indicator. Up to a maximum of ten voice Directory
Numbers and specific features such as Auto Answerback, Call Waiting and
Dial Intercom can be assigned.
Softkeys Five soft keys are located beneath the display screen. Each softkey
has a seven character wide on the display screen immediately above the key.
The labels change as the available features change. For example, a soft key
could access one feature in the idle state and a different feature in the active
state.
The M2317 provides independent volume adjustments for Handsfree,
handset and alerting tone volumes. For detailed adjusting information, refer
to the M2317 Telephone User Guide (P0687154).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 274 of 544 M2317 Telephone
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
LCD indicators
LCD indicators support 4 key/LCD states:
Figure 28
M2317 Telephone — key identification
Function LCD state
idle off
active on (steady)
ringing (or “feature pending”) flash (60 Hz)
hold fast flash (120 Hz)
Directory
Number lens
Note: Numbers in brackets in this illustration are shown for testing and
identification purposes only. These numbers are not marked on the keys.
553-1290
First line of LCD Display
Second line of LCD Display
Soft Key (1) Soft Key (2) Soft Key (3) Soft Key (4) Soft Key (5)
Rls Hold
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
* 0 #
Handsfree
Mute
(11)
Feature Key (10)
Feature Key (7)
Feature Key (8)
Feature Key (9)
Feature Key (6)
Feature Key (5)
Feature Key (4)
Feature Key (1)
Feature Key (2)
Feature Key (3)
Feature Key (0)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
M2317 Telephone Page 275 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Alphanumeric display
The M2317 Telephone is equipped with a two-line (40 characters per line
capacity) Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) screen and five LCD-labeled “soft”
keys located immediately beneath the display screen.
Handsfree operation
With the Handsfree on, you can talk to another party without lifting the
handset. Handsfree can be activated by pressing the Handsfree/Mute key, or
by pressing a DN key without lifting the handset. The Handsfree/Mute LCD
indicator shows the status of the Handsfree. Once Handsfree is activated, it
can be deactivated by picking up the handset or by pressing the Release (RLS)
key.
Specifications
The following specifications govern the safety and performance of the
Meridian M2317 Telephone, and outline the environmental conditions under
which this performance is achieved.
Safety considerations
Shock and fire hazards
For protection against electrical shock, energy, or fire hazards, the telephone
meets the following specifications:
CSA, C22.2 No. 0.7 —M1985
UL 1459, relevant sections (March 1984 draft)
Overvoltage protection
The M2317 Telephone meets the specifications detailed by CSA, C22.2 No.7,
paragraph 6.9.3.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 276 of 544 M2317 Telephone
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Environmental considerations
Temperature and humidity
Operating state:
Storage:
Dimensions and weight
The M2317 Telephone has the following dimensions:
depth 226.5 mm (9 in.)
width 272.0 mm (10.1 in.)
height (front) 27.5 mm (1.1 in.)
height (rear) 73.5 mm (2.9 in.)
Excluding the power supply and the NT1F09AA Asynchronous Data Option
board, the M2317 weighs approximately 1.4 Kg (3 lb). With the Data Option
installed, the telephone, excluding power supply and data cable, weighs
approximately 1.56 Kg (3.5 lb).
Temperature range 0° to 50° C (32° to 122° F)
0° to 40° C (32° - 104° F) with Data Option
Relative humidity 5% to 95% from 4° to 29° C (39° to 84° F)
non-condensing
5% to 34% from 29.5° to 49° C (85° to 120° F)
non-condensing
Temperature range -20° to 70° C (-4° to 158° F)
Relative humidity 5% to 95% from -20° to 29° C (-4° to 84° F)
non-condensing
5% to 15% from 29.5° C to 66° C (85° to
150° F)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
M2317 Telephone Page 277 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Line engineering
The maximum permissible loop length is 1067 m (3500 ft.) of 22 or 24 AWG
or 760 m (2500 ft.) of 26 AWG standard twisted wire with no bridge taps or
load coils. The 1067 m (3500 ft.) loop length requires the use of a Digital Line
Card (DLC).
Powering requirements
The M2317 Telephone uses loop power for all circuits requiring +10V. In
order to satisfy the power requirements for those circuits on a maximum loop
60 mA of 13.5 V DC must be available at the telephone. The line card must
have compatible voltage and source resistance to meet these requirements.
The Logic circuits of the M2317 Telephone require + 5 V DC which must be
supplied from an external, regulated DC supply which connects through a
jack in the back of the telephone. If the telephone is equipped with a data
option, the required 5 V DC is provided by the external data option power
supply. The external power supply must meet the following specifications:
Input: 95 - 129 V AC, 60 Hz
Output: +5 V DC, + or - 5%, 300 mA
10 mV maximum RMS ripple
Cord: 2.5 m (8 ft.) of 20 AWG wire mating to a
Switchcraft 722A connector
Case: Wall mounted, CSA and UL approved.
Operational within 0° C (32°F) and 50°C
(122°F) temperature limits
Impedance: Greater than 10 M¾ to ground
The external power supply, in all cases where no asynchronous data option is
installed, is connected to the mating connector mounted in the rear of the
M2317 Telephone, covering the area where the RS-232-C interface connector
would be located.
If the Asynchronous Data Option is installed, an external, multi-output data
power supply NPS50220-03L5 is required. This power supply satisfies all
powering requirements for the telephone and the data option.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 278 of 544 M2317 Telephone
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
The data option power supply connector plugs into the back of the telephone
next to the RS-232-C interface connector. Data option installation requires
the removal of the telephone power supply connector.
The NPS50220-03L5 power supply meets the following specifications:
AC input voltage: 105 - 132 V AC
Input line frequency: 57 - 63 Hz
Operating temperature: 0° to 50°C (32° to 122°F)
Operating humidity: 5% to 95% non-condensing
Storage temperature: -40° to 70°C(-40° to 158°F)
Output voltages:
+5 V DC at 1.0 A
-12 V DC at 200 mA
+12 V DC at 200 mA
Case dimensions: 178 x 102 x 76 mm (7 x 4 x 3 in.)
The NPS50220-03L5 is equipped with an internal thermal and short circuit
protection.
Whenever the external power supply fails (due to failure of the power utility),
the M2317 Telephone assumes Plain Ordinary Telephone Service (POTS)
status. At this time the telephone is capable of receiving and originating calls
on the prime DN, and of giving the usual alerting tones (ringing). It will not
support the Display screen, softkeys, feature keys, Handsfree, or data
facilities while in POTS status.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
M2317 Telephone Page 279 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Figure 29
Block diagram of M2317
Data communication
The M2317 can be equipped with an Asynchronous Data Option which will
permit the use of either the telephone's dial pad or the feature keys to place
and terminate data calls in the asynchronous mode. The Data Option also
supports keyboard dialing from the data terminal when that terminal operates
in the asynchronous mode.
553-1291
(W-BL)
(BL-W)
(W-G)
(G-W)
(BK-G)
(G-BK)
(BK-S)
(S-BK)
Line Cord
to Telephone
Tip
Ring
G
R
T0
R0
T1
R1
T6
R6
T7
R7
To Telephone
To Telephone
To Telephone
Cross-connect Block
Part of multi-pair Cable
Part of Shelf
Wiring Harness
Shelf Connector
16
40
13
38
3
28
26
1
PE Shelf
Line Pack
Pack Connector
T0
R0
T1
R1
T6
R6
T7
R7
Unit 0
Unit 1
Unit 6
Unit 7
TELADAPT
Connecting Block
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 280 of 544 M2317 Telephone
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
The Asynchronous Data Option is equipped with a dialing feature which
enables the user to originate data calls to local and remote Data Terminal
Equipment (DTE) directly from a data terminal keyboard or personal
computer. The dialing feature, in conjunction with the communications
firmware provided with the Data Option, supports most of the HAYES
Smartmodem dialing features. Terminal emulation packages can also be used
with the dialing feature.
Data characteristics
The M2317 Asynchronous Data Option communicates with Data Terminal
Equipment (DTE) having characteristics as shown in Table 89.
Table 89
M2317 Asynchronous Data Option characteristics
Features description
Firmware features
Firmware is chip-dependent and cannot be changed or altered on site. As a
general rule, all firmware is on ROM microchips.
Firmware functions
The following functions are performed by firmware in the M2317 Telephone:
• Predial
• Last Number Redial
• Saved Number
• Redial Saved Number
Data type ASCII
Synchronization Asynchronous, Start-Stop
Number of Bits 8 bits
Parity none (unchecked)
Data rate 300, 1200, 2400, 4800,
9600, 19200 bits per second (autobaud)
Stop bits 2 bits for 110 bits per second;
1 bit for all other speeds
Transmission Full duplex
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
M2317 Telephone Page 281 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
• Timer
• Time and Date
• Call Processing
Software features
Downloading
All information related to the programmable keys must be downloaded into
the M2317 RAM memory through the DLC.
Softkeys are automatically defined for the telephone based on COS, data base
or package restrictions. Softkeys work only in conjunction with the LCD
display screen.
Table 90
M2317 data features
Data features M2317
DTE
Keyboard
• Ring Again • X • X
• Speed Call • X • X
• System Speed Call • X • X
• Display • • X
• Call Forward • X •
• Call Transfer (Note) • • X
• Autodial • X • X
• Last Number Redial • X •
• Save Number • X •
• Redial Saved Number • X •
• Manual modem pooling using keyboard dialing requires only call transfer to be defined.
• The Data DN must always be assigned to feature key 10.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 282 of 544 M2317 Telephone
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 283 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
308
Chapter 13 — Meridian Modular
Telephones
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Software requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Peripheral equipment requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Physical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Features and options matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Optional equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Environmental and safety considerations . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Line engineering . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Local alerting tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Meridian Programmable Data Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Functional description
The Meridian Modular Telephones are designed to provide cost effective
integrated voice and data communication capability. They interface with
Option 11C using the Digital Line Card (DLC). No additional hardware is
required at the line circuit to provide data communication.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 284 of 544 Meridian Modular Telephones
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Meridian Modular Telephones are connected to the system through a two-
wire loop carrying two independent 64 Kb/s PCM Channels with associated
signaling channels. One of the two PCM channels is dedicated to voice while
the other is dedicated to data traffic. Line cords and handset cords on all
Meridian Digital Telephones are equipped with snap-in TELADAPT
connectors for easy and quick connecting procedures.
Software requirements
The option number for the Meridian Modular Telephones is 170. The
mnemonic is ARIE. The DSET package (88) and the TSET package (89) are
required.
Peripheral equipment requirements
The telephone interfaces with the Digital Line Card (DLC) in Option 11C.
The digital line card supports eight Integrated Voice and Data ports; each port
supports one data and one voice channel. A voice TN and a data TN are
assigned in the software.
General description
This document describes the various features and capabilities of the following
Meridian Modular Telephones.
M2006—a single line telephone with 6 programmable function keys.
See Figure 30.
M2008—a multi-line telephone with 8 programmable function keys.
See Figure 31.
M2616—a high performance multi-line telephone with 16 programmable
function keys and integrated Handsfree unit. See Figure 32.
M2016S—a Telephone Security Group Class II approved telephone designed
to provide on-hook security. It is similar to the M2616, with 16
programmable function keys, but has no handsfree capability. See Figure 32.
M2216ACD-1—a multi-line telephone for ACD operations. It has 15
programmable function keys, a special ACD Display Module and two RJ-32
jacks for modular electret headsets. See Figure 33.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Meridian Modular Telephones Page 285 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
M2216ACD-2—a multi-line telephone for ACD operations. It has 15
programmable function keys, and a special ACD Display. It is similar to
model 1, but with one PJ-327 jack for a carbon agent headset and one RJ-32
jack for an electret supervisor headset. See Figure 33.
Figure 30
M2006 modular telephone
Dimensions:
Length: 8.42 in. (215 mm.)
Width: 8.42 in. (215 mm.)
Height: 3.61 in. (93mm.)
Weight: approximately 2 lbs. (1 kg.)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 286 of 544 Meridian Modular Telephones
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Figure 31
M2008 modular telephone
Dimensions:
Length: 8.42 in. (215 mm.)
Width: 8.42 in. (215 mm.)
Height: 3.61 in. (93 mm.)
Weight: approximately 2 lbs. (1 kg.)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Meridian Modular Telephones Page 287 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Figure 32
M2016S and M2616 modular telephones
Dimensions:
Length: 9.75 in. (250 mm.)
Width: 9.45 in. (235 mm.)
Height: 3.64 in. (93 mm.)
Weight: approximately 2 lbs. (1 kg.)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 288 of 544 Meridian Modular Telephones
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Figure 33
M2216ACD-1 and -2 modular telephones
Dimensions:
Length: 9.75 in. (250 mm.)
Width: 9.45 in. (235 mm.)
Height: 3.64 in. (93 mm.)
Weight: approximately 2 lbs. (1 kg.)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Meridian Modular Telephones Page 289 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Figure 34
M2216ACD-1 and -2 left side showing headset jacks
Physical characteristics
All of the Meridian Modular Telephones are equipped with:
• Hold key
• Release key
• Volume control
• Message Waiting lamp
• Speaker
Each modular telephone also has a number of programmable keys with LCD
indicators that can be assigned to any combination of directory numbers and
features (only one DN for the M2006). The lower right-hand key (key 0) is
reserved for the Primary DN.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 290 of 544 Meridian Modular Telephones
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
When equipped with a Display module or MPDA, key 07 is automatically
assigned as the Program key and cannot be changed. Key 05 becomes the
Program key on the M2006, if equipped with MPDA.
The M2006 is a single line telephone and accepts only one DN. The
remaining five key/lamp pairs can be assigned any feature that is not
considered a DN, such as Transfer, Call Forward, or Conference. Features
that cannot be assigned are those that are considered DNs: Voice Call and 2-
way Hotline, for example. Attempting to assign more than one DN to the
M2006 causes the telephone to disables itself and all LCDs light steadily. It
will return to its normal operating state when service change removes all
secondary DNs.
LCD indicators support 4 key/LCD states:
Function LCD state
idle off
active on (steady)
ringing flash (60 Hz)
hold (or feature pending *) fast flash (120Hz)
* An indicator fast-flashes when you have pressed a feature key but have not
completed the procedure necessary to activate the feature.
Volume control
One key with two toggle positions controls volume. Pressing the right
“volume up” or left “volume down” side of the key incrementally increases
or decreases the volume for the tone or sound which is currently active.
The volume settings are retained for subsequent calls until new volume
adjustments are made. If the telephone is equipped with a Display Module,
volume can be adjusted at any time with the setting displayed on the screen
(in Program mode).
Handset volumes can be configured to return to nominal on a per call basis.
You can adjust the volume of the following tones, while they are audible:
• ringing
• handsfree (M2616)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Meridian Modular Telephones Page 291 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
• handset/headset
• buzz
• on-hook dialing
When the telephone is disconnected, all volume levels will return to default
values upon reconnection.
When the telephone is operating on loop power alone, the highest (eighth)
step in volume cannot be reached (as seen when using Display in Program
mode).
Message Waiting lamp
Each Meridian Modular Telephone has a red triangle in the upper right-hand
corner that lights brightly to indicate a message is waiting. This LED is the
primary message waiting indicator and lets you know a message is waiting
regardless of whether the telephone has a message waiting key/lamp pair.
You must have Message Waiting CCOS configured.
If you do assign a message waiting key/lamp pair, there will be two
indications of a message waiting:
• the red Message Waiting triangle lights, and
• the LCD associated with the Message Waiting key flashes.
You may assign an Autodial key that dials the message center (or voice mail
system) to avoid the double indication, or have no key/lamp pair assigned to
the message center.
The Message Waiting lamp is also used to indicate security of the M2016S.
The red LED triangle lights steadily when the phone is not secure (handset is
off-hook, phone is ringing or any time the handset/piezo relays are
connected). The red LED triangle blinks when a message is waiting.
Handsfree (M2616 only)
Handsfree (if software assigned), allows the user to talk to another party
without lifting the handset. Activate Handsfree by depressing the Handsfree/
mute key (key 15, top left) or by selecting a DN without lifting the handset.
Once Handsfree is activated, it can be deactivated by picking up the handset
or by ending the call using the Release (Rls) key. If Handsfree is not software
assigned, you can assign any other feature to key 15.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 292 of 544 Meridian Modular Telephones
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
When the Handsfree/mute key is pressed during a Handsfree call, the
microphone is deactivated while the speaker remains active, preventing the
other party from overhearing local conversations. The Handsfree LCD
indicator flashes while the microphone is muted. Pressing the Handsfree/
mute key again reactivates the microphone and the Handsfree LCD lights
steadily.
Features and options matrix
Table 91 lists the distinctive characteristics of each Meridian Modular
Telephone and shows the optional hardware that you can add to each.
Table 91
Hardware features and options
M2006 M2008 M2016S M2616 M2216ACD-1 M2216ACD-2
Programmable
keys
6 8 16 16 16 16
Handsfree
microphone
stan-
dard
Optional hardware available:
Display
x x x standard standard
Key Expansion
Module
x x x x
Programmable
Data Adapter
x x x x x x
External alerter
interface
x x x x x
Brandline
insert
x x x x x x
Note: In this table, x indicates available features for the set type listed along the top row.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Meridian Modular Telephones Page 293 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Note: If the set is equipped with a Display or Meridian Programmable
Data Adapter, the number of programmable keys is reduced by one, as
key 07 (key 05 on M2006) automatically becomes the Program key.
Optional equipment
The modular design of the digital telephones described in this document
makes adding hardware options easy (see Figure 35). Below is a list of
hardware you can add to Meridian Modular Telephones.
Display Module
A two line by 24 character Display Module provides system prompts,
feedback on active features and valuable calling party information. In
addition, you can modify various set features such as volume and screen
contrast using the Program key (top right function key). You can enable a Call
Timer which times calls made or received on the prime DN.
The Display Module requires a Power Supply Board on M2008 .
There are two types of Display Module available:
• North American Display—supports normal business features in two
languages, English and Quebec French.
• Special Applications Display—supports the following features:
— Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
— Hospitality
— six languages (English, Quebec French, Parisian French, German,
Spanish, Dutch)
A Special Applications Display Module comes as standard equipment on the
M2216ACD telephones. M2008 or M2616 telephones used as ACD
telephones require the Special Applications Display.
Note: It is possible to adjust the Display screen contrast so that it is too
light or too dark to read. If you cannot read the Display, disconnect and
then reconnect the line cord to return to the default settings.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 294 of 544 Meridian Modular Telephones
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Meridian Programmable Data Adapter
The Meridian Programmable Data Adapter (MPDA) mounts within the
telephone (see Figure 36) and allows asynchronous ASCII terminals,
personal computers and printers to be connected to the telephone using an
RS-232-D (subminiature) interface. The MPDA has multilingual capability.
It requires additional power. See “Power requirements” on page 300.
For more information, see “Meridian Programmable Data Adapter” on
page 306
Program key
The Program key is automatically assigned to Meridian Modular Telephones
with Display or MPDA added. It allows you to change a variety of display
features such as screen format, contrast and language. It also lets you change
data parameters such as transmission speed and parity.
The upper right-hand key (key 05 on M2006, key 07 on all others)
automatically becomes the Program key when Display or MPDA is
configured with the telephone. The Program key is local to the set and shows
blank when you print key assignments in LD 20.
External Alerter Interface
The External Alerter Board provides an interface to standard remote ringing
devices, such as a ringing unit installed in a location separate from the
telephone. The External Alerter Interface is not the remote ringer itself, but
provides access to standard, off-the-shelf remote ringing devices. The Alerter
Board requires additional power (see “Power requirements” on page 300).
You can program the External Alerter Interface to activate a ringer (or light)
when the telephone rings or when the telephone is in use (off-hook).
Key Expansion Module
A modular 22 key unit can be attached to any 16 key Meridian Modular
Telephone. The extra keys can be assigned to any combination of lines and
features. You can add up to two expansion modules to a single telephone. You
will need a separate footstand for the module(s), one for a single module, one
for a double (see “Ordering information”). The expansion module requires
additional power (see “Power requirements”).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Meridian Modular Telephones Page 295 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
The Key Expansion Module connects to the telephone through a ribbon cable
running from the base of the telephone. It is physically connected to the
telephone by the footstand.
Brandline Insert
The filler plate on the telephone or Display Module contains a removable
insert designed to accommodate custom labeling. You can order blank
Brandline Inserts and have a printer silk screen your company logo on them.
Brandline Inserts snap easily into and out of the filler plate.
Headset
The M2216ACD telephones are compatible with three electret headsets:
• Plantronics Polaris
• GN Netcom Profile
• NT Liberation
The M2216ACD-2 agent jack is compatible with any standard carbon
headset.
The headset interface of the M2216ACD-1 is adjustable to allow you to tune
the electrical characteristics to optimize performance, while the M2216ACD-
2 headset interface is fixed.
Any recording device connected to the receive path of a Meridian Modular
Telephone must meet these requirements:
• load impedance at least 8K ohms across the audio band
• connect in parallel across pins 3 and 4 of the handset/headset jack
• isolate power source from the headset/handset jack
M2006/M2008/M2616 You can use an electret headset in the handset port of
the M2006, M2008 or M2616 telephone. Choose an amplified headset that
draws power from a battery or AC transformer (power is not provided by the
telephone). The amplifier must draw less than 400 micro amps from the
telephone jack.
The headset should be designed to work with a telephone jack with these
characteristics:
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 296 of 544 Meridian Modular Telephones
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Transmit interface: +5 V through 10K DC bias resistance with maximum
current of 500 micro amps. The differential input impedance is 10K ohms.
Connects to pins 2 and 5 of the handset jack.
Receive interface: single ended output with output impedance of 180 ohms.
Connects to pins 3 and 4 of the handset jack.
Figure 35
M2616 with Display Module and Key Expansion Module
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Meridian Modular Telephones Page 297 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Figure 36
Back of telephone showing Meridian Programmable Data Adapter
Specifications
The following specifications govern the performance of the Meridian
Modular Telephones under the environmental conditions described.
Environmental and safety considerations
All digital telephones and their associated options meet the requirements of
Electronic Industries Association (EIA) specification PN-1361.
Temperature and humidity
Operating state:
Temperature range 0° to 50° C (32° to 104° F)
Relative humidity 5% to 95% (non-condensing). At
temperatures above 34°C (93°F) relative
humidity is limited to 53 mbar of water vapor
pressure.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 298 of 544 Meridian Modular Telephones
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Storage:
Electromagnetic interference
The radiated and conducted electromagnetic interference meets the
requirements of Subpart J of Part 15 of the FCC rules for class A computing
devices.
Line engineering
The maximum permissible loop length is 3500 ft. (915 m), assuming 24
AWG (0.5 mm) standard twisted wire with no bridge taps. A 15.5 dB loss at
256 KHz defines the loop length limit (longer lengths are possible, depending
on the wire's gauge and insulation).
The Meridian Modular Telephones use a 6 conductor line cord (A0346862).
Note: Use only the line cord provided with the Meridian Modular
Telephone. Using a cord designed for other digital telephones could
result in damage to the cord.
Figure 37 shows a simplified block diagram of the Meridian Modular
Telephone, MPDA and DLC in the Option 11C system.
Temperature range -50° to 70° C (-58° to 158° F)
Relative humidity 5% to 95% (non-condensing). At
temperatures above 34°C (93°F) relative
humidity is limited to 53 mbar of water vapor
pressure.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Meridian Modular Telephones Page 299 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Figure 37
Block diagram of MPDA and Meridian Modular Telephone
Local alerting tones
Each telephone provides four alerting tones and a buzz sound. The system
controls the ringing cadence by sending tone-ON and tone-OFF messages to
the telephone. The alerting tone cadences cannot be changed from the
telephone, but can be altered for individual Meridian Modular Telephones by
software controlled adjustments.
Alerting tone characteristics
The tone frequency combinations are:
Tone Frequencies Warble Rate (Hz)
1 667 Hz, 500 Hz 10.4
2 667 Hz, 500 Hz 2.6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 300 of 544 Meridian Modular Telephones
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
M2006/M2008:
M2016S/M2616/M2216ACD:
A 500 Hz buzz signal is provided for incoming call notification while the
receiver is off-hook.
Power requirements
The M2006, M2008, M2616 (basic configuration and with Display Module)
and M2216ACD-1 are loop powered. Loop power consists of a -30 V AC
power source and assumes a 3500 ft. (915 m) maximum loop length of 24
AWG wire and a minimum 15.5 V AC at the telephone terminals.
Note: The loop length limit is defined by a 15.5 dB loss at 256 KHz.
Longer lengths can be determined using the wire's gauge and insulation.
The Handsfree feature, which is integrated into the M2616, requires no
additional power.
Some configurations of telephones and options need more than basic loop
power to operate. Table 92 lists the Meridian Modular Telephones and shows
when additional power is needed to operate the telephone or its optional
hardware. Power Supply Boards come installed in factory-assembled
configurations which require additional power.
If a power failure occurs, configurations which require loop power only will
continue to work if the Option 11C system has battery backup. Only those
options which require additional power will cease to function.
3 1600 Hz, 2000 Hz 10.4
4 1600 Hz, 2000 Hz 2.6
3 333 Hz, 250 H 10.4
4 333 Hz, 250 Hz 2.6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Meridian Modular Telephones Page 301 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
During a power failure, the carbon agent headset on the M2216ACD-2 will
fail and the electret supervisor's jack can be used as an agent jack. If no
headset was plugged in to the electret jack at this time, the call is dropped, the
agent logged off and must log in again once the electret headset is plugged in.
When power is restored, the carbon jack returns automatically.
Power Supply Board
The power supply option consists of a Power Supply Board which mounts
inside the telephone, coupled with an external wall-mount transformer or
closet power supply which provides power to the Power Supply Board. The
Power Supply Board receives its power through pins 1 and 6 of the line cord.
The Power Supply Board connects to the telephone through a 14 pin bottom
entry connector.
The Power Supply Board comes factory installed with any configuration of
the M2016S and M2216ACD-2. The M2006 and M2008 require the Power
Supply Board with the addition of any option. The M2616 requires the Power
Supply Board with any option except the Display Module.
Table 92
Power requirements
Telephone type Loop power
Additional power
(Power Supply Board)
M2006 Basic configuration Any option(s)
M2008 Basic configuration Any option(s)
M2016S No All configurations
M2616 Basic configuration (with Hands-
free) and Display
Programmable Data Adapter
Key Expansion Module
External alerter interface
M2216ACD-1 Basic configuration (with Display) Any option(s)
M2216ACD-2 No All configurations
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 302 of 544 Meridian Modular Telephones
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Local plug-in transformer
A single winding transformer equipped with a 10 ft. (3 m) cord of 22 AWG
two-conductor stranded and twisted wire with a modular RJ-11 duplex
adapter (refer to Figure 38) can provide the additional power needed to
operate the telephone and its options.
120 V transformer (AO367335 or equivalent). The following minimum
specifications must be met by this transformer:
Input voltage: 120 V AC / 60 Hz
No load output voltage: 29 V AC maximum
Voltage at rated current: 26.7 V AC minimum
Rated load current: 700 mA
240 V transformer (AO367914 or equivalent). The following minimum
specifications have to be met by this transformer:
Input voltage: 240 V AC / 50 Hz
No load output voltage: 29 V AC maximum
Voltage at rated current: 26.7 V AC minimum
Rated load current: 700 mA
Note: You cannot wall mount the telephone over the wall jack when
using a transformer, due to the size of the RJ-11 adapter. Hang it above
or to the side of the jack and run the line and power cords to it.
CAUTION
Do not plug any equipment (computer, modem, LAN card) other than
the Meridian Modular Telephone into the RJ-11 transformer adapter,
as damage to equipment may result.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Meridian Modular Telephones Page 303 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Figure 38
Configuration of local plug-in transformer
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 304 of 544 Meridian Modular Telephones
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Closet power supply
Closet power can be obtained from an AC transformer for loops of 100 ft.
(30 m) or less, or a DC transformer for loop lengths of 650 ft. (197 m) or less.
An equivalent power source can be used but must maintain isolation of
outputs to the terminal. (Refer to Figure 39).
All terminals must be isolated from the input winding and each terminal must
be isolated from all other terminal windings. A separate winding is required
for each terminal, and grounds should not be connected.
Note: The QUT1 closet power supply source is not compatible with
Meridian Modular Telephones.
The AC source should be rated at 29 V AC, 700 mA isolated. The DC source
should be rated at 42 V DC, 300 mA isolated, with current limiting output of
1 amp.
CAUTION
When using closet power, do not plug the TELADAPT connector into
any equipment (computer, modem, LAN card) other than the Meridian
Modular Telephone, as damage to equipment may result.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Meridian Modular Telephones Page 305 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Figure 39
Closet power supply configuration
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 306 of 544 Meridian Modular Telephones
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Meridian Programmable Data Adapter
When a Meridian Modular Telephone is equipped with the Meridian
Programmable Data Adapter (MPDA), you can make a data call using
keyboard dialing from your attached terminal. You can carry on voice and
data communication simultaneously without causing any mutual interference.
The MPDA communicates with Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) having
characteristics as shown in Table 93:
Table 93
MPDA data characteristics
Note: The MPDA configuration of data parameters is stored locally
(although you can set the configuration in the Option 11C system). You
cannot set the data parameters in the system before installing the MPDA
in the telephone (the configuration information will be lost).
The keyboard dialing routine may vary with the data equipment being used
and reference to the user's data terminal manual may be necessary. For more
detailed information, see Meridian Programmable Data Adapter User Guide.
The MPDA can establish either data calls or voice calls. You can make data
calls using keyboard dialing, keypad dialing or the AT command dialing
feature. The AT dialing features lets you originate data calls to local and
remote Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) directly from a data terminal
keyboard or personal computer. You can make voice calls using AT dialing
from your terminal.
Data type ASCII
Synchronization Asynchronous, Start-Stop
Number of Bits 8 bits
Parity none (unchecked)
Data rate 110, 150, 300, 1200, 2400, 4800,
9600, 19200 bits per second (autobaud)
Stop bits 2 bits for 110 bits per second;
1 bit for all other speeds
Transmission Full duplex
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Meridian Modular Telephones Page 307 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Users of personal computers already equipped with a Hayes Smartmodem or
users who have a stand-alone Hayes Smartmodem can substitute the MPDA
for data integration. The Hayes dialing feature, when used with third party
communication software and the digital telephone, will support most of the
Hayes Smartmodem features. Third party terminal emulation packages can
also be used with Hayes dialing.
New features supported by the MPDA include:
• enhanced Hayes commands, including upper- and lower case dialing,
voice call origination through AT dialing, hang up data call, and on-line
disconnect of voice call
• script file capabilities allow you to program multiple data resources for
automatic resource access
• Voice Call Origination (VCO)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 308 of 544 Meridian Modular Telephones
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 309 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
318
Chapter 14 — M3900 telephone series
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Reference List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Prelabeled feature keys . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Soft-labeled Programmable keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Soft Programmable feature keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Programmable feature keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Software requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Hardware options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
External Alerter interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Brandline insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Key-based Add-on Module (KBA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Analogue Terminal Adapter (ATA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Meridian Communications Adapter (MCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Accessory Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Environmental and safety considerations . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Temperature and humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Line engineering . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 310 of 544 M3900 telephone series
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Reference List
The following are the references in this section:
• Digital Telephone Line Engineering (553-2201-180)
Introduction
The Meridian M3900 series of telephones consists of the following
telephones:
• M3901: digital entry set for occasional use
• M3902: basic set for manufacturing floor, warehouse, and low telephone
use
• M3903: enhanced set for office professionals and technical specialists
• M3904: professional set for Managers, Executives, Administrative
Assistants
• M3905: call center set for Call Center Agents and Supervisors
These sets are digital, integrated voice/data telephone with the following
features:
Table 94
M3900 features
M3901
entry level
M3902
basic
M3903
enhanced
M3904
professional
M3905
call center
lines supported
1 2 6 8
Programmable
feature keys
5 3 4
fixed feature
keys
no Options/
Program, Mes-
sage
(with LED),
Transfer
(with LED)
Options/
Program, Message, Directory/
Log, Application, Shift
Supervisor,
Emergency,
Not Ready,
Make Busy, In-
calls
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
M3900 telephone series Page 311 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Note: All sets are desk or wall mountable, have message waiting LED
with visual ringing, and have volume control.
The M3900 Series Meridian Digital Telephones support features through a
variety of feature keys:
fixed keys for
call processing
no Hold, Good-
bye,
Smart Mute
(with LED),
Handsfree
(with LED)
Hold, Good-bye,
Smart Mute (with LED), Head-
set (with LED),
Handsfree (with LED)
Hold, Good-
bye,
Smart Mute
(with LED),
Headset (with
LED)
Supervisor
Observe Key
(with LED)
no yes
fixed
application
keys
no Up, Down,
Left, Right
Up, Down, Left, Right, Quit, and Copy
Display
no (2 x 24):
1 Text Lines,
1 Label Line
(3 x 24):
1 Info Line,
1 Text Lines,
1 Label Line
(5 x 24):
1 Info Line,
3 Text Lines,
1 Label Line
(4 x 24):
1 Info Line,
2 Text Lines,
1 Label Line
Accessory
Ports
no 1 2
Accessories
no ATA, MCA,
External
Alerter &
Recorder
Interface
ATA, MCA,
External
Alerter &
Recorder
Interface
ATA, MCA, External Alerter &
Recorder Interface,
Key-based Add-on
Headset
through MPA jack Direct Connect
Table 94
M3900 features (Continued)
M3901
entry level
M3902
basic
M3903
enhanced
M3904
professional
M3905
call center
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 312 of 544 M3900 telephone series
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Figure 40
M3901
Figure 41
M3902
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
M3900 telephone series Page 313 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Figure 42
M3903
Figure 43
M3904
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 314 of 544 M3900 telephone series
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Figure 44
M3905
Prelabeled feature keys
The prelabeled feature keys are the feature keys on your M3900 Series
Meridian Digital Telephone that are labeled at the factory.
Depending on your model of telephone the prelabeled feature keys include
Hold, Good-bye, Dial Pad, Mute, and Volume Control Bar and also include
unique prelabeled feature keys assigned to specific models of the M3900
Series Meridian Digital Telephone, such as: Feature, Option, shift,
Navigation, Quit, Copy, Message, Transfer, Directory/Log, Headset,
Directory/Log, Handsfree, InCalls, Not Ready, Make Busy, Call Supervisor.
Soft-labeled Programmable keys
The Soft-labeled line/feature keys are the keys located at the sides of the
upper display area. The user can change the LCD label of these keys to fit
their needs. The soft-labeled programmable line/feature keys are the two to
eight keys (the number of keys depends on the M3900 model) located at the
sides of the upper display area. The Soft-programmable key has two layers,
giving the user access to two features per key. For example: the M3905 has
eight soft-labeled line/feature keys, which gives the user 16 lines/features on
those eight keys.
Soft Programmable feature keys
The Soft Programmable feature keys are the three to four keys located below
the bottom display area on your M3903, M3904, and M3905 telephone. They
have three layers of features.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
M3900 telephone series Page 315 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Programmable feature keys
The programmable features for the M3901 model are not Soft Programmable
feature keys. The M3901 can have five programmable features, they are
accessed by pressing the Feature key and a keystroke.
Physical description
Specifications
Software requirements
Release 24 or later supports the M3900 Meridian Digital telephones.
Hardware options
This section describes the options available for M3900 Series Meridian
Digital Telephones. Table 95 lists the features and optional hardware
available for each telephone.
Table 95
Hardware features
Optional hardware
available
M3901 M3902 M3903 M3904 M3905
Accessory Connection
Module (ACM)
NA x x x x
Key-based Add-on
Module
NA NA NA x x
Meridian
Communications
Adapter (MCA)
NA x x x x
Analogue Terminal
Adapter (ATA)
NA x x x x
External alerter
interface
NA x x x x
Brandline insert Hardware Hardware Electronic
Hardware
Electronic
Hardware
Electronic
Hardware
Note: X indicates the hardware available for the M3900 Series Meridian Digital Telephone.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 316 of 544 M3900 telephone series
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
External Alerter interface
The External Alerter provides an interface to a remote ringer device which is
installed in a location separate from the telephone. The External Alerter
interface is not a remote ringer, but provides access to standard, off-the-shelf
remote ringer devices or visual indicator.
You can program the External Alerter interface to activate a ringer (or light)
when the telephone rings or when the telephone is in use (off-hook).
Brandline insert
The M3901 Series Meridian Digital Telephone contains a removable insert
made to accommodate your company logo.You can order blank Brandline
Inserts with your company logo. The M3903, M3904 and M3905 supports
electronic brandline.
Key-based Add-on Module (KBA)
The Key-based Add-on Module attaches to the M3904 and M3905 telephone.
The module provides 22 extra line and/or feature keys. You can attach a
maximum of two KBAs to the M3904 and M3905.
Analogue Terminal Adapter (ATA)
The Analogue Terminal Adapter lets you connect an analogue device such as
a fax machine or modem to your telephone. You can then have simultaneous
use of the telephone and the analogue device. The ATA can be used with the
M3902, M3903, M3904, and M3905 models.
Meridian Communications Adapter (MCA)
The Meridian Communications Adapter lets the user connect the telephone to
a personal computer or terminal. This allows the telephone to exchange data
between your computer and other computers. The M3902, M3903, M3904,
and M3905 models support the MCA.
Accessory Keying
A maximum of two cartridge accessories can plug into the slots at the rear of
the terminal stand. The ports provide access to a SIDL/SDI ports, USART
port, and GPIO0. Two accessories cannot access the same serial port. The
mechanical keying prevents this situation from occurring. Refer to the figure
below for a better understanding of mechanical keying.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
M3900 telephone series Page 317 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Figure 45
M3900 Series mechanical keying
Table 96 shows accessory compatibility for the M3900 Series Meridian
Digital Telephone.
Table 96
M3900 Series Meridian Digital Telephone accessory compatibility (Part 1 of 2)
HW Port SDI
SIDL +
USAR
T
USAR
T
UART HEADSET GPIO
HW
Port
Accessory MC
A
ATA DTA USB CTIA DB
A
KB
A
EXT.
ART
*
HD/
S
EXT.
ART **
RCD
R
SDI
MCA N/A X X X OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
ATA X OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
DTA X OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
SIDL+
USAR
T
USB X X OK OK OK OK OK OK
USAR
T
CTIA OK OK OK X N/A OK OK OK OK OK OK
UART
DBA OK OK OK OK OK N/A X OK OK OK OK
KBA OK OK OK OK OK X OK OK OK OK OK
SDI
accessory
USART
accessory
SDI + USART
accessory
non-serial
accessory
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 318 of 544 M3900 telephone series
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Environmental and safety considerations
Temperature and humidity
Line engineering
Meridian Digital telephones use twisted pair wiring on transmission lines
selected by the rules given in Digital Telephone Line Engineering (553-2201-
180). The maximum permissible loop length is 3500 ft. (1067 m), assuming
24 AWG (0.5 mm) standard twisted wire with no bridge taps. A 15.5 dB loss
at 256 kHz defines the loop length limit. (Longer lengths are possible,
depending on the wire’s gauge and insulation.).
Note: Use only the line cord provided with the telephone. Using a cord
designed for another telephone could result in damage to the cord.
HEAD
SET
EXT.ATR* OK OK OK OK OK OK OK N/A X OK X
HD SET OK OK OK OK OK OK OK X N/A OK OK
GPIO
EXT.ATR OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK N/A OK
RCDR OK OK OK OK OK OK OK X OK OK N/A
Operating state:
Temperature range 0° to 50°C (32° to 104°F)
Relative humidity 5% to 95% (noncondensing). At temperatures
above 34°C (93°F) relative humidity is limited
to 53 mbar of water vapor pressure.
Storage:
Temperature range –50° to 70°C (–58° to 158°F)
Relative humidity 5% to 95% (noncondensing). At temperatures
above 34°C (93°F) relative humidity is limited
to 53 mbar of water vapor pressure.
Table 96
M3900 Series Meridian Digital Telephone accessory compatibility (Part 2 of 2)
HW Port SDI
SIDL +
USAR
T
USAR
T
UART HEADSET GPIO
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 319 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
334
Chapter 15 — European Digital
telephones: 3110, 3310, and 3820
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Reference List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Fixed keys (same for all three models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Additional feature keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Software requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Hardware options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
External Alerter interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Brandline insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Key Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Meridian Communications Adapter (MCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Environmental and safety considerations . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Environmental and safety considerations . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Line engineering . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Local alerting tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 320 of 544 European Digital telephones: 3110, 3310, and 3820
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Reference List
The following are the references in this section:
• Telephone and Attendant Console: Installation (553-3001-215)
• Administration (553-3001-311)
• Maintenance (553-3001-511)
This guide provides feature, add-on module, and specification information
for Meridian European Digital telephones.
Note: These telephones are only available in Europe.
Introduction
The Meridian European Digital telephones series of telephones consists of the
following telephones:
• M3110
• M3310
• M3820
Meridian digital telephones are designed to provide cost-effective integrated
voice and data communication. These telephones communicate with the
Meridian 1 using digital transmission over standard twisted-pair wiring. They
interface with the Meridian 1 using the Integrated Services Digital Line Card
(ISDLC) or the eXtended Digital Line Card (XDLC).
Meridian digital telephones are connected to the system through a two-wire
loop carrying two independent 64 kbs PCM channels with associated
signaling channels. One of the two PCM channels is dedicated to voice while
the other is dedicated to data traffic.
The telephone interfaces with the Digital Line Card (XDLC) or ISDLC in the
Peripheral Equipment shelf of the system. The XDLC supports 16 voice and
16 data ports. The ISDLC supports eight voice and eight data ports. A TN is
assigned to each port in the system software.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
European Digital telephones: 3110, 3310, and 3820 Page 321 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Figure 46
M3110 Meridian digital telephone
Figure 47
M3310 Meridian digital telephone
553 7201
Hold Rls
DEF
3
MNO
6
WXY
Z
9
ABC
2 1
JKL
5
TUV
8
0
GHI
4
PRS
7
553 7200
Hold Rls
DEF
3
MNO
6
WXY
Z
9
ABC
2 1
JKL
5
TUV
8
0
GHI
4
PRS
7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 322 of 544 European Digital telephones: 3110, 3310, and 3820
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Physical description
Meridian digital telephones support many general features as illustrated in
Table 97.
Figure 48
M3820 Meridian digital telephone
Table 97
Meridian digital telephone general features (Part 1 of 2)
Feature M3820 M3310 M3110
Handsfree, On-Hook Dialling, and Group Listening yes yes yes
Dedicated Release and Hold keys yes yes yes
Message Waiting and Speaker/Mute Indicators yes yes yes
Headset Socket yes yes no
2 x 24 character display yes yes no
Feature keys including: 20 10 10
• Store/program key yes yes no
• system programmable keys 13 7 8
553 7199
Hold Rls
A
DEF
3
MNO
6
WXY
Z
9
ABC
2 1
JKL
5
TUV
8
0
GHI
4
PRS
7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
European Digital telephones: 3110, 3310, and 3820 Page 323 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
• Handsfree/speaker key yes yes yes
• Mute key yes yes yes
• Directory key yes no no
• Caller’s List key yes no no
• Edit key yes no no
• Delete key yes no no
Volume control for:
• Handset/Headset, Ringing Tone, Buzz Tone,
On-Hook dialling and Group Listening
yes yes yes
• Handsfree yes yes no
Directory/Caller’s List with dedicated keys for
Directory, Callers, Edit, Delete, 4 cursor and Dial
yes no no
Terminal options:
• MCA data option to provide integrated voice
and data, External Alerter for high ambient
noise environments, Wall mount ability
yes yes yes
• Add-on Key Expansion Modules (2 maximum) yes no no
Brand line insert to provide for special company logos yes yes yes
Note: The location of the buttons used to activate and interact with these features is shown in
Figure 49.
Table 97
Meridian digital telephone general features (Part 2 of 2)
Feature M3820 M3310 M3110
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 324 of 544 European Digital telephones: 3110, 3310, and 3820
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Figure 49
The location and function of buttons on the Meridian digital telephone
553-7199
Hold Rls
A
DEF
3
MNO
6
WXY
Z
9
ABC
2 1
JKL
5
TUV
8
0
GHI
4
PRS
7
Program Key†
LCD Indicators
Display Module†
Feature Keys
Release (Rls) Key
Message Waiting
Indicator
Hold Key
Speaker
Speaker/Mute LED
Speaker Key
Mute Key
Edit Key*
Callers List Key*
Cursor Keys*
Directory Key*
Delete Key*
Dial Key*
Main Extension Key
or Directory Number (DN) key
† M3310 and M3820 only
* M3820 only
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
European Digital telephones: 3110, 3310, and 3820 Page 325 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Fixed keys (same for all three models)
• Hold: By pressing the hold key, you can put an active call on hold. Return
to the caller by pressing the extension key beside the flashing LCD
indicator.
• Release (Rls): You can terminate an active call by pressing the Rls key
or by hanging up the handset. The release key is especially useful for
disconnecting handsfree and headset calls.
• Volume control: The volume key controls the volume of the handset, the
speaker and the ringer. Raise the volume by pressing the right side of the
bar. Lower it by pressing the left side.
• Mute: When engaged in a call, you can press the mute key. The party(ies)
to whom you are speaking cannot hear you. This is especially useful
when on a conference call and you are only listening. When you wish to
return to the two-way conversation, you must push the mute key again.
The mute key applies to handsfree, handset and headset microphones.
• Speaker/Handsfree: The speaker key allows you to activate handsfree
and group listening features. Handsfree is only available on the M3310
and M3820 models and is enabled by the system administrator. If
handsfree is not configured at the switch, the telephone can only be used
to listen.
The table below indicates the mode the terminal is in when the speaker key is
operated under the various switch and set operations.
Table 98
Speaker Key Function
MODEL
Handsfree not
selected at the
switch
Handsfree selected
at the switch -
Group listening off
Handsfree selected at
the switch - Group
listening On
M3820 and
M3310
CPM
a
and primary
DN key-Speaker LED
is not illuminated
HF and Primary DN
key - speaker LED is
on when in Handsfree
mode
HF, Group listening
b
and
Primary DN key - speaker
LED is on when in HF or
Group Listening mode
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 326 of 544 European Digital telephones: 3110, 3310, and 3820
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Additional feature keys
Message Waiting lamp key. Each telephone has a red message waiting LED
just above the hold and Rls keys that lights to indicate a message is waiting.
This LED is the primary message waiting indicator and lets you know that a
message is waiting, regardless of whether the telephone has a message
waiting key/lamp pair. You must have Message Waiting allowed Class of
Service. See LD 11, Administration (553-3001-311) and Maintenance (553-
3001-511)
If you do assign a message waiting key/lamp pair, there will be two
indications of a message waiting:
• the red Message Waiting LED lights
• the LCD associated with the Message Waiting key blinks
Autodial key. You can assign an Autodial Key that dials the message center
(or voice mail system) to avoid the double indication or have no key/lamp pair
assigned to the message center.
M3110
CPM and primary DN
key-Speaker LED is
not illuminated
N/A Group listening and Pri-
mary DN key - speaker
LED is on when in Group
listening mode.
a. CPM is Call Process Monitor which enables the user to hear, for example, the dial tone in the speaker. Group
listening enables the user to speak through the handset/headset microphone and one or more parties can lis-
ten through the speaker, thus hearing both sides of the conversation. In Handsfree mode, the user (or group of
users) uses both the handsfree microphone and speaker.
b. Group listening is switched on or off under the program key option *1. (M3820 and M3310 only)
Table 98
Speaker Key Function (Continued)
MODEL
Handsfree not
selected at the
switch
Handsfree selected
at the switch -
Group listening off
Handsfree selected at
the switch - Group
listening On
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
European Digital telephones: 3110, 3310, and 3820 Page 327 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Programmable Feature keys
Each Meridian digital telephone has a number of programmable keys with
LCD indicators that can be assigned to any combination of directory numbers
and features. The M3820 has 13 fully programmable feature keys; the M3310
has seven, and the M3110 has eight. The lower right-hand key (key 0) is
reserved for the Primary DN.
LCD indicators support four key/LCD states:
Software requirements
Meridian digital telephones are supported by Release 16 and later software.
The package number for the Meridian digital telephones is (170.) The
mnemonic is ARIE. The DSET package (88) and the TSET package (89) are
required.
Hardware options
This section describes the options available for M3900 Series Meridian
Digital Telephones. Table 99 lists the features and optional hardware
available for each telephone.
Function LCD state
idle off
active on (steady)
ringing flash (60 Hz)
hold fast flash (120 Hz)
Note: An indicator fast flashes when you have pressed a feature key
but have not completed the procedure necessary to activate the feature.
Table 99
Hardware features
Optional hardware
available
M3901 M3902 M3903 M3904 M3905
Accessory Connection
Module (ACM)
NA x x x x
Note: X indicates the hardware available for the M3900 Series Meridian Digital Telephone.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 328 of 544 European Digital telephones: 3110, 3310, and 3820
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
External Alerter interface
The External Alerter Board provides an interface to standard remote ringing
devices, such as a ringing unit, installed in a location separate from the
telephone. The External Alerter interface is not the remote ringer itself, but
provides access to standard, off-the-shelf remote ringing devices. The Alerter
Board requires additional power. See “Power requirements” on page 331.
You can program the External Alerter interface to activate a ringer (or light)
when the telephone rings or when the telephone is in use (off-hook).
For information on installing and setting up the External Alerter, see “Add-
on modules” in Telephone and Attendant Console: Installation (553-3001-
215).
Brandline insert
The telephone contains a removable insert designed to accommodate custom
labeling. You can order blank Brandline Inserts and have a printer silk screen
your company logo on them.
Key-based Add-on
Module
NA NA NA x x
Meridian Communica-
tions Adapter (MCA)
NA x x x x
Analogue Terminal
Adapter (ATA)
NA x x x x
External alerter
interface
NA x x x x
Brandline insert Hardware Hardware Electronic
Hardware
Electronic
Hardware
Electronic
Hardware
Table 99
Hardware features (Continued)
Optional hardware
available
M3901 M3902 M3903 M3904 M3905
Note: X indicates the hardware available for the M3900 Series Meridian Digital Telephone.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
European Digital telephones: 3110, 3310, and 3820 Page 329 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Key Expansion Module
A 22-key unit module can be attached to any M3820 terminal. The extra keys
can be assigned to any combination of lines and features. You can add up to
two expansion modules to a terminal. You will need a separate footstand for
the module(s), one for a single module, one for a double.
Meridian Communications Adapter (MCA)
The MCA lets you connect your telephone to a personal computer or terminal.
You can then use your telephone to exchange data between your computer
and other computers. The MCA can be used with all three models.
Environmental and safety considerations
Environmental and safety considerations
All Meridian digital telephones are designed to comply with:
EN 60950:1992 - Safety of Information Technology Equipment including
Electrical Business Equipment.
EN 41003:1993 - Particular Safety Requirements for Equipment to be
connected to Telecommunication Network.
Temperature and humidity
Electromagnetic interference
All the digital telephones are designed to comply with:
EN 50082-1:1992 - Electromagnetic Compatibility - Generic immunity
standard Part 1: Residential, commercial and light industry.
Operating state:
Temperature range 0° to 50°C (32° to 104°F)
Relative humidity 5% to 95% (noncondensing). At temperatures
above 34°C (93°F) relative humidity is limited
to 53 mbar of water vapor pressure.
Storage:
Temperature range –50° to 70°C (–58° to 158°F)
Relative humidity 5% to 95% (noncondensing). At temperatures
above 34°C (93°F) relative humidity is limited
to 53 mbar of water vapor pressure.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 330 of 544 European Digital telephones: 3110, 3310, and 3820
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
EN 50081-1:1992 - Electromagnetic Compatibility - Generic emissions
standard. Generic standard class: Residential, commercial and light industry.
Line engineering
Meridian digital telephones use twisted pair wiring on transmission lines
selected by the rules. The maximum permissible loop length is 3500 ft.
(1067 m), assuming 24 AWG (0.5 mm) standard twisted wire with no bridge
taps. A 15.5 dB loss at 256 kHz defines the loop length limit. (Longer lengths
are possible, depending on the wire’s gauge and insulation.) Table 100 gives
detailed information on loop lengths.
Note: Use only the line cord provided with the telephone. Using a cord
designed for another telephone could result in damage to the cord.
Local alerting tones
Each telephone provides four alerting tones and a buzz sound. The system
controls the ringing cadence by sending tone-ON and tone-OFF messages to
the telephone. The alerting tone cadences cannot be changed from the
telephone but can be altered for individual terminals by software controlled
adjustments in the system. See Administration (553-3001-311). All other
telephone tones, such as dial tone or overflow, are provided by the Meridian 1
from a Tone and Digit Switch.
Table 100
Loop lengths for Meridian digital telephones
PVC insulated cable
(polyvinyl chloride)
QPC578 A and B QPC578 C + NT8D02
22 or 24 AWG 100–3000 ft.
(30.5–915 m)
0–3500 ft.
(0–1067 m)
0–3500 ft.
(0–1067 m)
26 AWG 100–2100 ft.
(30.5–640 m)
0–2600 ft.
(0–945 m)
0–2600 ft.
(0–793 m)
Note 1: No bridge taps or loading coils are allowed.
Note 2: Effect of line protector at MDF reduces loop length by 500 ft.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
European Digital telephones: 3110, 3310, and 3820 Page 331 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Alerting tone characteristics
The tone frequency combinations are as follows:
A 500 Hz buzz signal is provided for incoming call notification while the
receiver is off-hook.
Power requirements
The Meridian digital telephones are loop powered. Loop power, originating
in the ISDLC or the DLC, consists of a 30 Vdc power source and assumes a
3500 ft. (1219 m) maximum loop length of 24 AWG (0.5 mm) wire and a
minimum 15.5 Vdc at the telephone terminals.
Note: The loop length limit is defined by a 15.5 dB loss at 256 KHz.
Longer lengths can be determined using the wire’s gauge and insulation.
Some configurations of telephones and options need more than basic loop
power to operate. Table 101 lists the types of Meridian digital telephones and
shows when additional power is needed to operate the telephone or its
optional hardware. Power Supply Boards come installed in factory-
assembled configurations that require additional power.
Note: If a power failure occurs, configurations that require loop power
will continue to work only if the system has battery backup. Only those
options that require additional power will cease to function.
Tone Frequencies Warble Rate (Hz)
1 667 Hz, 500 Hz 5.2
2 667 Hz, 500 Hz 2.6
:
3 1600 Hz, 2000 Hz 5.2
4 1600 Hz, 2000 Hz 2.6
:
3 333 Hz, 250 Hz 5.2
4 333 Hz, 250 Hz 2.6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 332 of 544 European Digital telephones: 3110, 3310, and 3820
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002

Power supply board
The power supply option consists of a power supply board that mounts inside
the telephone, coupled with an external wall-mount transformer or closet
power supply that provides power to the power supply board. The power
supply board receives its power through pins 1 and 6 of the line cord.
The power supply board connects to the telephone through a 14-pin bottom
entry connector.
Local plug-in transformer
A single winding transformer equipped with a 10 ft. (3 m) cord of 22 AWG
two-conductor stranded and twisted wire with a modular RJ-11 duplex
adapter can provide the additional power needed to operate the telephone and
its options. See “Configuration of local plug-in transformer” on page 303.
Table 101
Power requirements, Meridian digital telephones
Telephone Loop power
Additional power
(Power Supply Board)
M3820
Terminal, handsfree,
headset, key expansion
MCA, External Alerter Interface
M3310
Terminal, headset, handsfree MCA, External Alerter Interface
M3110
Terminal MCA, External Alerter Interface
CAUTION
Do not plug any equipment other than the terminal into the RJ-11
transformer adapter, as damage to equipment can result.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
European Digital telephones: 3110, 3310, and 3820 Page 333 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
120 V transformer The following minimum specifications must be met by
this transformer:
240 V transformer The following minimum specifications have to be met by
this transformer:
Note 1: You cannot wall mount the telephone over the wall jack when
using a transformer because of the size of the RJ-11 adapter. Hang it
above or to the side of the jack and run the line and power cords to it.
Note 2: The above-mentioned transformers can also be used with
outlets identified as 110V or 220V.
Closet Power Supply
Closet power can be obtained from an AC transformer for loops of 100 ft.
(30 m) or less, or a DC transformer for loop lengths of 650 ft. (198 m) or less.
An equivalent power source can be used but must be UL listed to provide
isolation of outputs to the terminal. See “Closet power supply configuration”
on page 305.
Input voltage 120 Vac/60 Hz
No load output voltage 29 Vac maximum
Voltage at rated current 26.7 Vac minimum
Rated load current 700 mA
Input voltage 240 Vac/50 Hz
No load output voltage 29 Vac maximum
Voltage at rated current 26.7 Vac minimum
Rated load current 700 mA
CAUTION
When using closet power, do not plug the TELADAPT connector into
any equipment other than the Meridian digital telephone, as damage to
equipment may result.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 334 of 544 European Digital telephones: 3110, 3310, and 3820
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Note 1: All terminals must be isolated from the input winding and each
terminal must be isolated from all other terminal windings. A separate
winding is required for each terminal, and grounds must not be
connected.
Note 2: The QUT1 closet power supply source is not compatible with
Meridian digital telephones.
The AC source must be rated at 29 Vac, 700 mA isolated. The DC source
must be rated at 42 Vdc, 300 mA isolated, with current limiting output of 1
amp.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 335 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
352
Chapter 16 — M5317 BRI Terminal
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Environmental considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Humidity . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Electromagnetic emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Atmospheric pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Terminal powering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Line engineering . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Powering alternatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Restricted powering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Voltage range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Local power supply requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Designated function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 336 of 544 M5317 BRI Terminal
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Programmable function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Automatic dial keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
LCD Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Handsfree/Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Data and headset option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Dial access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Telephone programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Service Profile Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
BootROM operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Configuration mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Setup mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Self test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Error code displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Data LTID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Local voice features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Auto PDN select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Autonumber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
List incoming callers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Handset muting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Handsfree/Mute (speakerphone or headset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Volume . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Predial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Number editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Local generation and cadencing of alerting tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Call timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
M5317 BRI Terminal Page 337 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Date and time-of-day clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Data transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Introduction
The M5317TX and M5317TDX BRI Terminals are for use in North America.
The CustomNet ISDN Handset is the same telephone without NI-1 Signaling
or Meridian 1 voice operation, and is for use in Australia.
M5317TDX telephones and CustomNet ISDN Handsets are connected to the
ISDN BRI (Basic Rate Interface) Service at the “S” (or “T”) interface. The
M5317TX and M5317TDX are identical except the M5317TDX has the Data
Option installed on it.
Meridian Feature Transparency (MFT), National ISDN-1 Signaling (NI-1),
and Meridian 1 (Mer1) protocols are supported for voice. Circuit-switched
data is only supported in NI-1 Signaling.
A-law or µ-law Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) voice capability is supported
on either the B1 or the B2 channel.
Circuit-switched data calls are supported using T-link or V.120 protocol, and
packet-switched data calls are supported using X.25 (D-channel) protocol.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 338 of 544 M5317 BRI Terminal
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Physical description
Dimensions
The M5317T telephones have these dimensions:
Weight
Excluding the handset, cords, and any packaging, the M5317TX or the
M5317TDX weigh approximately 1000 grams (2.2 lbs).
Environmental considerations
Temperature
Humidity
length 226.5 mm (9 in.)
width 272.0 mm (10.7 in.)
height (front) 27.5 mm (1.1 in.)
height (rear) 73.5 mm (2.9 in.)
in operation in storage
0° to 50°C (32° to 122°F) -20° to 66°C (-4° to 150°F)
in operation in storage
5% to 95% non-condensing,
from 0° to 29°C (32° to 84°F)
-20° to 66°C (-4° to 150°F)
Equivalent to 34% at 50°C
(122°F) non-condensing from
30°C to 50°C (86°F to 122°F)
Equivalent to 15% at 66°C (150°F)
non-condensing from 29° to 66°C (84°
to 150°F)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
M5317 BRI Terminal Page 339 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Electromagnetic emissions
The M5317T telephones are specified to comply with the limits for Class A,
Subpart J of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC), Part 15 and
Class B, CSA C108.8, CISPR22 Class B (AS 3548).
Atmospheric pollution
Each M5317T telephone is designed to withstand normal atmospheric
conditions throughout its life and during shipment. It meets exposure tests for
salt, mist, atmospheric dust, sulfur dioxide and hydrogen sulfide as defined in
IEC document 50.
Terminal powering
Line engineering
The telephones will operate to their full potential through twisted pair wiring.
Powering alternatives
The telephones are powered through the RJ connectors and the line cord.
They may be powered from one of the following sources:
• PS1, phantom power conducted over the “T” line card or the NT1
• PS2, auxiliary DC power conducted over a third pair in the line cord
(may be provided independently of the NT1 or line card)
• Local DC power conducted over a third pair from a power pack
(connected by means of an RJ-45 plug connector with the DC power
terminated on its pin 7 (PS2-) and pin 8 (PS2+) inserted into one of the
wall-mounted RJ sockets.
A dip switch (switch A), accessible through a small hatch in the base of the
telephone housing, must be set to select between the phantom powering (PS1)
or powering provided by a third pair (PS2 or local AC).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 340 of 544 M5317 BRI Terminal
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Restricted powering
A second dip switch (switch B), in the same location and accessible through
the same access hatch as switch A must be set to determine whether the
telephone accepts restricted powering from PS1 or PS2. As a rule, only one
telephone on a loop is designated for restricted powering and is named the
“designated” telephone. When an NT1 or line card reverses the polarity of the
PS1 or PS2 power output while operating from backup batteries, only a
“designated telephone” continues to operate.
Power consumption
The normal standby mode power consumption indicated below depends on
deactivating the S/T-loop (not currently supported).
Operating Mode M5317TX M5317TDX
Normal active 1.2.2W 1.5W
Normal standby 200mW 250mW
Voltage range
The following are the operating limits when attached to an S/T-loop:
24 V - Minimum DC input voltage at the line cord when the loop is full loaded
(PS2)
56.5 V - Maximum DC input voltage at the line cord when the loop is not
loaded (PS2)
Local power supply requirements
The following values apply to sealed plug-in AC transformers with rectified
DC output, used for local power supply from a wall-outlet directly at the
working location of the telephone.
Australia
Minimum AC voltage at outlet: 200 V rms
Maximum AC voltage at outlet: 280 V rms
Average maximum AC current required: 50 mA
AC supply frequency: 50 Hz
Minimum transformer output voltage: 24 V DC
Maximum transformer output voltage: 34 V DC
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
M5317 BRI Terminal Page 341 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
North America
Minimum AC voltage at outlet: 97 V rms
Maximum AC voltage at outlet: 132 V rms
Average maximum AC current required: 100 mA
AC supply frequency: 60 Hz
Minimum transformer output voltage: 24 V DC
Maximum transformer output voltage: 34 V DC
Features
Display
The 155 x 15 mm (6 x 0.6 in.) alphanumeric LCD assembly has a display
capacity of two 40-character lines. In NI-1 and Meridian 1 modes, the first
line usually displays date and time (during the idle state only), incoming call
identification, connection information, feature icons, user prompts, and
messages.
Figure 50
Display icons (enlarged view)
The second line displays the context-dependent softkey functions
(8 characters per key, including spaces) in accordance with the state of the
terminal, whenever applicable. If there are more than five choices available,
a more... softkey is shown. The softkey labels always give the currently valid
commands and features. Pressing that softkey displays additional labels
available for the accessed telephony state.
If MFT mode is used, both lines of the LCD may be used for call information.
Displays are defined by the switch software, and may vary between software
loads. In BCS34, the idle display is blank, and at other times call progress
information is displayed on both lines.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 342 of 544 M5317 BRI Terminal
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Softkeys
In NI-1 mode, the softkey labels display functions only for local and network
features that have been datafilled. The available functions may vary from
telephone to telephone and, consequently, a softkey label may be displayed
in different locations at different times on different sets. Refer to the User
guides for examples and detailed explanations of the functioning of the
various softkey features.
In NI-1 mode, the following features are supported on softkeys:
• Call Forward
• Call Park
• Call Pickup (group)
• Executive Busy Override
• Make Set Busy
• Privacy Release/Privacy
• Ring Again/Call Back Queuing
• Three-Way Call (Flexible Calling)
• Call Transfer
In Meridian 1 mode, this feature is supported on softkeys:
• Calling Line ID Presentation/Calling Line ID Restriction
Designated function keys
There are 15 designated function keys, each with a fixed function assigned.
They consist of:
• 12 dial pad keys
• 1 Release (Rls) key
• 1 Hold key
• 1 Volume Control key (with 2 toggle positions and center press function)
The assignment of these keys is different depending on whether MFT,
Meridian 1 or NI-1 is being used.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
M5317 BRI Terminal Page 343 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Programmable function keys
Keys 2 to 11 for NI-1 and Meridian 1, and keys 2 to 10 for MFT, may be
assigned varying functions depending on the network datafill.
Figure 51
Key layout
Automatic dial keys
In NI-1 and Meridian 1 modes, frequently-used numbers can be stored by
programmable keys defined as local automatic dial keys. Any programmable
function key that isn't programmed can be used as an automatic dial key.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 344 of 544 M5317 BRI Terminal
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Any number stored is retained, and the stored numbers are not affected by a
power failure. The call to a stored directory number is made by pressing the
programmed key.
LCD Indicators
All of the programmable function keys have liquid crystal display indicators
beside them.
Table 102
Key status indicator
Indicator Description
Off Off
On Off
Slow flashing 60 ipm*: 1/2 on, 1/2 off
Fast flashing 120 ipm*: 2/3 on, 1/3 off
* Impulses per minute
Table 103
Normal DNs in all signaling modes
Indicator Meaning
Off Feature or line is not active
On Feature or line is active
Slow flashing Line is ringing
Fast flashing Line is on hold or feature is being pro-
grammed
* Impulses per minute
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
M5317 BRI Terminal Page 345 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Handsfree/Mute
A microphone and speaker are built in to permit Handsfree/Mute operation.
Table 104
Shared DNs
Indicator Meaning
Slow flashing Line is ringing
Fast flashing On hold (retrieval allowed by other DN members)
Fast flashing In “talking” state (bridging allowed by other DN mem-
bers
On In “talking” state (no bridging or retrieval allowed by
other DN members)
On Feature or line is active
* In MFT mode, “talking” state (no bridging or retrieval allowed by other DN
members) the state is On.
Table 105
Features (such as Speed Call)
Indicator Description
Off Feature or line is not active
On Feature or line is active
Fast flashing Feature is being programmed
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 346 of 544 M5317 BRI Terminal
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Data and headset option
An optional feature card (factory or field installed) permits the use of circuit
and packet switched data by way of an RS-232C connector at the rear of the
telephone, which allows connection of a personal computer (PC) terminal;
the card also allows an appropriate headset to be used instead of the built-in
Handsfree/Mute speakerphone. Field installation requires opening the
telephone, which should only be done by an experienced installer. The data
option serves as a DCE (Data Communications Equipment), using either a
subset of the Hayes Smartmodem protocol or an X.25 PAD using X.3, X.28,
X.29 protocols. The RS-232C data port may also be configured to provide
control of the telephone for system test purposes.
Dial access
Any available dialed code access features may be used. Special screens or
softkeys are not associated with them. The following are examples of dialed
code access features:
• Directed Call Pickup
• Directed Call Park
• Authorization Code Entry
• Call Request
• Loudspeaker Paging
• Dictation Access and Control
Power
Power for the M5317T telephones is always supplied through the line cord.
The telephones can be configured for either designated (continued service
during local power failures) or non-designated (no service during local power
failures) operation.
Power may be provided from PS1 or PS2 source output of NT1 interface, or
can be provided locally from a sealed alternating current (AC) plug-in
transformer with direct current (DC) output.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
M5317 BRI Terminal Page 347 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Servicing
Except for the insertion or removal of the data and headset option circuit
board, as noted above, it is not necessary to open the telephone case for field
servicing purposes. The telephone line cord and the handset cord are both
equipped with TELADAPT connectors at both ends, permitting quick
replacement where required. A hatch is provided for access to the dip
switches to permit the selection of the appropriate power supply and of the
“designated” telephone status.
Telephone programming
Service Profile Management
In NI-1 mode, information related to the programmable keys may be loaded
into the M5317T memory from the Integrated Services Digital Line Card
(ISDC) at the switch. This feature loading process will be performed on
request. Currently, only DMS central offices support this service.
Accessibility of features depends on subscription at the switch, and softkeys
for features not subscribed are removed from the display. Not all features
need be provided in every case. Service change routines permit addition or
deletion of features. If no feature loading takes place, the telephone must be
configured manually. Do not confuse this feature loading with the overall
firmware downloading. The information is stored so that it is not lost when
the power is removed.
In MFT mode, there is no equivalent process required because the protocol is
much simpler. There is no such process for Meridian 1 mode because no
optional features are provided.
Downloading
Firmware in the M5317TDX can be replaced by downloading from a server.
This procedure is usually only required to customize the firmware, or to make
additional features available.
BootROM operation
If downloading fails, or if the user selects it, control from the Main firmware
is replaced by a simpler version called the Boot ROM firmware. This allows
basic voice call operation until successful downloading is achieved.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 348 of 544 M5317 BRI Terminal
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Configuration mode
This feature is intended for installers and sophisticated users and is
interlocked with power-on and a special key sequence. Some menus are:
• TEI assignment voice, circuit-switched data, and packet-switched X.25
data (no default, but retained if power lost). X.25 TEI can only be static;
the others must be dynamic.
• Service Identifier Profile (SPID) assignment for voice and circuit-
switched data, not required for packet-switching. (no default, but
retained if power is lost.)
• DN assignment for circuit-switched and packet-switched data
• Test: analog and digital
• Selection of Codec coding law
• Selection of voice and circuit-switched data signaling protocol
Setup mode
Setup mode is intended for use by all M5317T digital telephone users. In NI-
1 and Meridian 1 mode, press Setup to display the Setup menu. In MFT mode,
press the center of the volume key to access Setup. The Setup menu includes:
• alerting tone style and cadence (NI-1 and Meridian 1 mode only)
• default volume for handset/headset, alerting tones, and speakerphone
(NI-1 and Meridian 1 mode only)
• query features enabled and DNs (NI-1 and Meridian 1 mode only)
• Service Profile Management (SPM). Enter the four-digit password
“5317” to display an SPM softkey.
• various data options (baud rate, parity, etc.)
• protocol version
• contrast adjustment
• language
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
M5317 BRI Terminal Page 349 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Self test
During power-up, the M5317T tests many internal components and displays
error codes if the test fails at any point. These codes are used in manufacturing
testing only.
Error code displays
NI-1 and Meridian 1 modes only. (During startup, there are error codes in
MFT too. During normal operation, there are no error codes on the idle
display, but they can be accessed as described earlier for Setup mode.)
When errors are detected by the telephone, an error code replaces the normal
date and time in the right-hand upper corner of the display.
Data LTID
For NI-1 and MFT mode, data LTID (Logical Terminal Identifier) must be
BRAFS (Basic Rate Access: Functional Signaling). For MFT mode, you must
set the bearer capability for the selected circuit. Voice may be BRAFS or
BRAMFT (Basic Rate Access: Meridian Feature Transparency), depending
on features and service required.
Note: Basic Rate Access is now called Basic Rate Interface (BRI).
Local voice features
Local features are provided by the phone internally with minor intervention
by the switch. They are purely local in nature, or they deal with the switch on
the basis of dialed digits and ringing lines, and hold and release keys. The
following are brief descriptions of local features provided by the M5317T.
Auto PDN select
NI-1 and Meridian 1 modes only. This feature automatically selects the Prime
Directory Number (PDN) when the user goes off-hook, dials using the Saved
Number feature, or uses certain other features such as Call Pickup or Call
Park Retrieve, in the idle state. The user is prompted with Select free line if
the PDN is not idle.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 350 of 544 M5317 BRI Terminal
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Autonumber
NI-1 and Meridian 1 mode only. This feature accepts a telephone number if
an autonumber is assigned to any definable key that is not already defined as
a call activator or a feature key. After the number is assigned, pressing the key
causes the stored number to be dialed as if it came from the dial pad.
Note: In NI-1 mode, this feature may be used to program any number,
such as a call forward number. If the telephone is idle and the PDN is not
in use, then the PDN is automatically selected when the autoline key is
pressed.
List incoming callers
NI-1 and Meridian 1 modes only. This feature provides the following
functions:
• Records the origination address of all incoming calls to the PDN, along
with the date and time of the call.
• Multiple calls from the same caller ID will show only once.
• Ten (10) entries are saved, in chronological order, with the oldest entry
being removed to make room for a new entry when the list is filled to
capacity.
• The user may dial directly from the list.
• The user may edit numbers in the list to make them suitable, before
dialing (for example, adding a “9” prefix).
Handset muting
With this feature, the handset is muted when on-hook.
Handsfree/Mute (speakerphone or headset)
This feature provides microphone muting, controlled by definable keys.
Handsfree and mute functions are defined differently for NI-1, MFT, and
Meridian 1. Speakerphone, handset, and headset operations, are also
provided. The speakerphone is automatically disabled when a headset is
plugged into the Teladapt connector at the rear of the telephone.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
M5317 BRI Terminal Page 351 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
The headset and handset may be used simultaneously. When the
speakerphone is being used, going off-hook transfers the speech path to the
handset. When the handset is being used, operating the Handsfree key
switches the speech path to the speakerphone.
Note: The Plantronics Supra (Model MH0530-1), ACS Ultralight with
intra-concha earpiece (Model NWMP), and the Plantronics Starset
(Model MH0230-1) are headsets which are compatible with either the
M5317T telephone.
Volume
This feature provides independent adjustment for the speakerphone, alerting
tones, and the headset and handset. Volume settings are retained during
power failure.
Contrast
This feature provides display contrast adjustment. The setting is retained
during power failure.
Predial
NI-1 and Meridian 1 modes only. This feature permits numbers to be entered
and edited before selecting a line.
Number editing
NI-1 and Meridian 1 modes only. This feature permits the user, whenever
applicable, to edit displayed numbers before completing an operation (for
example, Call Forward programming).
Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) generation
NI-1 and Meridian 1 modes only. This feature is provided whenever a B-
channel is connected and used to control devices such as pagers and
mechanized credit card systems. In MFT mode, DTMF is provided by the
switch.
Local generation and cadencing of alerting tones
NI-1 and Meridian 1 modes only. This does not apply to MFT mode, because
only the buzz is generated locally and the other tones are generated by the
switch.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 352 of 544 M5317 BRI Terminal
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Call timers
NI-1 and Meridian 1 modes only. Call timers are provided as follows:
• There is one timer for each call appearance, including non-directory
number (DN) call appearances.
• Timers run when associated call appearances are connected or held.
• Timers may be manually reset by the user.
• Timers start automatically after 10 seconds if a call-connect message is
not received (non-ISDN or off-net calls).
• Timers start (or reset) when the called number answers.
Date and time-of-day clock
NI-1 and Meridian 1 modes only. This feature displays the time in 12-hour
format. If power fails, the date and time must be reset.
Data transmission
The M5317T telephones support PCM voice on either B-channel. Circuit-
switched data calls on the M5317TDX may be made using the other B-
channel. The NT T-link or standard V.120 protocols are used to convert the
serial data from the RS-232C port to the 64 Kbit/sec stream (rate adaption)
for transmission on the B-channel.
The M5317TDX Data Option is logically separate from voice calls. The
Hayes protocol is used to control circuit-switched data calls, and X.25 packet-
switched calls on D-channel are supported with X.3, X.28, X.29 control
protocol.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 353 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
364
Chapter 17 — M2250 Attendant Console
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Reference List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Physical details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Keyboard layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Display screen messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Local console controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Reference List
The following are the references in this section:
• Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics Module User Guide
Introduction
Attendant consoles are designed to assist in placing and extending calls into
and out of a telephone switching system. The console is operated by an
attendant as the human interface between the system and the users.
Special attendant consoles are designed for telephone traffic control in the
Option 11C. They provide attendants with a number of unique features which
increase the speed and ease of call processing.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 354 of 544 M2250 Attendant Console
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
This document describes the M2250 attendant console. The M2250 is driven
and powered by a digital line card.
Description
Features
The M2250 has the following features:
• A four-line, 40 character, liquid crystal display (LCD) with backlighting
and adjustable viewing angle. Power, including backlighting, is
maintained during building power failures through the system battery
backup, if equipped.
• In shift mode, the M2250 can have up to 20 TGB keys.
• Up to 10 extra flexible feature keys (total of 20) in shift mode
• An optional supporting stand that can be adjusted to nine different
positions.
• A handset and headset volume adjustment slider control, situated below
the dial pad.
• A physical connection to a serial data port through a subminiature D-type
female connector on the console back wall. This permits connection of
the console to the serial port of a personal computer.
• An optional Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics Module (BLF/CGM),
which displays the status of up to 150 consecutive extensions (SBLF) or
any group of 100 extensions within the system (EBLF), and has many
text and graphics capabilities.
• The M2250 provides for transmission level adjustment to meet
international requirements by accepting and processing downloaded
information from the system (when this messaging is supported in
software). The transmission level can be adjusted to one of 16 different
levels.
• Angle adjustment of the display screen, which can be tilted through 90°
from horizontal to fully vertical.
• Scrolling control of lines 2 and 3 of the display screen
• Multi-language selection
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
M2250 Attendant Console Page 355 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
• Menus for local console features (options menu) and diagnostics
(diagnostics menu)
• Code-blue or emergency relay (associated with ICI 0)
• Time and date system download
• Alert tone volume and frequency selection
• Electret or carbon transmitter support
• Power Fail Transfer switch
• Keyclick
Figure 53 on page 359 shows the top view of the layout of the attendant
console with the user-accessible components labeled using a row/column grid
arrangement. Figure 54 on page 361 shows rear, left-hand side, and bottom
views of the console. These illustrations show you where to find the various
components as you read this chapter.
Physical details
The attendant console dimensions are as follows:
Keyboard layout
Refer to Figure 53 on page 359and Table 106 for the location of keys and
switches.
Function keys
There are eight function keys on the attendant console, located directly below
the display screen. Refer to Table 106 on page 357 for the positions,
functions, and markings of these keys
Width 425 mm (16.75 in.)
Depth 245 mm (9.6 in.)
Height (front) 25 mm (1 in.)
Height (back) 65 mm (2.5 in.)
Height (with display screen panel up) 115 mm (4.5 in.)
Weight approximately 2.75 kg (6 lbs)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 356 of 544 M2250 Attendant Console
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Figure 52
M2250 attendant console, top view
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
M2250 Attendant Console Page 357 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Table 106
Function key definitions and functions (Part 1 of 2)
Key number
(as shown in
Figure 53)
Key Function of key
(1)
Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) or
History Feature key (The History feature is
not available in North America)
(2)
Prime function:
Position Busy feature
Level 1 function (normal):
Night Service feature
(3)
Function key 1 (F1)
Prime function (normal):
Selects display screen line 2 for scrolling.
Level 1 function (Shift):
Selects the Options menu on the display
screen.
(4)
Function key 2 (F2)
Prime function (normal):
Scrolls the currently selected line to the left
Level 1 function (Shift):
Decreases the alert speaker volume.
C/H
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 358 of 544 M2250 Attendant Console
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Key number
(as shown in
Figure 53)
Key Function of key
(5)
Function key 3 (F3)
Prime function (normal):
Scrolls the currently selected line to the
right
Level 1 function (Shift):
Increases the alert speaker volume.
Refer also to Tables 37 and 38.
(6)
Function key 4 (F4)
Prime function (normal):
Selects display screen line 3 for scrolling.
Level 1 function (Shift):
Selects the Diagnostics menu on the
display screen (On the M2250 console, the
Diagnostics menu is password-protected.
The user must first enter a 4-digit password
and press * before the Diagnostics menu is
displayed)
(7)
Prime function (normal):
Signal Source feature key
Level 1 function (Shift):
Used with the Busy Lamp Field/Console
Graphics Module, as CGM key.
(8)
Prime function (normal):
Signal Destination feature key
Level 1 function (Shift):
Used with the Busy Lamp Field/Console
Graphics Module, as the Mode key.
Note: Keys are numbered for identification purposes from 1 to 8 (left to right).
Table 106
Function key definitions and functions (Part 2 of 2)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
M2250 Attendant Console Page 359 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Figure 53
M2250 attendant console—top view
Switches
A slider switch, located in the bottom row of keys, between columns DI/EI
and FI (see Figure 53), controls the handset and headset receive volume level.
The Power Fail Transfer (PFT) switch is located in the baseplate. Both the
line connector and the RS-232 connector for the PC port are located at the
back of the attendant console.
Shift key
The shift key, mentioned earlier, is positioned in column FK, row 1, just
above the Hold key. It is used to access Level 1 mode functions.
Handset and headset jacks
Two jack-pairs are provided for plugging in handsets or headsets. The jacks
are located on both sides of the console beneath the faceplate in the recessed
area shown by the arrows. The console accepts both carbon and electret
headsets and automatically adapts itself to each type.
Note: Electret headsets and handsets are polarity sensitive and must be
correctly inserted into the jack.
LCD indicators
The LCD indicators used on the M2250 are half-diamond shaped symbols
which normally point towards the key with which they are associated, except
in the QMT2 mode of operation and the loop keys where there are two LCDs
associated with each key.
Every LCD can flash at 30, 60, and 120 impulses per minute (ipm).
Display screen messages
The following messages may appear on the display screen:
• Source and destination information (line 2 and line 3 respectively)
• MN(minor alarm)
• MJ (major alarm)
• C/H(CAS/History File)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 360 of 544 M2250 Attendant Console
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
• CW(Call Waiting)
• BUSY(Position Busy)
• NIGHT(Night Service)
• IDLE(Idle)
• ACTIVE(lpk has been selected)
• S (Shift mode)
The first four status messages appear as MN, MJ, C/H, and CW on line 4 of
the display screen panel. BUSY and NIGHT are combined with the status of
the Release lamp to indicate the console status as shown in Table .
If the emergency power fail transfer feature is activated, the console status
will be displayed as EMERGENCY.
Table 107
Release lamp indicator status
QCW-type Indicator Status Display screen status (line 4)
Night Busy Release
ON X X NIGHT
OFF ON X BUSY
OFF OFF ON IDLE
OFF OFF OFF ACTIVE
X X X EMERGENCY
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
M2250 Attendant Console Page 361 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Figure 54
M2250 attendant console—rear, left side, and bottom views
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 362 of 544 M2250 Attendant Console
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Connections
The line cord connects to the rear of the attendant console through a 25-pin
subminiature D-type connector. The jack connector is attached to the line
cord for user safety and equipment protection (pins are not exposed). Having
the plug connector mounted in the console also prevents interchanges
between the line cord and the serial data port connectors (the serial data port
in the console has a jack connector).
A two-prong G3 type connector is provided on both sides of the console body
to permit handset or headset connection at either side of the console. The
attendant console is compatible with both carbon and electret handsets. The
electret handset plug is orientation-dependent and is labeled accordingly.
The M2250 attendant console is connected to the system through two TCM
loops (primary and secondary) with two additional units for powering. Two
additional units may be used for long line loop powering.
The M2250 console requires a Digital Line Card (DLC).
Local console controls
The display screen contrast on the attendant console can be adjusted using the
Contrast option on the Options menu.
The pitch and volume of the buzz tone on the console can be adjusted by the
user.
You can choose any one of eight languages (English, French, Spanish,
German, Italian, Norwegian, Gaelic, or Turkish) for the console screen
displays.
The attendant console is equipped with a real time clock/calendar. The time
of day (hours, minutes, and seconds) and the date (day, month, and year) are
displayed on line 1 of the display screen.
The user can turn the sound of key click on or off. On the M2250, the user can
adjust the pitch and volume of the key click.
Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics Module
The Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics Module (BLF/CGM) can be added
to an M2250 attendant console.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
M2250 Attendant Console Page 363 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
The BLF/CGM can:
• display the status (busy or idle) of up to 150 consecutive extensions
within the system (SBLF)
• display the status of any hundreds group of DNs within the system
(EBLF)
• display which attendant console is the supervisory console, and which
consoles are active
• display supplementary information about individual extensions, such as
the reason the person is away (business, vacation, or illness), when the
person is due to return, and an alternate extension where calls to the
person should be directed
• display a company logo
• display graphics
• display text in any one of eight languages
• have its screen contrast adjusted for easy viewing
Installation
The BLF/CGM mounts on the back of the attendant console and is held on
using snapfits and two screws. It is connected to the console using a 15-way
connector that is located on the keyboard printed circuit board (PCB). This
connector is accessed through a rectangular knockout section located
underneath the casing overhang at the Meridian logo location (see Figure 54).
For more information on the features and operation of the BLF/CGM, refer
to the Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics Module User Guide.
Power requirements
The BLF/CGM obtains its power through the attendant console.
An external floating 16 V DC (300 mA) power supply (transformer—
A0367601) must be cabled in at the local cross-connect terminal at a
maximum of 115 ft. (35 m) from the attendant console when the BLF/CGM
is installed. This provides backlighting for the BLF/CGM.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 364 of 544 M2250 Attendant Console
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 365 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
370
Chapter 18 — NT8D02 and NTDK16
Digital Line Cards
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Physical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Functional description of the NT8D02 . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Functional description of the NTDK16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Technical summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Foreign and surge voltage protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Description
The Digital Line Card is a voice and data communication link between the
system and Meridian Digital Telephones. It supports voice only or
simultaneous voice and data service over a single twisted pair of standard
telephone wiring.
When a digital telephone is equipped with the data option, an asynchronous
or synchronous terminal or personal computer can be connected to the system
through the digital telephone.
In Option 11C systems the NT8D02 Digital Line Card is installed in slots 1
through 10 of the main cabinet, or in slots 11 through 50 in the Expansion
cabinets. In Option 11C Mini, the NT8D02 DLC can be installed in slots 1 to
3 in the main chassis, or in slots 7 to 10 in the chassis expander.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 366 of 544 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line Cards
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
The NTDK16 is a 48 port card supported only in the Option 11C Mini. It is
based on the NT8D02 Digital Line Card, it is functionally equivalent to three
NT8D02s, and configured as cards 4, 5, and 6 in the main chassis. It uses A94
Digital Line Interface chips (DLIC) to provide the interface between the
Digital sets and the Option 11C Mini system.
In Option 11C Mini systems the NTDK16 Digital Line Card can only be
installed in slot 4 of the main chassis which is slotted to prevent accidental
insertion of other cards.
Physical
The digital line card circuitry is contained on a 320 mm (12.5 in.) by
254 mm (10 in.) printed circuit board (PCB). The NT8D02 is a double-sided
PCB, whereas the NTDK16 is 4 layers, but standard thickness. Both cards
connect to the backplane through a 120-pin or 160-pin edge connector.
The faceplate of the NTDK16BA digital line card is equipped with three light
emitting diodes (LEDs). A red LED lights when the card is disabled. At
power-up, this LED flashes as the digital line card runs a self-test. If the test
completes successfully, the card is automatically enabled (if it is configured
in software) and the LED goes out. This LED only shows the status of the
NTDK16 in slot 4.
Note: The NTDK16AA has one LED. This LED shows the status of
Card 4. The NTDK16BA has three LEDs. These LEDs show the status
of Cards 4, 5, and 6 configured on the NTDK16.
Functional description of the NT8D02
The digital line card is equipped with 16 identical units. Each unit provides a
multiplexed voice, data, and signaling path to and from digital apparatus over
a 2-wire full duplex 512 kHz time compression multiplexed (TCM) digital
link. Each digital telephone and associated data terminal is assigned a
separate terminal number (TN) in the system database, for a total of 32
addressable ports per card.
The digital line card contains a microprocessor that provides the following
functions:
• self-identification
• self-test
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line Cards Page 367 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
• control of card operation
• status report to the controller
• maintenance diagnostics
Functional description of the NTDK16
The NTDK16 digital line card is equipped with 48 identical units. Each unit
provides a multiplexed voice, data, and signaling path to and from digital
apparatus over a 2-wire full duplex 512 kHz time compression multiplexed
(TCM) digital link. Each digital telephone and associated data terminal is
assigned a separate terminal number (TN) in the system database, for a total
of 96 addressable ports per card. Refer to Figure 55 on page 368.
The NTDK16 digital line card contains a microprocessor that provides the
following functions:
• self-identification
• self-test
• control of card operation
• status report to the controller
• maintenance diagnostics
The card also provides
• Ability to support Digital sets and the Digital Console M2250
• Provides a serial link (Card LAN) for status report and maintenance.
• Supports loop lengths up to 3500 ft. (1.0 km) using 24 AWG wire.
• Interface between three DS30X loops and 48 TCM lines.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 368 of 544 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line Cards
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Figure 55
NTDK16 DLC
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line Cards Page 369 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Technical summary
Table 108 provides a technical summary of the digital line cards.
Table 108
NT8D02/NTDK16 Digital Line Card technical summary
Characteristics
NT8D02 DLC
description
NTDK16BA DLC
description
NTDK16AA DLC
description
Units per card
16 voice, 16 data 48 voice, 48 data 48 voice, 48 data
Impedance
100 Ohm j/b ohm 100 Ohm j/b ohm 100 Ohm j/b ohm
Loop limits
30 m (100 ft) to 915
m (3000 ft) with 24
AWG PVC cable
(+15 V DC at 80 mA)
30 m (100 ft) to 915
m (3000 ft) with 24
AWG PVC cable
(+15 V DC at 80 mA)
30 m (100 ft) to 915
m (3000 ft) with 24
AWG PVC cable
(+15 V DC at 80 mA)
0 to 1070 m (3500 ft)
with 24 AWG PVC
cable (+15 V DC at
80 mA)
0 to 1070 m (3500 ft)
with 24 AWG PVC
cable (+15 V DC at
80 mA)
0 to 1070 m (3500 ft)
with 24 AWG PVC
cable (+15 V DC at
80 mA)
Line rate
512 kbps + 100 ppm 512 kbps + 100 ppm 512 kbps + 100 ppm
Power supply
+ 5 V DC
+15 V DC
+10 V DC
+ 5 V DC
+15 V DC
+ 5 V DC
+15 V DC
+8 V DC
Transmitter output
voltage:
• successive “1”
bits
+1.5 + 0.15 V and -
1.5 + 0.15 V
• “0” bits
0 + 50 mV
Additional circuitry
Not applicable Not applicable Power Failure Trans-
fer Control Ring
Sync.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 370 of 544 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line Cards
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Power requirements
The digital line card needs +15V DC over each loop at a maximum current of
80 mA. It requires +15V, -15V, and +5V from the backplane. The line feed
interface can supply power to one loop of varying length up to 1070 m
(3500 ft) using 24 AWG wire with a maximum allowable AC signal loss of
15.5 dB at 256 kHz, and a maximum DC loop resistance of 210 ohms;
26 AWG wire is limited to 745 m (2450 ft).
Foreign and surge voltage protections
In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning is not provided on
the Digital line card.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 371 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
376
Chapter 19 — NT8D09 Analog Message
Waiting Line Card
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Physical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Functional . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Technical summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Analog line interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Foreign and surge voltage protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Overload level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Description
The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card (µ-Law) provides talk
battery and signaling for regular 2-wire common battery 500-type (rotary
dial) and 2500-type (Digitone dial) telephones and key telephone equipment.
The analog message waiting line card is functionally identical to the NT8D03
Analog Line Card, except that it can also connect a high-voltage, low-current
feed to each line to light the message waiting lamp on telephones equipped
with the Message Waiting feature.
The analog message waiting line card will support 56K modem operation.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 372 of 544 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
The analog message waiting line card interfaces to and is compatible with the
equipment listed in Table 109.
Physical
In Meridian 1 Option 11C systems the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting
Line Card is installed in slots 1 through 10 of the Main cabinet, or in slots 11
through 50 in the Expansion cabinets. In Option 11C Mini, the card is
installed in slots 1 to 3 in the main chassis, or 7 to 10 in the chassis expander.
The line card circuits connects to the backplane through a 160-pin connector.
The backplane is cabled to a connector in the bottom of the cabinet which is
cabled to the cross-connect terminal (main distribution frame) through 25-
pair cables. Station apparatus then connects to the card at the cross-connect
terminal.
The faceplate of the analog message waiting line card is equipped with a red
light emitting diode (LED) which lights when the card is disabled. At power-
up, the LED flashes as the analog line card runs a self-test. If the test
completes successfully, the card is automatically enabled (if it is configured
in software) and the LED goes out.
Table 109
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card application and compatibility
Equipment Specifications
500 type rotary dial sets (or equivalent):
dial speed 8.0 to 12.5 pps
percent break 58 to 70%
interdigital time 150 ms
2500 type Digitone sets (or equivalent):
frequency accuracy + 1.5%
pulse duration 40 ms
interdigital time 40 ms
speed 12.5 digits/s
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card Page 373 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Functional
The analog message waiting line card contains a microprocessor that provides
the following functions:
• self-identification
• self-test
• control of card operation
• status report to the controller
• maintenance diagnostics
The analog message waiting line card also provides:
• 600-ohm balanced terminating impedance
• analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion of transmission and
reception signals for 16 audio phone lines
• transmission and reception of scan and signaling device (SSD) signaling
messages over a DS30X signaling channel in A10 format
• on-hook/off-hook status and switchhook flash detection
• 20-Hz ringing signal connection and automatic disconnection when the
station goes off-hook
• synchronization for connecting and disconnecting the ringing signal to
zero crossing of ringing voltage
• loopback of SSD messages and pulse code modulation (PCM) signals for
diagnostic purposes
• correct initialization of all features at power-up
• direct reporting of digit dialed (500-type telephones) by collecting dial
pulses
• connection of -150 V DC at 1 Hz to activate message waiting lamps
• lamp status detection
• disabling and enabling of selected units for maintenance
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 374 of 544 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Technical summary
Analog line interface
Input impedance
The impedance at tip and ring is 600 ohms with a return loss of:
• 20 dB for 200-500 Hz
• 26 dB for 500-3400 Hz
Insertion loss
On a station line-to-line connection, the total insertion loss at 1 kHz is
6 dB + 1 dB. This is arranged as 3.5 dB loss for analog to PCM, and 2.5 dB
loss for PCM to analog.
Frequency response
The loss values in Table 110 are measured relative to the loss at 1 kHz.
Message channel noise
The message channel noise C-weighted (dBrnC) on 95 percent of the
connections (line to line) with both ends terminated in 600 ohms does not
exceed 20 dBrnC.
Table 110
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card frequency response
Frequency Minimum Maximum
60 Hz 20.0 dB --
200 Hz 0.0 dB 5.0 dB
300 Hz -0.5 dB 1.0 dB
3000 Hz -0.5 dB 1.0 dB
3200 Hz -0.5 dB 1.5 dB
3400 Hz 0.0 dB 3.0 dB
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card Page 375 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Table 111 provides a technical summary of the analog message waiting line
card.
Table 111
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card technical summary
Impedance 600 ohms
Loop limit (excluding set) 1000 ohms at nominal -48 V (excluding set)
Leakage resistance 30,000 ohms
Ring trip During silent or ringing intervals
Ringing voltage 86 V AC
Signaling Loop start
Supervision Normal battery conditions are continuously applied (approxi-
mately -44.5 V on ring and
-2.5 V on tip at nominal -48 V battery)
Power input from backplane -48 (can be as low as -42 for DC-powered systems), +15, -
15, +8.5 V and ringing voltage; also -150 V on analog mes-
sage waiting line card.
Insertion loss 6 dB + 1 dB at 1020 Hz
3.5 dB loss for analog to PCM,
2.5 dB loss for PCM to analog
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 376 of 544 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Power requirements
Table provides the power requirements for the analog message waiting line
card.
Foreign and surge voltage protections
In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning is not provided on
the Analog Message Waiting line card. When the Analog line card is used to
service off-premise telephones, the NTAK92 Off-premise protection module
must be used. Check local regulations before providing such service.
Overload level
Signal levels exceeding +7 dBm applied to the tip and ring cause distortion in
speech transmission.
Table 112
Power requirements
Voltage
(+/-)
Tolerance
Idle
current
Active
current
Max
+ 12.0 V DC 0.36 V DC 48 mA 0 mA 48 mA
+ 8.0 V DC 0.40 V DC 150 mA 8 mA 280 mA
- 48.0 V DC 2.00 V DC 48 mA 40 mA 688 mA
- 48.0 V DC 5.00 V DC 0 mA 10 mA
(Note 1)
320 mA
86.0 V AC 5.00 V AC 0 mA 10 mA
(Note 2)
160 mA
-150.0 V DC 3.00 V DC 0 mA 2 mA 32 mA
Note 1: Each active ringing relay requires 10 mA of battery voltage.
Note 2: Reflects the current for ringing a single station set. There may be as many as five ringers on each
line.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 377 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
388
Chapter 20 — NT8D14 Universal Trunk
Card
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Trunk types supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Microprocessor . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Signaling and control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Signaling interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Electrical characteristics . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Physical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Environmental specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Foreign and surge voltage protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Release control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
PAD switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Loop start operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Ground start operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Direct Inward Dial operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Tie Two-way Dial Repeating operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Tie Outgoing Automatic Incoming Dial operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 378 of 544 NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Recorded Announcement operation . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Paging operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Functional description
The Universal Trunk Card:
• allows trunk type to be configured on a per unit basis
• indicates status during an automatic or manual self-test
• provides card-identification for auto configuration, and to determine the
serial number and firmware level of the card
• converts transmission signals from analog-to-digital/digital-to-analog
• operates in A-Law or µ-Law companding modes on a per unit basis
• provides software selected terminating impedance (600, 900, or 1200
ohm) on a per unit basis (1200 ohm supported for RAN trunks only)
• provides software selected balance impedance (600 ohm or complex
impedance network) on a per unit basis
• interfaces eight PCM signals to one DS-30X timeslot in A10 format
• transmits and receives SSD signaling messages over a DS-30X signaling
channel in A10 format
• supports PCM signal loopback to DS-30X for diagnostic purposes.
Trunk types supported
The Universal Trunk Card has eight identical units. You configure the trunk
type of each unit independently in the Trunk Data Block (LD 14). The card
supports the following types of trunks:
• Central Office (CO), Foreign Exchange (FX), and Wide Area Telephone
Service (WATS)
• Direct Inward Dial (DID) and Direct Outward Dial (DOD)
• Tie Two-way Dial Repeating (DR) and Two-way Outgoing Automatic
Incoming Dial (OAID)
• Paging (PAG)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card Page 379 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Note: All-call zone paging is not supported.
• Recorded Announcement (RAN).
The Universal Trunk Card also supports Music, Automatic Wake Up, and
Direct Inward System Access (DISA).
Table 113 is a matrix of the trunk types and signaling supported by the
Universal Trunk Card.
Microprocessor
The Universal Trunk Card is equipped with a microprocessor which controls
card operation. The microprocessor also provides the communication
function for the card.
The Universal Trunk Card communicates with the Controller Card through a
serial communication link. Features provided through the link include:
• card-identification
• self-test status reporting
• status reporting to the Controller Card
• maintenance diagnostics
Table 113
Supported trunk type and signaling matrix
CO/FX
WATS
DID/
DOD
Tie PAG RAN
Loop start yes no no no no
Ground start yes no no no no
Loop dial repeat-
ing
no yes yes no no
Loop OAID no no yes no no
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 380 of 544 NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Signaling and control
The signaling and control portion of the Universal Trunk Card works with the
CPU to operate the card hardware. The card receives messages from the CPU
over a signaling channel in the DS-30X loop and returns status information to
the CPU over the same channel. The signaling and control portion of the card
provides the means for analog loop terminations to establish, supervise, and
take down call connections.
Signaling interface
All trunk signaling messages are three bytes long. The messages are
transmitted in channel zero of the DS-30X in A10 format.
Configuration information for the Universal Trunk Card is downloaded from
the CPU at power-up or by command from maintenance programs. Eleven
configuration messages are sent. Three messages are sent to the card to
configure the make/break ratio and A-Law or µ-Law operation. One message
is sent to each unit to configure the trunk characteristics.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card Page 381 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Electrical characteristics
Electrical characteristics of the Universal Trunk Card are listed in Table 114.
Physical characteristics
In Meridian 1 Option 11C systems the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card is
installed in slots 1 through 10 of the Main cabinet, or in slots 11 through 50
in the Expansion cabinets.
In Option 11C systems equipped with Meridian Mail, the Universal Trunk
card cannot be installed in slot 10 of the main cabinet.
Table 114
Universal Trunk Card electrical characteristics
Characteristic DID trunk CO trunk
Terminal impedance 600 or 900 ohms (selected by
software)
600 or 900 ohms (selected by
software)
Signaling range 2450 ohms 1700 ohms
Signaling type Loop start Ground or loop start
Far end battery - 42 to - 52.5 V - 42 to - 52.5 V
Near end battery N/A - 42.75 to - 52.5 V
Minimum loop current N/A 20 mA
Ground potential difference + 3 V + 3 V
Low DC loop resistance
during outpulsing
N/A < 300 ohms
High DC loop resistance N/A Ground start equal to or
greater than 30 kohms; loop
start equal to or greater than
5 Mohms
Line leakage Equal to or greater than
30 kohms (tip to ring, tip to
ground, ring to ground)
Equal to or greater than 30
kohms (tip to ring, tip to
ground, ring to ground)
Effective loss See“PAD switching” on
page 383
See“PAD switching” on
page 383
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 382 of 544 NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
When the card is installed, the red Light Emitting Diode (LED) on the
faceplate flashes as the self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully,
the card is automatically enabled (if it is configured in software) and the LED
goes out. If the self-test fails, the LED lights steadily and remains lit. The
LED will also light and remain lit if one or more units on the card becomes
disabled after the card is operating.
Each unit on the card connects to the backplane through an 80-pin connector,
the backplane is cabled to the Input/Output (I/O) panel, and the I/O panel is
cabled to the cross-connect terminal.
At the cross-connect terminal, each unit connects to external apparatus, such
as Central Office facilities or recorded announcement equipment. Each unit
connects to external apparatus by tip and ring leads which carry voice,
ringing, tone signaling, and battery.
Power requirements
Power requirements for the Universal Trunk Card are specified in Table 115.
Table 115
Power requirements
Voltage Tolerance Idle current Active current
± 15.0 V DC ± 5% 306 ma 306 ma
+ 8.5 V DC ± 2% 120 ma 120 ma
- 48.0 V DC ± 5% 346 ma 346 ma
+ 5.0 V DC ± 10% 350 ma 350 ma
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card Page 383 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Environmental specifications
Table 116 lists the environmental specifications for the Universal Trunk
Card.
Foreign and surge voltage protection
The Universal Trunk Card meets CS03 overvoltage (power cross)
specifications.
Release control
Release control establishes which end of a call (near, far, either, joint, or
originating) disconnects the call. Only incoming trunks in idle ground start
configuration can provide disconnect supervision. You configure release
control for each trunk independently in the Route Data Block (LD 16).
PAD switching
The transmission properties of each trunk are characterized by the class-of-
service (COS) you assign in the Trunk Data Block (LD 14). Transmission
properties may be via net loss (VNL) or non via net loss (non-VNL).
Non-VNL trunks are assigned either a Transmission Compensated (TRC) or
Non-Transmission Compensated (NTC) class-of-service to ensure stability
and minimize echo when connecting to long-haul trunks, such as Tie trunks.
The class-of-service determines the operation of the switchable PADs
contained in each unit. They are assigned as follows:
• Transmission Compensated
— used for a two-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of greater
than 2 dB for which impedance compensation is provided
Table 116
Environmental specifications
Parameter Specifications
Operating temperature 0 to 50 degrees C, ambient
Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Storage temperature - 40 to + 70 degrees C
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 384 of 544 NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
— or used for a four-wire non-VNL facility
• Non-Transmission Compensated
— used for a two-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of less than
2 dB
— or used when impedance compensation is not provided
Table shows PAD settings and the resulting port-to-port loss for connections
between the Universal Trunk Card (UTC) and any other Intelligent Peripheral
Equipment (IPE) or Peripheral Equipment (PE) unit, denoted as Port B
In Option 11C systems, the insertion loss from IPE ports to IPE ports is as
follows.
Table 117
Insertion Loss from IPE Ports to IPE Ports (measured in dB)
IPE Ports
IPE Ports
500/2500
Line

Digital
Line
2/4 Wire
E&M Trunk
4 Wire
(ESN) E&M
Trunk
CO/FX
/WATS
Loop Tie
Trunk
CO/FX/
WATSLoop
Tie Trunk
2.5
0
0
-3.5
0.5
0
0
-0.5
0.5
0.5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card Page 385 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Application
The optional applications, features, and signaling arrangements for each
trunk are assigned through unique route and trunk data blocks.
Loop start operation
Loop start operation is configured in software and is implemented in the card
through software download messages. When the Universal Trunk is idle, it
provides a high impedance toward the CO for isolation and AC detection. The
alerting signal is 20 Hz ringing sent by North American CO. When an
incoming call is answered, ringing is tripped when the trunk places a low
resistance DC loop towards the CO.
For outgoing calls from a telephone set or attendant console, software sends
an outgoing seizure message to place a low resistance loop across the tip and
ring leads towards the CO. When the CO is ready to receive digits, it returns
dial tone. The outward address signaling is applied from the system in the
form of DTMF tones or dial pulses.
Ground start operation
Ground start operation is configured in software and implemented through
software download messages. In an idle state, the tip conductor from the CO
is open and a high resistance negative battery is present on the tip of the trunk.
This biases the tip ground detector OFF until the CO places ground on the tip
at seizure. After the tip ground is detected, the Universal Trunk Card scans
for a ringing detection signal before presenting the call to an attendant and
tripping the ringing. A low resistance is placed across the tip and ring
conductors and a speech path is established.
Direct Inward Dial operation
An incoming call from the CO places a low resistance loop across the tip and
ring leads. Dial pulses or DTMF signals are then presented from the CO.
When the call is presented and the terminating party answers, the Universal
Trunk Card reverses battery and ground on the tip and ring leads to the CO.
The trunk is arranged for first party release. The CO releases the trunk by
removing the low resistance loop and normal battery and ground are restored
at the system.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 386 of 544 NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Tie Two-way Dial Repeating operation
In an incoming call configuration, the far end initiates a call by placing a low
resistance loop across the tip and ring leads. This causes a current to flow
through the battery feed resistors in the trunk circuit. Address signaling is
then applied by the far end in the form of DTMF tones or dial pulses. When
the called party answers, an answer supervision signal is sent by software,
causing the trunk to reverse battery and ground signals to the far end. The far
end then removes the low resistance loop and normal battery and ground are
restored at the system.
In an outgoing call configuration, the Universal Trunk is connected to another
PBX by a Tie trunk. An outgoing call from the system seizes the trunk facility
by placing a low resistance loop across the tip and ring leads. Outward
addressing is then applied from the system in the form of DTMF tones or dial
pulses (battery/ground pulsing). If answer supervision is provided by the far
end, reverse battery is received, which provides a disconnect supervision
signal.
Tie Outgoing Automatic Incoming Dial operation
When the Universal Trunk is seized by the far end on an incoming call, a low
resistance loop is placed across the tip and ring leads. Dial pulses are sent by
the far end by interrupting the loop current. The trunk is released at the far end
when the loop is opened. When it detects an open loop, the near end reverts
to a normal state.
When seized as a dial-selected outgoing trunk, the Universal Trunk places
battery on the tip and ground on the ring. This alerts the far end of the seizure.
The far end responds with a low resistance across the tip and ring leads.
Recorded Announcement operation
In this mode of operation, the Universal Trunk is connected to a digital
announcement machine. The announcer provides a number of channels and
operates in a continuous mode, generating 150-300 ms common control
pulses every 7 or 14 seconds (at the start of the announcement period). A
number of trunks can be connected to one announcement machine.
The Universal Trunk Card does not support the Code-A-Phone 210DC
announcement recorder.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card Page 387 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Paging operation
In the Paging mode, the Universal Trunk is connected to a customer-provided
paging amplifier system. When the trunk is accessed by dial-up or attendant
key operation, it provides a loop closure across control leads A and B. In a
typical application, this will transfer the input of the paging amplifier system
to the transmission path of the trunk.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 388 of 544 NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 389 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
398
Chapter 21 — NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Reference List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Common features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Trunk circuit features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Signaling and control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Microprocessor . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Signaling interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Card-LAN . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Electrical characteristics . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Physical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Release Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
PAD Switching . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Paging trunk operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Technical summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Environmental specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Foreign and surge voltage protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 390 of 544 NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Reference List
The following are the references in this section:
• Features and Services (553-3001-306)
• Administration (553-3001-311)
General information
This chapter outlines the characteristics, application and operation of the
NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card. The information is intended to be used as a guide
when connecting customer-provided apparatus to the trunk circuit.
NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card has four identical trunk circuits. Each circuit can
be configured independently by software control. The trunk circuits on the
card support the following types of trunks:
• two-wire E & M type I signaling trunks (non-ESN)
• two-wire dial repeating trunks
• two or four wire tie trunks
• four-wire E & M type I and II signaling type II trunks
(ESN and Non-ESN applications)
• Paging (PAG)
Type I signaling (as on the two-wire E & M trunk) utilizes two signaling
wires plus ground. Type II signaling utilizes tow pairs of signaling wires and
is used by most electronic switching systems.
Table shows a matrix of the trunk types and signaling supported by the
NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card.
Table 118
Supported trunk and signaling matrix
Signaling
RLM
RLR
ATV TIE PAG
CSA
CAA
CAM
2-wire E & M yes yes yes yes yes
4-wire E & M yes yes yes yes yes
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card Page 391 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Functional description
The NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card serves various transmission requirements.
The trunk circuits on the card can operate in either A or µ-Law companding
modes. The mode of operation is set by service change entries.
Common features
The following features are common to all circuits on the NT8D15 E&M
Trunk Card:
• Analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion of transmission
signals
• Interfaces each of the four PCM signals to one DS30X timeslot in A10
format
• Transmit and receive SSD signaling messages over a DS30X signaling
channel in A10 format
• Ability to enable and disable individual ports or the entire card under
software control
• Provides outpulsing on the card. Make break ratios are defined in
software and down loaded at power up and by software commands.
• Provides indication of card status from self-test diagnostics on faceplate
Light Emitting Diode (LED)
• Supports loopback of PCM signals to DS30X for diagnostic purposes
• Card ID provided for auto configuration and determining serial number
and firmware level of card
• Software controlled terminating impedance (600, 900, or 1200 ohm) two
and four-wire modes
• Allows trunk type to be configured on a per port basis in software
• Software controlled 600 ohm balance impedance is provided.
• isolation of foreign potentials from transmission and signaling circuit
• Software control of A/mu law mode
• Software control of digit collection
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 392 of 544 NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Trunk circuit features
The following features in addition to those previously listed are provided by
each circuit:
• Two-wire E & M type I signaling (Non-ESN)
— Near-end seizure and outpulsing with M lead
— Ground detection with E lead
— Voice transmission through Tip and Ring for transmit and receive
• Four-wire E & M signaling type I and II, two-way dial repeating (ESN
and Non-ESN)
— echo suppression for type I
— Switchable seven dB and 16 dB for carrier interface for ESN
applications
— Transmit and receive of voice through two separate paths
• Type I signaling through E & M leads
— Type II signaling
– Near-end seizure with MA/MB leads
– Far-end detection with EA/EB leads
• Paging trunk loop OAID operation
— Support access by low resistance path at the PA/PB lead.
— All call zone paging is not supported.
• Two to four-wire conversion of the transmission path
Signaling and control
The signaling and control portion of the trunk card works with the CPU to
operate the card hardware. The card receives messages from the CPU over a
signaling channel in the DS30X loop and returns status information to the
CPU over the same channel. The signaling and control portion of the card
provides the means for analog loop terminations to establish, supervise and
take down call connections.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card Page 393 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
The signaling and control operation of the card performs many functions
which are handled by different functional units. Some of the functions of the
signaling and control portion of the E & M card are:
• Communications between the card and the CPU
• Monitor signals from the trunk interface and generate a message when
required for each state change
• Decode received messages and activate/deactivate configuration and
interface relays PCM loopback for diagnostic purposes
• Disable and enable units for maintenance
• Drive Light Emitting Diode (LED) on faceplate
• Decode outpulsing messages (one per digit) from the CPU to drive
outpulsing relays
— Make break ratios (20pps, 10pp1, 10pps2) are downloaded by
software.
• Control of A/mu-law operation
Microprocessor
The E & M trunk has a microprocessor which performs a number of
operations. On power up a self test of the circuitry on the card is performed.
The self-test can also be requested by a command entered in maintenance
programs. The card faceplate Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is lit while the self
test is performed. If the self test passes, the faceplate LED flashes three times
and stays lit until the card is enabled in software. If the test fails, the LED
stays lit (does not flash).
Signaling interface
All signaling messages for the trunk are three bytes long. The messages are
transmitted in channel zero of the DS30X in A10 format.
Configuration information for the E & M trunk is downloaded from the CPU
at power up and by command from maintenance programs. Seven
configuration messages are sent. One message is sent to each unit (4) to
configure trunk type, signaling type, balance impedance etc. Three messages
are sent per card to configure the make/break ratio, A/mu-Law operation.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 394 of 544 NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Card-LAN
The Card Lan interface supports maintenance functions. The following list of
features are provided by the Card Lan:
• Polling form the Peripheral Controller
• Enable disable of the DS30X link
• Card status reporting
• Self-test status reporting
• Card ID
• Report configuration data
• Report of the firmware version
The Card Lan communicates through a serial communication link between
the trunk card and the Peripheral Controller. The microprocessor provides the
Card Lan function for the E & M Trunk.
Electrical characteristics
The electrical characteristics of all trunk circuits are provided in Table 119.
Table 119
Electrical characteristics (Part 1 of 2)
Characteristic DID Trunk CO trunk
Nominal impedance 600 or 900 ohms, (selected
by software)
600 or 900 ohms, (selected
by software)
Signaling range 2450 ohms 1700 ohms
Signaling type Loop Ground or loop start
Far-end battery -42 to -52.5 V -42 to -52.5 V
Near-end battery N/A -42.75 to -52.5 V
Minimum loop current N/A 20 mA
Ground potential difference + 10 V + 3 V
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card Page 395 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Physical characteristics
In Option 11C systems the NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card is installed in slots 1
through 10 of the Main cabinet, or in slots 11 through 50 of the Expansion
cabinets.
In Option 11C systems equipped with Meridian Mail, the Universal Trunk
line card cannot be installed in slot 10 of the main cabinet.
Each card provides four circuits. Each circuit connects with the switching
system and with the external apparatus by an 80-pin connector at the rear of
the pack.
Each trunk circuit on the card connects to trunk facilities by tip an ring leads
which carry voice, ringing, tone signaling and battery. Trunk option selection
is determined by software control in LD 14.
Application
The optional applications, features and signaling arrangements for each trunk
are assigned through unique route and trunk data blocks. Refer to the
Features and Services (553-3001-306) for information about assigning
features and services to trunks.
Low DC loop resistance dur-
ing outpulsing
N/A 300 ohms
High DC loop resistance N/A Ground start equal to or
greater than 30 kS. Loop start
equal to or greater than 5 MS
Line leakage Equal to or greater than 30
kS (Tip to Ring, Tip to GND,
Ring to GND).
Equal to or greater than 30
kS (Tip to Ring, Tip to GND,
Ring to GND)
Effective loss See pad table See pad table
Table 119
Electrical characteristics (Part 2 of 2)
Characteristic DID Trunk CO trunk
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 396 of 544 NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Release Control
Release control of a call made over a trunk is specified in the route data block
(LD 16). Disconnect supervision is specified for each trunk group
independently.
Only incoming trunks in idle ground start configuration can provide
disconnect supervision. For a list of prompts and responses and default
conditions see the Administration (553-3001-311).
PAD Switching
The transmission properties of each trunk are characterized by class-of-
service (COS) assignments in the trunk data block (LD 14). The assignment
may be non-Via Net Loss (non-VNL) or via Net Loss (VNL). To ensure
stability and minimize echo when connecting to long-haul VNL (Tie) trunks,
non-VNL trunks are assigned either Transmission Compensated (TRC) or
Non-Transmission Compensated (NTC) class-of-service.
The TRC and NTC COS options determine the operation of the switchable
pads contained in the trunk circuits. They are assigned as follows:
• TRC for a two-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of greater than
2 dB or for which impedance compensation is provided, or for a four-
wire non-VNL facility.
• NTC for a two-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of less than 2 dB
or when impedance compensation is not provided.
In Option 11C systems, Table 120 on page 397 shows the insertion loss from
IPE port to IPE port.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card Page 397 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Table 120
Insertion Loss from IPE Ports to IPE Ports (measured in dB)
Paging trunk operation
When used in the Paging mode the trunk circuit is connected to a customer-
provided paging amplifier system. When the trunk is accessed by dial up or
attendant key operation, it provides a loop closure across control leads A and
B. In a typical application this will transfer the input of the paging amplifier
system to the transmission path of the Trunk.
IPE Ports
IPE Ports
500/2500
Line
Digital
Line
2/4 Wire
E&M Trunk
4 Wire
(ESN) E&M
Trunk
CO/FX
/WATS
Loop Tie
Trunk
2/4 Wire
E&M Trunk
6
3
3.5
-0.5
1
1
4 Wire
(ESN) E&M
Trunk
5.5
2.5
3
-1
0.5
0.5
0
0
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 398 of 544 NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Technical summary
Power requirements
Power requirements for the NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card are specified in
Table 121.
Environmental specifications
Environmental specifications are provided in Table 122.
Foreign and surge voltage protection
The E & M trunk circuit meets CS03 over voltage (power cross)
specifications.
Table 121
Power requirements
Voltage Tolerance
Idle
Current
Active
Current
+/- 15.0 V DC +/- 5% 200mA 200 mA
+ 8.5 V DC +/- 2% 200 mA 200 mA
- 48.0 V DC +/- 5% 415 mA 415 mA
+5.0 V DC N/A N/A N/A
Table 122
Environmental specifications
Parameter Specifications
Operating temperature 0-50 degrees C, ambient
Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH (non condensing)
Storage temperature -40 to +70 degrees C
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 399 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
408
Chapter 22 — NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
MFC signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Signaling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Forward and backward signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
MFE signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Sender and receiver mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
XMFC sender and receiver specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
XMFE sender and receiver specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Overview
The XMFC/MFE (Extended Multi-frequency Compelled/Multi-frequency
sender-receiver) card is used to set up calls between two trunks. Connections
may be between a PBX and a CO or between two PBXs. When connection
has been established, the XMFC/MFE card sends and receives pairs of
frequencies and then drops out of the call.
The XMFC/MFE card can operate in systems using either A-law or µ-law
companding by changing the setting in software.
MFC signaling
The MFC feature allows the Option 11C system to use the CCITT MFC R2
or L1 signaling protocols.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 400 of 544 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Signaling levels
MFC signaling uses pairs of frequencies to represent digits, and is divided
into two levels:
Level 1: used when a call is first established and may be used to send the
dialed digits.
Level 2: used after Level 1 signaling is completed and may contain such
information as the status, capabilities, or classifications of both calling
parties.
Forward and backward signals
When one NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card sends a pair of frequencies to a
receiving XMFC/MFE card (forward signaling), the receiving XMFC/MFE
card must respond by sending a different set of frequencies back to the
originating XMFC/MFE card (backward signaling). In other words, the
receiving card is always “compelled” to respond to the originating card.
In summary, the signaling works as follows:
• The first XMFC/MFE card sends a forward signal to the second card.
• The second card hears the forward signal and replies with a backward
signal.
• The first card hears the backward signal and “turns off” its forward
signal.
• The second card hears the forward signal being removed and removes its
backward signal.
• The first XMFC/MFE can either send a second signal or drop out of the
call.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Page 401 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
MFC signaling involves two or more levels of forward signals and two or
more levels of backward signals. Separate sets of frequencies are used for
forward and backward signals:
• Forward signals. Level I forward signals are dialed address digits that
identify the called party. Subsequent levels of forward signals describe
the category (Class of Service) of the calling party, and may include the
calling party status and identity.
• Backward signals. Level I backward signals (designated “A”) respond
to Level I forward signals. Subsequent levels of backward signals (B, C,
and so on) describe the status of the called party.
Table 123 on page 401 lists the frequency values used for forward and
backward signals.
Table 123
MFC Frequency values (Part 1 of 2)
Digit
Forward direction
DOD-Tx, DID-Rx
backward direction
DOD-Rx, DID-Tx
1 1380 Hz + 1500 Hz 1140 Hz + 1020 Hz
2 1380 Hz + 1620 Hz 1140 Hz + 900 Hz
3 1500 Hz + 1620 Hz 1020 Hz + 900 Hz
4 1380 Hz + 1740 Hz 1140 Hz + 780 Hz
5 1500 Hz + 1740 Hz 1020 Hz + 780 Hz
6 1620 Hz + 1740 Hz 900 Hz + 780 Hz
7 1380 Hz + 1860 Hz 1140 Hz + 660 Hz
8 1500 Hz + 1860 Hz 1020 Hz + 660 Hz
9 1620 Hz + 1860 Hz 900 Hz + 660 Hz
10 1740 Hz + 1860 Hz 780 Hz + 660 Hz
11 1380 Hz + 1980 Hz 1140 Hz + 540 Hz
12 1500 Hz + 1980 Hz 1020 Hz + 540 Hz
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 402 of 544 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
The exact meaning of each MFC signal number (1-15) within each level can
be programmed separately for each trunk route using MFC. This
programming can be done by the customer and allows users to suit the needs
of each MFC-equipped trunk route.
Each MFC-equipped trunk route is associated with a data block that contains
the MFC signal functions supported for that route. Up to 127 such tables can
be defined for an Option 11C system.
MFE signaling
The NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card can be programmed for MFE signaling
which is used mainly in France. MFE is much the same as MFC except it has
its own set of forward and backward signals.
13 1620 Hz + 1980 Hz 900 Hz + 540 Hz
14 1740 Hz + 1980 Hz 780 Hz + 540 Hz
15 1860 Hz + 1980 Hz 660 Hz + 540 Hz
Table 123
MFC Frequency values (Part 2 of 2)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Page 403 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Table 124 on page 403lists the forward and backward frequencies for MFE.
The one backward signal for MFE is referred to as the “control” frequency.
Sender and receiver mode
The XMFC/MFE circuit card provides the interface between the Option 11C
CPU and the trunk circuit which uses MFC or MFE signaling.
The XMFC/MFE circuit card transmits and receives forward and backward
signals simultaneously on two channels. Each channel is programmed like a
peripheral circuit card unit, with its own sending and receiving timeslots in
the Meridian network.
Table 124
MFE Frequency values
Digit
Forward direction
OG-Tx, IC-Rx
Backward direction
1 700 Hz + 900 Hz 1900 Hz
(Control Frequency)
2 700 Hz + 1100 Hz —
3 900 Hz + 1100 Hz —
4 700 Hz + 1300 Hz —
5 900 Hz + 1300 Hz —
6 1100 Hz + 1300 Hz —
7 700 Hz + 1500 Hz —
8 900 Hz + 1500 Hz —
9 1100 Hz + 1500 Hz —
10 1300 Hz + 1500 Hz —
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 404 of 544 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Receive mode
When in receive mode, the XMFC/MFE card is linked to the trunk card by a
PCM speech path over the Meridian network cards. MFC signals coming in
over the trunks are relayed to the XMFC/MFE card as though they were
speech. The XMFC/MFC card interprets each tone pair and sends the
information to the CPU through the CPU bus.
Send mode
When in send mode, the CPU sends data to the XMFC/MFE card through the
CPU bus. The CPU tells the XMFC/MFE card which tone pairs to send and
the XMFC/MFE card generates the required tones and sends them to the trunk
over the PCM network speech path. The trunk transmits the tones to the far
end.
XMFC sender and receiver specifications
Tables 125 and Table 126provide the operating requirements for the
NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card. These specifications conform to CCITT R2
recommendations: Q.441, Q.442, Q.451, Q.454, and Q.455.
Table 125
XMFC sender specifications
Forward frequencies in DOD mode: 1380, 1500, 1620, 1740, 1860, 1980 Hz
Backward frequencies in DOD mode: 1140, 1020, 900, 780, 660, 540 Hz
Frequency tolerance: +/- 0.5 Hz from nominal
Power level at each frequency: Selectable: 1 of 16 levels
Level difference between frequencies: < 0.5 dB
Harmonic Distortion and Intermodulation 37 dB below level of 1 signaling frequency
Time interval between start of 2 tones: 125 usec.
Time interval between stop of 2 tones: 125 usec.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Page 405 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Table 126
XMFC receiver specifications
Input sensitivity:
accepted:
rejected:
-5 to -31.5 dBmO New CCITT spec.
-38.5 dBmO Blue Book
Bandwidth twist:
accepted:
rejected:
fc +/- 10 Hz
fc +/- 60 Hz
Amplitude twist:
accepted:
Norwegian requirement
rejected:
difference of 5 dB between adjacent frequencies
difference of 7 dB between non-adjacent frequencies
difference of 12 dB (for unloaded CO trunks)
difference of 20 dB between any two frequencies
Operating time: < 32 msec.
Release time: < 32 msec.
Tone Interrupt no release: < 8 msec. Receiver on, while tone missing
Longest Input tone ignored: < 8 msec. Combination of valid frequencies
Noise rejection: S/N > 18 dB No degradation, in band white noise
S/N > 13 dB Out-of-band disturbances for CCITT
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 406 of 544 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
XMFE sender and receiver specifications
Tables 127 and Table 128 provide the operating requirements for the XMFC/
MFE card when it is configured as an XMFE card. These requirements
conform to French Socotel specifications ST/PAA/CLC/CER/692.
Table 127
XMFE sender specifications
Forward frequencies in OG mode: 700, 900, 1100, 1300, 1500 Hz
Forward frequencies in IC mode: 1900 Hz
Frequency tolerance: +/- 0.25% from nominal
Power level at each frequency: Selectable: 1 of 16 levels
Level tolerance: +/- 1.0 dB
Harmonic Distortion and Intermodulation: 35 dB below level of 1 signaling frequency
Time interval between start of 2 tones: 125 usec.
Time interval between stop of 2 tones: 125 usec.
Table 128
XMFE receiver specifications (Part 1 of 2)
Input sensitivity:
accepted:
rejected:
rejected:
rejected:
-4 dBm to -35 dBm +/- 10 Hz of nominal
-42 dBm signals
-4 dBm outside 500-1900 Hz
-40 dBm single/multiple sine wave in 500-1900 Hz
Bandwidth:
accepted: fc +/- 20 Hz
Amplitude twist:
accepted: difference of 9 dB between frequency pair
Operating time: < 64 msec.
Release time: < 64 msec.
Tone Interrupt causing no
release: < 8 msec. Receiver on, tone missing
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Page 407 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Physical specifications
The following Table 129 outlines the physical specifications of the NT5K21
XMFC/MFE circuit card.
Longest Input tone ignored: < 8 msec. Combination of valid frequencies
Longest control tone ignored: < 15 msec. Control Frequency only
Noise rejection: S/N > 18 dB No degradation in-band white noise
Table 129
Physical specifications
Dimensions Height:12.5 in. (320 mm)
Depth:10.0 in. (255 mm)
Thickness:7/8 in. (22.25 mm)
Faceplate LED Lit when the circuit card is disabled
Cabinet Location Must be placed in the main cabinet
(Slots 1-10)
Power requirements 1.1 Amps typical
Environmental considerations Meets the environment of Meridian 1 systems
Table 128
XMFE receiver specifications (Part 2 of 2)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 408 of 544 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 409 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
414
Chapter 23 — NTAG26 XMFR card
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
MF signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Signaling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
XMFR receiver specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Overview
The XMFR (Extended Multi-frequency receiver) card is used to receive MF
digit information. Connections are made between a PBX and a CO. The
XMFR card can only operate in systems using µ-law companding.
MF signaling
The MF feature allows the Option 11C system to receive digits for 911 or
feature group D applications.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 410 of 544 NTAG26 XMFR card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Signaling levels
MF signaling uses pairs of frequencies to represent digits.
The following table lists the frequency values used for received signals.
Table 130
MF frequency values
Digit
Backward direction
DOD-Tx, DID-Rx
1 700 Hz + 900 Hz
2 700 HZ + 1100 Hz
3 900 Hz + 1100 Hz
4 700 Hz + 1300 Hz
5 900 Hz + 1300 Hz
6 1100 Hz + 1300 Hz
7 700 Hz + 1500 Hz
8 900 Hz +1500 Hz
9 1100 Hz + 1500 Hz
0 1300 Hz + 1500 Hz
KP 1100 Hz + 1700 Hz
ST 1500 Hz + 1700 Hz
STP(ST’) 900 Hz + 1700 Hz
ST2P(ST”) 1300 Hz + 1700 Hz
ST3P(ST”) 700 Hz + 1700 Hz
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTAG26 XMFR card Page 411 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
XMFR receiver specifications
Table 131 provides the operating requirements for the NTAG26 circuit card.
Table 131
XMFR receiver specifications (Part 1 of 3)
Coding: Mu-Law
Input sensitivity: must accept: 0 to -25 dBmO
must reject: -35 to dBmO
Frequency sensitivity: must accept: f +/- (1.5% + 5Hz)
Amplitude Twist: must accept: difference of 6dB between frequencies
Signal Duration: must accept: > 30 ms
must reject: < 10 ms
KP Signal Duration: must accept: > 55 ms
may accept: > 30 ms
must reject: < 10 ms
Signal Interruption Bridge: must ignore: < 10 ms
Time Shift between 2 frequencies:
(Envelop for start/stop)
must accept: < 4 ms
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 412 of 544 NTAG26 XMFR card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Coincidence between 2 frequencies: must reject: < 10 ms
Intersignal Pause: must accept: > 25 ms
Maximum Dialling Speed: must accept: 10 signals per second
Noise Rejection:
Error Rate in White Noise Better than: < 1/2500 calls
Test:
10 digit calls
nominal frequency @ -23 dBmO
ON/OFF = 50 ms/50ms
KP duration 100 ms
SNR = -20 dB
all digits
Immunity to Impulse Noise Better than: < 1/2500 calls
Test:
10 digit calls
nominal frequency @ -23 dBmO
ON/OFF = 50ms/50ms
KP duration 100 ms
SNR = -12 dBs
all digits
ATT Digit Simulation Test, Tape #201 from PUB
56201
Error Rate from Power Lines Better than: < 1/2500 calls
Test:
10 digit calls
nominal frequency @ -23 dBmO
ON/OFF = 50 ms/50ms
KP duration 100 ms
60 Hz signal @ 81 dBrnc0 (-9dBm)
or
180 Hz signal @ 68 dBrnco (-22dBm)
all digits
Table 131
XMFR receiver specifications (Part 2 of 3)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTAG26 XMFR card Page 413 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
The XMFR receiver specifications conform to the following:
• TR-NPL-000258, Compatibility Information for F.G.D. switched access
service, Bell Communication Research Technical Reference, Issue 1.0,
October 1985.
• TR-NPL-000275, Notes on the BOC Intra-LATA Networks, Bell
Communication Research Technical Reference, Chapter 6, 1986.
Physical specifications
The physical specifications required by the NTAG26 XMFR circuit card are
shown in Table 132:
Tolerate Intermodulation: Must tolerate @A-B and @B-A modulation products
with a power sum
28 dB below each frequency component level of the
signals.
KP:
KP activation The receiver must not respond to signals prior to KP.
Remain unlocked until ST, STP, ST2P or ST3P is
received.
Multiple KP’s After the initial KP, subsequent KP’s are ignored
while in unlocked mode.
Excessive Components: If more than two valid frequencies are detected, no
digit is reported to the SL-1 CPU.
Table 132
Physical specifications
Dimensions Height: 12.5 in. (320 mm)
Depth: 10.0 in. (255 mm)
Thickness: 7/8 in. (22.25 mm)
Faceplate LED Lit when the circuit card is disabled
Power requirements 1.1 Amps typical
Environmental considerations Meets the environment of Meridian 1 systems
Table 131
XMFR receiver specifications (Part 3 of 3)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 414 of 544 NTAG26 XMFR card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 415 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
418
Chapter 24 — NT6D70 SILC line card
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Reference List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Micro Controller Unit (MCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
IPE interface logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
S/T interface logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Foreign and surge voltage protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Reference List
The following are the references in this section:
• Option 11C ISDN BRI Hardware Installation and Maintenance (553-
3011-311)
Overview
The S/T Interface Line Cards (SILC) (NT6D70AA-48V North America,
NT6D70 BA -40 V International) provide eight S/T four-wire full duplex
interfaces that are used to connect ISDN BRI compatible terminals over DSLs
to the Meridian 1 system. A description of the ISDN BRI feature is contained
in Option 11C ISDN BRI Hardware Installation and Maintenance (553-
3011-311).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 416 of 544 NT6D70 SILC line card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Functional description
The SILC provides eight S/T four wire full duplex polarity sensitive
interfaces that are used to connect ISDN BRI compatible terminals over
Digital Subscriber Loops (DSL) to the Meridian 1. Each S/T interface
provides two B-channels and one D-channel and supports a maximum of
eight physical connections that can link up to 20 logical terminals on one
DSL.
A logical terminal is any terminal that can communicate with the Meridian 1
over a DSL. It may be directly connected to the DSL through its own physical
termination or be indirectly connected through a common physical
termination.
The length of a DSL depends on the specific terminal configuration and the
DSL wire gauge, however, it should not exceed 1 km (3,280 ft).
The SILC interface uses a 4 conductor cable that provides a differential
Transmit and Receive pair for each DSL. The SILC has options to provide a
total of 2 Watts of power on the Transmit or Receive leads, or no power at all.
When this power is supplied from the S/T interface, the terminal devices must
not draw more than the 2 Watts of power. Any power requirements beyond
this limit must be locally powered.
Other functions of the SILC are:
• support point-to-point and multi-point DSL terminal connections
• execute instructions received from the MISP to configure and control the
S/T interfaces
• provide channel mapping between ISDN BRI format (2B+D) and
Meridian 1 system bus format
• multiplexes 4 D-channels onto one timeslot
• perform activation and deactivation of DSLs
• provide loopback control of DSLs
• provide a reference clock to the clock controller
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NT6D70 SILC line card Page 417 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Micro Controller Unit (MCU)
The MCU coordinates and controls the operation of the SILC. It has internal
memory, a reset and sanity timer, and a serial control interface.
The memory consists of 32 K of EPROM which contains the SILC operating
program and 8 K of RAM used to store interface selection and other functions
connected with call activities.
The reset and sanity timer logic resets the MCU.
The serial control interface is an IPE bus used by the MPU to communicate
with the S/T transceivers.
IPE interface logic
The IPE interface logic consists of a Card-LAN interface, an IPE bus
interface, a maintenance signaling channel interface, a digital pad, and a clock
controller and converter.
The Card-LAN interface is used for routine card maintenance, which includes
polling the line cards to find in which card slot the SILC is installed. It also
queries the status and identification of the card, and reports the configuration
data and firmware version of the card.
The IPE bus interface connects one IPE bus loop that has 32 channels
operating at 64 kbps and one additional validation and signaling bit.
The maintenance signaling channel (MSC) interface is used to communicate
signaling and card identification information from the Meridian 1 CPU to the
SILC MCU. The signaling information also contains maintenance
instructions.
The digital pad provides gain or attenuation values to condition the level of
the digitized transmission signal according to the network loss plan. This sets
transmission levels for the B-channel circuit-switched voice calls.
The clock recovery circuit recovers the clock from the local exchange.
The clock converter converts the 5.12 MHz clock from the IPE backplane into
a 2.56 MHz clock to time the IPE bus channels and an 8 kHz clock to provide
PCM framing bits.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 418 of 544 NT6D70 SILC line card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
S/T interface logic
The S/T interface logic consists of a transceiver circuit and the DSL power
source. This interface supports DSLs of different distances and different
number and types of terminals.
The transceiver circuits provide four-wire full duplex S/T bus interface. This
bus supports multiple physical terminations on one DSL where each physical
termination supports multiple logical B-channel and D-channel ISDN BRI
terminals. Idle circuit-switched B-channels can be allocated for voice or data
transmission to terminals making calls on a DSL. When those terminals
become idle, the channels are automatically made available to other terminals
making calls on the same DSL.
The power on the DSL comes from the SILC, which accepts -48 V from the
IPE backplane and provides 2 watts of power to physical terminations on each
DSL. It provides -48 V for ANSI compliant ISDN BRI terminals and -40 V
for CCITT (such as ETSI NET-3, INS NET-64) compliant terminals. The
total power used by the terminals on each DSL must not exceed 2 watts.
Physical description
The NT6D70 SILC is a standard size circuit card designed to be inserted in
peripheral equipment slots in the Meridian 1. Its faceplate is equipped with an
LED to indicate its status.
Power consumption
Power consumption is +5V at 800 mA and -48V at 480 mA.
Foreign and surge voltage protections
In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning is not provided on
the SILC card. When the SILC card is used in TIE trunk applications in which
the cabling is exposed to outside plant conditions, an NT1 module certified
for such applications must be used. Check local regulations before providing
such service.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 419 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
422
Chapter 25 — NT6D71 UILC line card
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Reference List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Micro Controller Unit (MCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
IPE interface logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
U interface logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Reference List
The following are the references in this section:
• Option 11C ISDN BRI Hardware Installation and Maintenance (553-
3011-311)
Overview
The NT6D71 U Interface Line Card (UILC) supports the OSI physical layer
(layer 1) protocol. The UILC is an ANSI defined standard interface. The
UILC provides eight two-wire full duplex (not polarity sensitive) U interfaces
that are used to connect ISDN BRI compatible terminals over DSLs to the
Meridian 1. A description of the ISDN BRI feature is contained in Option
11C ISDN BRI Hardware Installation and Maintenance (553-3011-311).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 420 of 544 NT6D71 UILC line card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Functional description
Each U interface provides two B-channels and one D-Channel and supports
one physical termination. This termination may be to a Network Termination
(NT1) or directly to a single U interface terminal. Normally this physical
termination is to an NT1, which provides an S/T interface that allows up to 8
physical terminals to be connected. The length of a DSL depends on the
specific terminal configuration and the DSL wire gauge, however, it should
not exceed 5.5 km (3.3 mi).
The main functions of the UILC are:
• provide eight ISDN U interfaces conforming to ANSI standards
• support point-to-point DSL terminal connections
• provide channel mapping between ISDN BRI format (2B+D) and
Meridian 1 bus format
• multiplex 4 D-channels onto one timeslot
• perform activation and deactivation of DSLs
• provide loopback control of DSLs
Micro Controller Unit (MCU)
The MCU coordinates and controls the operation of the UILC. It has internal
memory, a reset and sanity timer, a serial control interface, a maintenance
signaling channel, and a digital pad.
The memory consists of 32 K of EPROM that contains the UILC operating
program and 8 K of RAM used to store interface selection and other functions
connected with call activities.
The reset and sanity timer logic resets the MCU.
The serial control interface is an IPE bus used to communicate with the U
transceivers.
IPE interface logic
The IPE interface logic consists of a Card-LAN interface, an IPE bus
interface, a maintenance signaling channel interface, a digital pad, and a clock
converter.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NT6D71 UILC line card Page 421 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
The CardLAN interface is used for routine card maintenance, which includes
polling the line cards to find in which card slot the UILC is installed. It also
queries the status and identification of the card, and reports the configuration
data and firmware version of the card.
The IPE bus interface connects one IPE bus loop that has 32 channels
operating at 64 kbps and one additional validation and signaling bit.
The Maintenance Signaling Channel (MSC) interface is used to communicate
signaling and card identification information from the Meridian 1 CPU to the
UILC MCU. The signaling information also contains maintenance
instructions.
The digital pad provides gain or attenuation values to condition the level of
the digitized transmission signal according to the network loss plan. This sets
transmission levels for the B-channel circuit-switched voice calls.
The clock converter converts the 5.12 MHz clock from the IPE backplane into
a 2.56 MHz clock to time the IPE bus channels and an 8 kHz clock to provide
PCM framing bits.
U interface logic
The U interface logic consists of a transceiver circuit. It provides loop
termination and high voltage protection to eliminate the external hazards on
the DSL. The U interface supports circuit-switched voice and data terminals,
D-channel packet data terminals, and NT1s. A UILC has eight transceivers to
support eight DSLs for point-to-point operation.
Physical description
The NT6D71 UILC is a standard size circuit card designed to be inserted in
peripheral equipment slots in the Meridian 1. Its faceplate is equipped with an
LED to indicate its status.
Power consumption
Power consumption is +5V at 1900 mA.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 422 of 544 NT6D71 UILC line card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 423 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
438
Chapter 26 — NT1R20 Off Premise
Station (OPS) analog line card
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Reference List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Card interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Card functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Incoming calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Outgoing calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Off-premise station application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Other applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Transmission considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Reference List
The following are the references in this section:
• Option 11C Planning and Installation (553-3021-210)
• Maintenance (553-3001-511)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 424 of 544 NT1R20 Off Premise Station (OPS) analog line card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Overview
The NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) Analog Line Card is an intelligent
peripheral equipment (IPE) device that can be installed in any IPE slot in the
main or expansion cabinets. The OPS analog line card connects eight analog
telephone lines to the Option 11C with secondary hazard and surge
protection.
Each unit is independently configured in software in the Single-line
Telephone Administration program (LD 10).
Physical description
The OPS card measures 31.75 by 25.40 cm (12.5 by 10 in.) It connects to the
IPE backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. A 25-pair amphenol
connector below the card is cabled to the cross connect terminal. Telephone
lines from station equipment cross connect to the OPS analog line card at the
cross connect using a wiring plan similar to trunk cards. (See the Option 11C
Planning and Installation (553-3021-210) for cross connect terminations).
Self Test
The faceplate of the card is equipped with a red, light-emitting diode (LED).
When an OPS analog line card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to five
seconds while the self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the
LED flashes (off/on) three times and remains lit until the card is configured
and enabled in software, then the LED goes out.
Functional description
This functional description of the NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line
Card is divided into two parts. First, a description of the card’s control,
signaling, and power interfaces is given, followed by a description of how the
card itself functions.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NT1R20 Off Premise Station (OPS) analog line card Page 425 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Card interfaces
Voice and signaling interfaces
The eight line interfaces provided by the OPS analog line card connect to
conventional, 2-wire (tip and ring), analog line facilities. Incoming analog
voice and signaling information from a line facility is converted by the OPS
analog line card to digital form and routed to the CPU over DS-30 network
loops. Conversely, digital voice and signaling information from the CPU is
sent over DS-30 network loops to the OPS analog line card where it is
converted to analog form and applied to the line facility.
The OPS analog line card uses only eight of the 30 available timeslots for its
eight line interfaces. The OPS analog line card can be configured in software
to format PCM data in the µ-law or A-law conventions.
Maintenance communications
Maintenance communications is the exchange of control and status data
between line or trunk cards and the CPU. Maintenance data is transported via
the card LAN link.
The card LAN link supports the following functions on the OPS analog line
card:
• polling
• reporting of self-test status
• CPU initiated card reset
• reporting of card ID (card type and hardware vintage)
• reporting of firmware version
• reporting of line interface unit configuration
• enabling/disabling of the DS-30X network loop busy
• reporting of card status
Power interface
Power is provided to the OPS circuit card by the NTAK78 AC/DC or
NTAK72 DC power supply.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 426 of 544 NT1R20 Off Premise Station (OPS) analog line card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Card functions
The following card functions are described in this section:
• Line interface units
• Card control functions
• Circuit power
• Software service changes
• Port-to-port loss configuration
Line interface units
The OPS analog line card contains eight independently configurable units.
Relays are provided in each unit to apply ringing onto the line. Signal
detection circuits monitor on-hook/off-hook signaling. Two codecs are
provided for performing A/D and D/A conversion of analog voiceband
signals to digital PCM signals.
Each codec supports four units and contains switchable pads for control of
transmission loss on a per unit basis. The following features are common to
all units on the card:
• OPS or ONS service configurable on a per unit basis
• terminating impedance (600 or 900 ohm) selectable on a per unit basis
• standard or complex balance impedance (600 or 900 ohm, 3COM1 or
3COM2) selectable on a per unit basis
• loopback of PCM signals over DS-30X network loop for diagnostic
purposes
Card control functions
Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN interface,
and signaling and control circuits on the OPS analog line card.
Microcontroller—The microcontroller controls the following:
• reporting to the CPU via the card LAN link:
— card identification (card type, vintage, and serial number)
— firmware version
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NT1R20 Off Premise Station (OPS) analog line card Page 427 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
— self-test status
— programmed configuration status
• receipt and implementation of card configuration:
— of the codecs
— enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card
— programming of input/output interface control circuits for
administration of line interface unit operation
— maintenance diagnostics
— transmission loss levels
Signaling and control—This portion of the card provides circuits that
establish, supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits work
with the system CPU to operate line interface circuits during calls. The
circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the CPU and return
incoming call status information over the DS-30X network loop.
Circuit Power
The +8.5 V dc input is regulated down to + 5 V dc for use by the digital logic
circuits. All other power to the card is used by the line interface circuits.
Foreign and surge voltage protection
The OPS analog line card meets UL-1489 and CS03 over-voltage (power
cross) specifications and FCC Part 68 requirements for hazardous and surge
voltage limits.
Software service changes
Individual line interface units on the OPS analog line card are configured to
either OPS (for OPS application) or ONS (for ONS application) class-of-
service (CLS) in the Single-line Telephone Administration program (LD10)
(see Table 133). LD10 is also used to select unit terminating impedance and
balance network impedance at the TIMP and BIMP prompts, respectively.
See the Maintenance (553-3001-511) for LD 10 service change instructions.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 428 of 544 NT1R20 Off Premise Station (OPS) analog line card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Port-to-port loss configuration
The loss plan for the OPS analog line card determines port-to-port loss for
connections between an OPS analog line card unit (port) and other Meridian 1
PE or IPE ports.
The transmission properties of each line unit are characterized by the OPS or
ONS class-of-service assigned in the Single-line Telephone Administration
program (LD10).
Table 133
OPS analog line card configuration
Application On-premise station (ONS) Off-premise station (OPS)
Class of service ONS OPS
Loop resistance 0 - 460 ohm 0 - 2300 ohm
Jumper strap set-
ting
b
Both JX. 0 and JX 1 off Both JX. 0 and JX.
1 off
Both JX. 0 and JX.
1 on
Loop loss dB
c
0-1.5 >1.5-
2.5
>2.5-
3.0
0-1.5 >1.5-
2.5
>2.5-
4.5
>4.5-15
TIMP 600
ohm
600
ohm
600
ohm
600
ohm
600
ohm
600
ohm
600
ohm
BIMP 600
ohm
3COM 3CM2 600
ohm
3COM 3CM2 3CM2
Gain treatment
e
No Yes
a. Configured in the Single line Telephone Administration program (LD 10).
b. Jumper strap settings JX 0 and JX. 1 apply to all eight units; “X” indicates the unit number, 0-7. “OFF”
indicates that a jumper strap is not installed across both pins on a jumper block. Store unused straps
on the OPS analog line card by installing them on a single jumper pin.
c. Loss of untreated (no gain devices) metallic line facility. Upper loss limits correspond to loop resistance
ranges for 26 AWG wire.
d. Default software impedance settings are: ONS CLS OPS CLS
TIMP: 600 ohm 600 ohm
BIMP: 600 ohm 3COM2
e. Gain treatment, such as a voice frequency repeater (VFR) is required to limit the actual OPS loop loss
to 4.5 dB, maximum. VFR treatment of metallic loops having untreated loss greater than 15dB
(equivalent to a maximum signaling range of 2300 ohm on 26 AWG wire) is not recommended.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NT1R20 Off Premise Station (OPS) analog line card Page 429 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Operation
The applications, features, and signaling arrangements for each unit on the
OPS analog line card are assigned through the Single-line Telephone
Administration program (LD10) and/or jumper strap settings on the card.
The operation of each unit is configured in software and is implemented in
the card through software download messages. When the OPS analog line
card unit is idle, it provides a ground on the tip lead and – 48 V dc on the ring
lead. The on-hook telephone presents a high impedance toward the line
interface unit on the card.
Incoming calls
Incoming calls to a telephone connected to the OPS analog line card originate
from stations that can be local (served by the Meridian 1 PBX) or remote
(served through the public switched telephone network). The alerting signal
to telephones is 20 Hz (nominal) ringing. When an incoming call is answered,
ringing is tripped as the telephone goes off-hook, placing a low-resistance DC
loop across the tip and ring leads towards the OPS analog line card (see
Table 134 on page 430).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 430 of 544 NT1R20 Off Premise Station (OPS) analog line card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Table 134
Call connection sequence—near-end station receiving call
State
Signal/Direction
Far-endNear-end
Remarks
Line card unit idle Group on tip, battery on ring
High resistance loop
No battery current drawn.
Far-end station goes off-hook and
addresses (dials-up) the near-end
station. The Option 11C receives the
incoming call on a trunk and determines
the TN.
Incoming call Ringing Option 11C applies 20 Hz ringing to ring
lead.
Near-end station
off-hook
Low resistance loop
Two-way voice
connection
Option 11C detects increase in loop
current, tips ringing, and puts call through
to near-end station.
Near end station
hangs up first
High-resistance loop If near end station hangs-up first, the line
card detects the drop in loop current.
Line card unit idle Group on tip, battery on ring
High resistance loop
Line card unit is ready for the next call.
Far end station
hangs up first
High resistance loop If the far-end hangs-up first, Option 11C
detects disconnect signalling from the
trunk. The person at the near-end
recognizes the end of the call and hangs-
up.
Line card unit idle Ground on tip/battery on ring
High resistance loop
Line card unit is ready for the next call.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NT1R20 Off Premise Station (OPS) analog line card Page 431 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Outgoing calls
For outgoing calls from a telephone, a line unit is seized when the telephone
goes off-hook, placing a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads
towards the OPS analog line card (see Table 135 on page 431). When the card
detects the low-resistance loop, it prepares to receive digits. When the
Meridian 1 is ready to receive digits, it returns dial tone. Outward address
signaling is then applied from the telephone in the form of loop (interrupting)
dial pulses or DTMF tones.
Table 135
Call connection sequence—near-end station receiving call (Part 1 of 2)
State
Signal/Direction
Far-endNear-end
Remarks
Line card unit idle Group on tip, battery on ring
High resistance loop
No battery current drawn.
Call request Low resistance loop Near-end station goes off-hook. Battery
current is drawn, causing detection of
off-hook state.
Dial Tone Dial tone is applied to the near end
station from the Option 11C.
Outpulsing Addressing signals Near-end station dials number (loop
pulsing or DTMF tones).
Option 11C detects start of dialing and
removes dial tone
Ringback (or busy) Option 11C decodes addressing, routes
call, and supplies ringback tone to near-
end station if far-end is on-hook. (Busy
tone is supplied if far-end is off-hook).
Two-way voice
connection
When call is answered, ringback tone is
removed, and call is put through to far-
end station.
Near-end station
hangs-up first
High resistance loop If near end station hangs-up first, the line
card detects the drop in loop current.
Line card unit idle Group on tip, battery on ring
High resistance loop
Line card unit is ready for the next call.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 432 of 544 NT1R20 Off Premise Station (OPS) analog line card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Application
Off-premise station application
The NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) Analog Line Card is designed
primarily to provide an interface for Meridian 1 off-premise station lines. An
OPS line serves a terminal—typically, but not exclusively, a telephone set—
remote from the PBX either within the same serving area as the local office
or through a distant office. The line is not switched at these offices; however,
depending on the facilities used, the local office serving the OPS station may
provide line functions such as battery and ringing. Facilities are generally
provided by the local exchange carrier (usually, OPS pairs are in the same
cable as the PBX-CO trunks). The traditional OPS scenario configuration is
shown in Figure 56.
Far end station
hangs up first
High resistance loop If the far-end hangs-up first, Option 11C
detects disconnect signalling from the
trunk. The person at the near-end
recognizes the end of the call and
hangs-up.
Line card unit idle Ground on tip/battery on ring
High resistance loop
Line card unit is ready for the next call.
Call connection sequence—near-end station receiving call (Part 2 of 2)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NT1R20 Off Premise Station (OPS) analog line card Page 433 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Figure 56
Traditional OPS application configuration
Note: OPS service should not be confused with off-premise extension
(OPS) service. OPS service is the provision of an extension to a main
subscriber loop bridged onto the loop at the serving CO or PBX.
Additionally, OPS as used to denote off-premise extension service
should not be confused with the OPS class-of-service assigned in the
Single-line Telephone Administration program (LD10).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 434 of 544 NT1R20 Off Premise Station (OPS) analog line card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Other applications
The operating range and built-in protection provisions of the OPS analog line
card make it suitable for applications which are variants on the traditional
configuration shown in Figure 56. Examples of such applications are:
• a PBX in a central building serving stations in other buildings in the
vicinity, such as in an industrial park, often called a campus environment.
Facilities may be provided by the local exchange carrier or may be
privately owned. Protection may or may not be a requirement.
• Termination to other than a telephone set, such as to a key telephone
system.
• Individual circuits on the OPS analog line card may also be configured
as ONS ports in LD10:
— to have ONS service with hazardous and surge voltage protection
(not available on other Meridian 1 analog line cards).
— to use otherwise idle OPS analog line card ports.
Transmission considerations
The transmission performance of OPS lines is dependent on a number of
factors.
• The Meridian 1 port-to-port loss for connections between OPS ports and
other Meridian 1 ports.
• The transmission parameters of the facilities between the Meridian 1
OPS port and the off-premise station or termination.
• The electrical and acoustic transmission characteristics of the
termination.
These factors must be considered when planning applications using the OPS
analog line card. They are of particular importance when considering
configurations other than the traditional OPS application as shown in
Figure 56. The discussion which follows is intended to provide basic
transmission planning guidelines for various OPS applications.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NT1R20 Off Premise Station (OPS) analog line card Page 435 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Port-to-port loss
Loss is inserted between OPS analog line card ports and other Meridian 1
ports in accordance with the Meridian 1 loss plan. This plan determines the
port-to-port loss for each call. When a port is configured for OPS class-of-
service, loss is programmed into the OPS analog line card on a call-by-call
basis. When configured for ONS class-of-service, an OPS analog line card
port is programmed to a value that is fixed for all calls, although the loss in
the other port involved in the call may vary on a call-by-call basis to achieve
the total loss scheduled by the plan.
For satisfactory transmission performance, particularly on connections
between the public network and an OPS termination, it is recommended that
facilities conform to the following:
• Total 1 kHz loss from the local serving CO to the OPS terminal should
not exceed 7.0 dB. Of that total, the loss in the facility between the PBX
and the terminal should not exceed 4.5 dB (see Figure 56).
The following requirements are based on historic inserted connection
loss (ICL) objectives:
— PBX–CO trunk: 5 dB with gain; 0–4.0 dB without gain
— OPS line: 4.0 dB with gain; 0–4.5 dB without gain
In recent times, economic and technological consideration has led to
modifications of these historic objectives. However, the loss
provisions in the PBX for OPS are constrained by regulatory
requirements as well as industry standards; thus, they are not
designed to compensate for modified ICL designs in the connecting
facilities.
• The attenuation distortion (frequency response) of the OPS facility
should be within ±3.0 dB over the frequency range from 300 to 3000 Hz.
It is desirable that this bandwidth extend from 200 to 3200 Hz.
• The terminating impedance of the facility at the OPS port should
approximate that of 600 ohm cable.
If the OPS line facility loss is greater than 4.5 dB but does not exceed 15 dB,
line treatment using a switched-gain voice frequency repeater (VFR) will
extend the voice range.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 436 of 544 NT1R20 Off Premise Station (OPS) analog line card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
The overall range achievable on an OPS line facility is limited by the
signaling range (2300 ohm loop including telephone set resistance). Signaling
range is unaffected by gain treatment; thus, gain treatment can be used to
extend the voice range to the limit of the signaling range. For example, on 26
AWG wire, the signaling range of 2300 ohms corresponds to an untreated
metallic loop loss of 15 dB. Gain treatment (such as a VFR) with 10.5 dB of
gain would maintain the OPS service loss objective of 4.5 dB while extending
the voice range to the full limit of the signaling range:
• 15 dB (loss corresponding to the maximum signaling range)
• – 4.5 dB (OPS service loss objective)
• = 10.5 dB (required gain treatment)
The use of dial long line units to extend signaling range of OPS analog line
cards beyond 15 dB is not recommended.
Termination transmission characteristics
The loss plan for OPS connections is designed so that a connection with an
OPS termination will provide satisfactory end-to-end listener volume when
the OPS termination is a standard telephone set. The listener volume at the
distant end depends on the OPS termination transmit loudness characteristics;
that at the OPS termination end depends on the OPS termination receive
loudness characteristics. With standard telephone sets, these characteristics
are such that satisfactory—if not optimum—performance is achievable
within the above noted objectives for connecting facilities.
A feature of many (though not all) standard telephone sets is that the loudness
increases with decreased current. Thus, as the line (Meridian 1 to OPS
termination) facility gets longer and loss increases, the increased loudness of
the set somewhat compensates for the higher loss, assuming direct current
feed from the PBX with constant voltage at the feeding bridge. However, this
compensation is not available when:
• the termination is a non-compensating telephone set
• the OPS port is served by a line card using a constant-current feeding
bridge
• the OPS termination is to telephone sets behind a local switch providing
local current feed, such as a key telephone system
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NT1R20 Off Premise Station (OPS) analog line card Page 437 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
OPS line terminations with loudness characteristics designed for other
applications may also impact transmission performance. For example,
wireless portables loudness characteristics are selected for connections to
switching systems for wireless communication systems; if deployed in an
OPS arrangement without due consideration for these characteristics, the
result could be a significant deviation from optimum loudness performance.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 438 of 544 NT1R20 Off Premise Station (OPS) analog line card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 439 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
446
Chapter 27 — Cable specifications and
interfaces
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Option 11C fiber optic cable interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Fiber Expansion daughterboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Fiber Receiver cards . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Expansion Daughterboards for IP connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Fiber Optic cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
IP connector cables . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
This chapter describes the fiber optic cable interface equipment used with the
Option 11C.
Overview
Through the use of fiber optic cable and fiber optic cable interfaces, the
expansion cabinets may be located at various distances from the main cabinet.
With Option 11C, the expansion cabinets can be located up to 3 km (1.8 mi)
from the main cabinet.
With the use of Dual Port Fiber Expansion Daughterboards, up to four
expansion cabinets can be supported with Option 11C. These Dual Port Fiber
Expansion Daughterboards are also available in two versions for local and IP
Expansion configurations.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 440 of 544 Cable specifications and interfaces
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Note 1: The distance between cabinets is determined by the length of the
fiber optic cable.
Note 2: The fiber optic cable interface equipment used with Option 11E
is unique to that system, and cannot be used with Option 11C. Similarly,
the fiber optic cable interface used with Option 11C cannot be used with
Option 11E.
Note 3: With 100baseF Expansion Daughterboards and third party
converters, the distance can be extended to more than 20km.
Option 11C fiber optic cable interfaces
Fiber optic interface hardware used with Option 11C consists of Fiber
Expansion daughterboards mounted on the NTDK20 small system controller
card in the main cabinet and Fiber Receiver cards mounted in the expansion
cabinets.
Note 1: Any reference to Option 11C cabinets in this section equally
applies to Option 11C Mini chassis if you are using them in your IP
Expansion system.
Note 2: The MFI and EFI units used with Option 11E to interface with
fiber optic cable cannot be used with Option 11C.
Fiber Expansion daughterboards
Fiber Expansion daughterboards mounted on the NTDK20 SSC card allow
the connection of fiber optic cables from the main cabinet to expansion
cabinets in multi cabinet Option 11C systems. Each daughterboard also
provides an additional 16-channel conference loop and one SDI port at the
expansion cabinet. There are five types:
• The NTDK22 Fiber Expansion Daughterboard
• The NTDK24 Fiber Expansion Daughterboard
• The NTDK79 Fiber Expansion Daughterboard
• The NTDK84 Fiber Expansion Daughterboard
• The NTDK85 Fiber Expansion Daughterboard
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cable specifications and interfaces Page 441 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
NTDK22 Fiber Expansion Daughterboard
The NTDK22 Fiber Expansion Daughterboard is used when the expansion
cabinet is within 10 m (33 ft) of the main cabinet. It connects to one
A0632902 Fiber Optic cable (multimode).
One of these boards is required for each expansion cabinet located within 10
m (33 ft) of the main cabinet.
NTDK24 Fiber Expansion Daughterboard
The NTDK24 Fiber Expansion Daughterboard is used when the expansion
cabinet is up to 3 km (1.8 mi) of the main cabinet. It connects to one glass
multimode fiber optic cable which is dedicated to the Option 11C system.
One of these boards is required for each expansion cabinet located up to 3 km
(1.8 mi) of the main cabinet. The NTDK24 Fiber Expansion Daughterboard
works in conjunction with an NTDK25 Fiber Receiver card in the expansion
cabinet.
Note: The NTDK24 supports only Multimode glass fiber optic cable.
NTDK79 Fiber Expansion Daughterboard
The NTDK79 Fiber Expansion Daughterboard has the same features as the
NTDK24 except that:
• it requires Single Mode glass fiber optic cable
• it works in conjunction with an NTDK80 Fiber Receiver card in the
expansion cabinet instead of an NTDK25 card.
Note: The NTDK79 supports only Single Mode glass fiber optic cable.
NTDK84 Fiber Expansion Daughterboard
The NTDK84 Fiber Expansion Daughterboard has the same features as the
NTDK22 except that it can interface with two expansion cabinets.
NTDK85 Fiber Expansion Daughterboard
The NTDK85 Fiber Expansion Daughterboard has the same features as the
NTDK24 except that it can interface with two expansion cabinets.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 442 of 544 Cable specifications and interfaces
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Fiber Receiver cards
Fiber Receiver cards installed in the Fbr Rx slot (slot 0) of expansion cabinets
allow the connection of fiber optic cables from the main cabinet. There are
three types:
• The NTDK23 Fiber Receiver card
• The NTDK25 Fiber Receiver card
• The NTDK80 Fiber Receiver card
NTDK23 Fiber Receiver card
The NTDK23 Fiber Receiver card is used when the expansion cabinet is
within 10 m (33 ft) of the main cabinet. It connects to one A0618443 Fiber
Optic cable.
One of these cards is required for each expansion cabinet located within 10 m
(33 ft) of the main cabinet. The NTDK23 Fiber Receiver card works in
conjunction with either an NTDK22 or an NTDK84 Fiber Expansion
Daughterboard in the main cabinet.
NTDK25 Fiber Receiver card
The NTDK25 Fiber Receiver card is used when the expansion cabinet is
located up to 3 km (1.8 mi) of the main cabinet. It connects to one multimode
glass fiber optic cable which is dedicated to the Option 11C system. One of
these cards is required for each expansion cabinet located up to 3 km (1.8 mi)
of the main cabinet, connected by multimode fiber optic cable. The NTDK25
Fiber Receiver card works in conjunction with either an NTDK24 or an
NTDK85 Fiber Expansion Daughterboard in the main cabinet.
Note: The NTDK24 supports only Multimode glass fiber optic cable.
NTDK80 Fiber Receiver card
The NTDK80 Fiber Receiver card has the same features as the NTDK25
except that:
• it requires Single Mode glass fiber optic cable
• it works in conjunction with an NTDK79 Fiber Expansion
Daughterboard in the main cabinet instead of an NTDK24 card.
Note: The NTDK80 supports only Single Mode glass fiber optic cable.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cable specifications and interfaces Page 443 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
SDI Port
Each Fiber Receiver card supports one Serial Data Interface (SDI) port
allowing remote TTY access. See “SDI ports” on page 227 for further details.
Expansion Daughterboards for IP connectivity
• The NTDK83 dual port 100baseT IP daughterboard
• The NTDK99 single port 100baseT IP daughterboard
• The NTTK01 single port 100baseF IP daughterboard
• The NTTK02 dual port 100baseF IP daughterboard
NTDK83 dual port 100baseT IP daughterboard
The NTDK83 dual port 100baseT IP daughterboard has two 100BaseT IP
ports, and can be used to connect Point To Point or to a campus data network.
NTDK99 single port 100baseT IP daughterboard
The NTDK99 single port 100baseT IP daughterboard has one 100BaseT IP
port, and can be used to connect Point To Point or to a campus data network.
NTTK01 single port 100baseF IP daughterboard
The NTTK01 single port 100baseF IP daughterboard has one 100BaseF IP
port, and can be used to connect Point To Point or to a campus data network
with glass fiber optic cable. This is the glass fiber optic cable version of the
NTDK99 described above.
NTTK02 dual port 100baseF IP daughterboard
The NTTK02 dual port 100baseF IP daughterboard has two 100BaseF IP
ports, and can be used to connect Point To Point or to the campus data
network with glass multimode optic cable. This is the glass fiber optic cable
version of the NTDK83 described above.
Fiber Optic cable
The Option 11C cabinets can be located up to 3 km (1.8 mi) from the main
cabinet by using fiber optic cable. There are two types of connections:
• Plastic Fiber Optic cable
• Glass Fiber Optic cable
• IP connector cables
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 444 of 544 Cable specifications and interfaces
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Plastic Fiber Optic cable (Multi-mode)
The A0632902 Fiber Optic cable is a 10 m (33 ft) plastic fiber cable which is
used when the expansion cabinet is located 10 m (33 ft) or less from the main
cabinet. This cable comes equipped with a connector on each end which
connect to either the NTDK22 or NTDK84 Daughterboard in the main
cabinet and to the NTDK23 Fiber Receiver card in the expansion cabinet.
Excess cable is stored by means of cable management devices in the cabinets.
This cable, which is the only cable that can be used for this purpose, is not
intended to be cut or altered in the field.
Glass Fiber Optic cable
Glass fiber optic cable (Multimode or Single Mode, depending on interface
cards) is required when the cable length between the main cabinet and an
expansion cabinet is up to 3 km (1.8 mi).
Note: The distance between the main cabinet and expansion cabinet is
determined by the length of the fiber optic cable — not by linear distance.
This glass fiber cable, which is supplied by a local telephone company or
other facilities provider, must be dedicated to the Option 11C (it cannot be
shared with other services).
A connector is required on each end of the cable to connect to the
NTDK24 (Multimode), NTDK85 (Multimode), or NTDK79 (Single Mode)
Daughterboard in the main cabinet and to the NTDK25 (Multimode) or
NTDK80 (Single Mode) Receiver card in the expansion cabinet. Excess cable
is stored by means of cable management devices in the cabinets.
Note: The Option 11 C fiber optic link for distances up to 3 km (1.8 mi)
uses the industry standard 62.5/125 µm glass multimode duplex cable
with ST-type connectors.
The type of cable used depends on the type of installation and any local
building codes.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cable specifications and interfaces Page 445 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Table 136 lists the minimum optical requirements for Multimode and Single
Mode glass fiber optic cable used with the Option 11C.
Note: The typical power budget for the glass fiber link is typically 8 dB.
The fiber link is limited to a maximum length of 3 km, even though with
many optical cables the optical power budget of 8 dB could support
greater lengths. To guarantee reliable operation a bandwidth of 150%
should be maintained. If the link is increased beyond the 3 km length the
150% margin is deteriorated possibly resulting in link malfunction under
some conditions.
Table 136
Multimode and Single Mode glass optical cable requirements
Parameter Minimum Typical Maximum Units
Glass Fiber Cable Length 3.0 km
Cable Attenuation @1300 nm 1.5 2.0 dB/km
Modal Bandwidth @1300 nm 200 500 MHz * km
Chromatic Dispersion @1300 nm 6 ps / nm * km
Typical 3dB Optical Bandwidth 180 MHz * km
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 446 of 544 Cable specifications and interfaces
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
IP connector cables
The Option 11C IP Expansion system requires the following cables:
Environment
The Daughterboards and Receiver cards are subject to the environmental
conditions shown in Table 138.
Table 137
IP connector cables
Daughterboards Cable Cable description
NTDK83 and NTDK99
100baseT IP
NTTK34AA /
AO793725
10m RJ45 CAT 5 cable
NTDK8305 /
AO781621
2m STP CAT 5 extension cable
NTTK01 and NTTK02
100baseF IP
AO817052 5 m MT-RJ to ST cable.
A0346816 ST fibre coupler
AO817055 10m MT-RJ to MT-RJ fibre extension
cable
Table 138
Environmental conditions
Operating Storage
Ambient temperature 0° C to 50° C
(32° F to 122° F)
-45° C to 70 ° C
(-49° F to 158° F)
Relative Humidity 5% to 95% 0% to 95%
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 447 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
454
Chapter 28 — NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI
card
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Foreign and surge voltage protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Signaling interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Interconnection . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Microprocessor . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Digital pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
D-channel interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
DS-1 Carrier interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Clock controller interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Clock rate converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Overview
The NTAK09 is a standard-size intelligent peripheral equipment circuit card
in the Option 11C main and IP expansion cabinets. It provides 1.5Mb ISDN
primary rate interface and digital trunk interface capability. The NTAK09 can
be equipped with two daughterboards: the NTAK20 clock controller and the
NTAK93/NTBK51 D-Channel handler interface.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 448 of 544 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
The NTAK09 is being replaced by the NTRB21 - TMDI (DTI/PRI/DCH)
which is described in “NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card” on page 461.
Functional description
NTAK09 provides the following features and functions:
• configurable parameters, including A/µ-Law operation, digital pads on a
per channel basis, and Superframe or Extended Superframe formats
• AMI or B8ZS line coding
• 1.5 Mb Clock recovery and distribution of reference clocks
• DG2 or FDL yellow alarm methods
• card status and alarm indication with faceplate-mounted LEDs
• automatic alarm monitoring and handling
• Card-LAN for maintenance communications
• loopback capabilities for both near end and far end
• echo canceler interface
• integrated trunk access (both D-channel and in-band A/B signaling can
be mixed on the same PRI)
• faceplate monitor jacks for T-1 interface
• configurable D-channel data rate with 64 Kbps, 56 Kbps or 64 Kbps
inverted.
• self-test
Physical description
The DTI/PRI card uses a standard IPEsized (9.5" by 12.5"), multilayer
printed circuit board with buried power and ground layers. It is keyed to
prevent insertion in slot 10. The clock controller and D-channel
daughterboards are fastened by standoffs and connectors.
The NTAK09 DTI/PRI card has seven faceplate LEDs. The first five LEDs
are associated with the NTAK09 card, the remaining two LEDs are associated
with the clock controller and DCHI daughterboards.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Page 449 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
In general, the first five LEDs operate as follows:
• During system power up, the LEDs are on.
• When the self-test is in progress, the LEDs flash on and off three times,
then go into their appropriate states, as shown in Table 139.
Power requirements
The DTI/PRI obtains its power from the backplane, and draws less than 2
amps on +5 V, 50 mA on +12 V and 50 mA on -12 V.
Foreign and surge voltage protection
Lightning protectors must be installed between an external T-1 carrier facility
and the Option 11C cabinet. For public T-1 facilities, this protection is
provided by the local operating company. In a private T-1 facility
environment (a campus, for example), the NTAK92 protection assembly may
be used.
Table 139
NTAK09 LED states
LED State Definition
DIS On (Red) The NTAK09 circuit card is disabled.
Off The NTAK09 is not in a disabled state.
ACT On (Green) The NTAK09 circuit card is in an active state. No alarm states
exist, the card is not disabled, nor is it in a loopback state.
Off An alarm state or loopback state exists, or the card has been
disabled. See the other faceplate LEDs for more information.
RED On (Red) A red-alarm state has been detected.
Off No red alarm.
YEL On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected.
Off No yellow alarm.
LBK On (Green) NTAK09 is in loop-back mode.
Off NTAK09 is not in loop-back mode.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 450 of 544 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
The NTAK09 circuit card conforms to safety and performance standards for
foreign and surge voltage protection in an internal environment.
Architecture
Signaling interface
The signaling interface performs an 8 Kbps signaling for all 24 channels and
interfaces directly to the DS-30X link. Messages in both directions of
transmission are three bytes long.
Interconnection
The interconnection to the carrier is by NTBK04 1.5Mb carrier cable
(A0394216).
The NTBK04 is twenty feet long. The NT8D97AX, a fifty-foot extension, is
also available if required.
Microprocessor
The NTAK09 is equipped with bit-slice microprocessors that handle the
following major tasks:
• Task handler: also referred to as an executive, the task handler provides
orderly per-channel task execution to maintain real-time task ordering
constraints.
• Transmit voice: inserts digital pads, manipulates transmit AB bits for
DS1, and provides graceful entry into T-Link data mode when the data
module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk is answering the call.
• Receive voice: inserts digital pads and provides graceful entry into T-
Link data mode when the data module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk is
originating the call.
• T-Link data: a set of transmit and receive vectored subroutines which
provides T-Link protocol conversion to/from the DM-DM protocol.
• Receive ABCD filtering: filters and debounces the receive ABCD bits
and provides change of state information to the system.
• Diagnostics
• Self-test
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Page 451 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Digital pad
The digital pad is an EPROM whose address-input to data-output transfer
function meets the characteristics of a digital attenuator. The digital pad
accommodates both µ255-law and A-law coding. There are 32 combinations
each for µ255 to µ255, µ255 to A-law, A-law to µ255, and A-law to A-law.
These values are selected to meet the EIA loss and level plan.
Table 140
Digital pad values and offset allocations
Offset PAD set 0 PAD set 1
0 0dB -7db
1 2dB -8db
2 3dB -9db
3 4dB -10db
4 5dB 0.6db
5 6.1dB 7db
6 8dB 9db
7 -1dB 10db
8 -3dB 11db
9 -4dB 12db
A idle code, 7F 3db
B unassigned code, FF 14db
C 1dB spare
D -2dB spare
E -5db spare
F -6db spare
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 452 of 544 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
D-channel interface
The D-channel interface is a 64 Kbps, full-duplex, serial bit-stream
configured as a DCE device. The data signals include receive data output,
transmit data input, receive clock output, and transmit clock output. The
receive and transmit clocks can be of slightly different bit rate from each other
as determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks.
Feature selection through software configuration for the D-channel includes:
• 56 Kbps
• 64 Kbps clear
• 64 Kbps inverted (64 Kbps restricted)
DCHI can be enabled and disabled independent of the PRI card, as long as the
PRI card is inserted in its cabinet slot. The D-channel data link cannot be
established however, unless the PRI loop is enabled.
On the NTAK09 use switch 1, position 1 to select either the D-channel feature
or the DPNSS feature, as follows:
OFF = D-channel
ON = DPNSS (U.K.).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Page 453 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
DS-1 Carrier interface
Transmitter
The transmitter takes the binary data (dual unipolar) from the PCM
transceiver and produces bipolar pulses for transmission to the external
digital facility. The DS1 transmit equalizer allows the cabling distance to be
extended from the card to the DSX-1 or LD-1. Equalizers are switch
selectable through dip-switches and the settings are as shown below.
Receiver
The receiver extracts data and clock from an incoming data stream and
outputs clock and synchronized data. At worst case DSX-1 signal levels, the
line receiver will operate correctly with up to 655 feet of ABAM cable
between the card and the external DS1 signal source.
Table 141
NTAK09 switch settings
Distance to Digital Cross-Connect
Switch Setting
1
DCH F/W
2
(LEN 0)
3
(LEN 1)
4
(LEN 2)
0 - 133 feet Off Off Off On
133 - 266 feet Off On On Off
266 - 399 feet Off Off On Off
399 - 533 feet Off On Off Off
533 - 655 feet Off Off Off Off
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 454 of 544 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Connector pinout
The connection to the external digital carrier is via a 15 position Male D type
connector.
Clock controller interface
The purpose of the clock controller interface is to provide the recovered clock
from the external digital facility to the clock controller daughterboard via the
backplane. Depending on the equipped state of the clock controller, the clock
controller interface enables or disables the appropriate reference clock
source, in conjunction with software.
Clock rate converter
The 1.5 Mb clock is generated by a phase-locked loop (PLL). The PLL
synchronizes the 1.5 Mb DS1 clock to the 2.56 Mb system clock through the
common multiple of 8 kHz by using the main frame synchronization signal.
Table 142
DS-1 line interface pinout for NTBK04 cable
From 50-pin MDF
connector
to DB-15 signal name description
pin 48 pin 1 T transmit tip to network
pin 23 pin 9 R transmit ring to network
pin 25 pin 2 FGND frame ground
pin 49 pin 3 T1 receive tip from network
pin 24 pin 11 R1 receive ring from network
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 455 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
466
Chapter 29 — NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH
TMDI card
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Software description . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Hardware description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
NTRB21 TMDI card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Shelf slot assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Foreign and surge voltage protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Signaling interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Interconnection . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Microprocessor . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Digital pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
D-channel interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
DS-1 Carrier interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
NTAK20 Clock Controller (CC) daughterboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 456 of 544 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Overview
The NTRB21 TMDI (DTI/PRI/DCH) card is required to implement PRI on
the Meridian 1 Option 11C system. It is supported in the Main and IP
expansion cabinets.
The TMDI feature introduces the software changes required for an
Option 11C system to support the new TDMI pack. These changes include
the introduction of a new prompt to replace a function that was handled by a
dip switch on the NTAK09, as well as an extra loadware application to handle
Layer 1, and changes to make the existing loadware files into 32 bit format
instead of the original 16 bit format. To provide CEMUX communication
with the card, changes are also required to create an I/O entry for the card. In
addition the NTRB21 has a built-in downloadable D-channel.
This card requires that the Option 11C be equipped with at least Release 24
software.
This card replaces the NTAK09 described in “NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI
card” on page 447. This feature does not affect the NTAK09 functionality,
configuration, or maintenance in any way. Aside from changes to the
configuration and maintenance of the pack, there are no other changes seen
by the users, and call processing is not affected.
Functional description
NTRB21 provides the following features and functions:
• configurable parameters, including A/µ-Law operation, digital pads on a
per channel basis, and Superframe or Extended Superframe formats
• AMI or B8ZS line coding
• 1.5 Mb Digital Trunk Interface and 1.5 Mb Primary Rate Interface
• 1.5 Mb Clock recovery and distribution of reference clocks
• DG2 or FDL yellow alarm methods
• card status and alarm indication with faceplate-mounted LED
• automatic alarm monitoring and handling
• Card-LAN for maintenance communications
• loopback capabilities for both near end and far end
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Page 457 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
• echo canceler interface
• integrated trunk access (both D-channel and in-band A/B signaling can
be mixed on the same PRI)
• faceplate monitor jacks for T-1 interface
• configurable D-channel data rate with 64 Kbps, 56 Kbps or 64 Kbps
inverted.
• self-test
Software description
Changes from the NTAK09 are required for the new trunk card and ISM
parameters are n service change and maintenance overlays. There is a change
to CardLAN to introduce a new CardLAN ID. The download of PSDL data
is also changed to handle a 32 bit download as well as existing 16 bit.
Hardware description
NTRB21 TMDI card
The NTRB21 TMDI card provides 1.5 MBits Digital Trunk Interface or
Primary Rate Interface functionality on the Option 11C. The NTRB21 has a
built-in downloadable D-channel, and may occupy card slots 1-9 on the
Option 11C main cabinet.
Note 1: For CISPR B group cabinets, the active Clock Controller
(NTAK20) can only occupy slots 1-3. For FCC and/or CISPR A group
cabinets, this limitation does not exist - the Clock Controller can occupy
any available slot 1-9.
Note 2: The NTRB21 TMDI card requires that the Option 11C be
loaded with at least Release 24 software. If an Option 11C switch is
loaded with Release 24 (or later) software, the NTRB21 can be equipped
together with the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card (with the NTBK51
downloadable D-channel daughterboard).
Figure 57 on page 458 shows a faceplate of the NTRB21 TMDI card.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 458 of 544 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Figure 57
NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate
TMDI
Rx
Tx
OOS
ACT
RED
YEL
LBK
CC
DCH
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
MAINT
RS232 Monitor Port
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Page 459 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Shelf slot assignment
On non-ECM system cabinets, the NTAK20 may be placed in slots 1-9. On
cabinets NTAK11Dx and NTAK11Fx, the active NTAK20 must be placed in
slots 1-3 (slots 4-10 may not be used).
Physical description
The NTRB21 card uses a standard IPE-sized (9.5" by 12.5"), multi-layer
printed circuit board with buried power and ground layers. It is keyed to
prevent insertion in slot 10. The clock controller daughterboard is fastened by
standoffs and connectors.
The NTRB21 card has seven faceplate LEDs. The first five LEDs are
associated with the NTRB21 card, the remaining two LEDs are associated
with the clock controller and DCHI daughterboards.
In general, the first five LEDs operate as follows:
• During system power up, the LEDs are on.
• When the self-test is in progress, the LEDs flash on and off three times,
then go into their appropriate states, as shown in Table 143
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 460 of 544 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
.
Power requirements
The DTI/PRI obtains its power from the backplane, and draws less than
2 amps on +5 V, 50 mA on +12 V, and 50 mA on -12 V.
Foreign and surge voltage protection
Lightning protectors must be installed between an external T-1 carrier facility
and the Option 11C cabinet. For public T-1 facilities, this protection is
provided by the local operating company. In a private T-1 facility
environment (a campus, for example), the NTAK92 protection assembly may
be used.
The NTRB21 circuit card conforms to safety and performance standards for
foreign and surge voltage protection in an internal environment.
Table 143
NTRB21 LED states
LED State Definition
DIS On (Red) The NTRB21 circuit card is disabled.
Off The NTRB21 is not in a disabled state.
ACT On (Green) The NTRB21 circuit card is in an active state. No alarm states
exist, the card is not disabled, nor is it in a loopback state.
Off An alarm state or loopback state exists, or the card has been
disabled. See the other faceplate LEDs for more information.
RED On (Red) A red-alarm state has been detected.
Off No red alarm.
YEL On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected.
Off No yellow alarm.
LBK On (Green) NTRB21 is in loop-back mode.
Off NTRB21 is not in loop-back mode.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Page 461 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Architecture
Signaling interface
The signaling interface performs an 8 Kbps signaling for all 24 channels and
interfaces directly to the DS-30X link. Messages in both directions of
transmission are three bytes long.
Interconnection
The interconnection to the carrier is by NTBK04 1.5Mb carrier cable
(A0394216).
The NTBK04 is twenty feet long. The NT8D97AX, a fifty-foot extension, is
also available if required.
Microprocessor
The NTRB21 is equipped with bit-slice microprocessors that handle the
following major tasks:
• Task handler: also referred to as an executive, the task handler provides
orderly per-channel task execution to maintain real-time task ordering
constraints.
• Transmit voice: inserts digital pads, manipulates transmit AB bits for
DS1, and provides graceful entry into T-Link data mode when the data
module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk is answering the call.
• Receive voice: inserts digital pads and provides graceful entry into T-
Link data mode when the data module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk is
originating the call.
• T-Link data: a set of transmit and receive vectored subroutines which
provides T-Link protocol conversion to/from the DM-DM protocol.
• Receive ABCD filtering: filters and debounces the receive ABCD bits
and provides change of state information to the system.
• Diagnostics
• Self-test
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 462 of 544 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Digital pad
The digital pad is an EPROM whose address-input to data-output transfer
function meets the characteristics of a digital attenuator. The digital pad
accommodates both µ255-law and A-law coding. There are 32 combinations
each for µ255 to µ255, µ255 to A-law, A-law to µ255, and A-law to A-law.
These values are selected to meet the EIA loss and level plan.
Table 144
Digital pad values and offset allocations
Offset PAD set 0 PAD set 1
0 0dB -7db
1 2dB -8db
2 3dB -9db
3 4dB -10db
4 5dB 0.6db
5 6.1dB 7db
6 8dB 9db
7 -1dB 10db
8 -3dB 11db
9 -4dB 12db
A idle code, 7F 3db
B unassigned code, FF 14db
C 1dB spare
D -2dB spare
E -5db spare
F -6db spare
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Page 463 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
D-channel interface
The D-channel interface is a 64 Kbps, full-duplex, serial bit-stream
configured as a DCE device. The data signals include receive data output,
transmit data input, receive clock output, and transmit clock output. The
receive and transmit clocks can be of slightly different bit rate from each other
as determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks.
Feature selection through software configuration for the D-channel includes:
• 56 Kbps
• 64 Kbps clear
• 64 Kbps inverted (64 Kbps restricted)
DCHI can be enabled and disabled independent of the PRI card, as long as the
PRI card is inserted in its cabinet slot. The D-channel data link cannot be
established however, unless the PRI loop is enabled.
On the NTRB21 use switch 1, position 1 to select either the D-channel feature
or the DPNSS feature, as follows:
OFF = D-channel
ON = DPNSS (U.K.).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 464 of 544 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
DS-1 Carrier interface
Transmitter
The transmitter takes the binary data (dual unipolar) from the PCM
transceiver and produces bipolar pulses for transmission to the external
digital facility. The DS1 transmit equalizer allows the cabling distance to be
extended from the card to the DSX-1 or LD-1. Equalizers are switch
selectable through dip-switches and the settings are as shown below.
Receiver
The receiver extracts data and clock from an incoming data stream and
outputs clock and synchronized data. At worst case DSX-1 signal levels, the
line receiver will operate correctly with up to 655 feet of ABAM cable
between the card and the external DS1 signal source.
Table 145
NTRB21 switch settings
Distance to Digital Cross-Connect
Switch Setting
1
DCH F/W
2
(LEN 0)
3
(LEN 1)
4
(LEN 2)
0 - 133 feet Off Off Off On
133 - 266 feet Off On On Off
266 - 399 feet Off Off On Off
399 - 533 feet Off On Off Off
533 - 655 feet Off Off Off Off
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Page 465 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Connector pinout
The connection to the external digital carrier is via a 15 position Male D type
connector.
NTAK20 Clock Controller (CC) daughterboard
Digital Trunking requires synchronized clocking so that a shift in one clock
source will result in an equivalent shift of the same size and direction in all
parts of the network. On Option 11C systems, synchronization is
accomplished with the NTAK20 clock controller circuit card.The Clock
Controller circuitry synchronizes the Option 11C to an external reference
clock, and generates and distributes the clock to the system. Option 11C can
function either as a slave to an external clock or as a clocking master. The
NTAK20AA version of the clock controller meets AT&T Stratum 3 and Bell
Canada Node Category D specifications. The NTAK20BA version meets
CCITT stratum 4 specifications. See “NTAK20 clock controller” on
page 503.
Table 146
DS-1 line interface pinout for NTBK04 cable
From 50-pin
MDF connector
To DB-15
Signal
name
Description
pin 48 pin 1 T transmit tip to network
pin 23 pin 9 R transmit ring to network
pin 25 pin 2 FGND frame ground
pin 49 pin 3 T1 receive tip from network
pin 24 pin 11 R1 receive ring from network
IMPORTANT
If an IP Expansion multi-cabinet system is equipped with digital trunk
cards, it is mandatory that at least one trunk card is placed in the Main
Option 11C cabinet. A cabinet that has a digital trunk must have a
clock controller.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 466 of 544 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Clock rate converter
The 1.5 Mb clock is generated by a phase-locked loop (PLL). The PLL
synchronizes the 1.5 Mb DS1 clock to the 2.56 Mb system clock through the
common multiple of 8 kHz by using the main frame synchronization signal.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 467 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
478
Chapter 30 — NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
DS-30X interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Signaling interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Carrier interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Clock controller interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Overview
The NTAK10, which can be located in the main cabinet and IP expansion
cabinets, provides an IPE-compatible 2.0 Mb DTI interface for the Option
11C system. This circuit card includes on-board clock controller circuitry that
can be manually switched in or out of service.
Functional description
The NTAK10 provides the following features and functions:
• a clock controller that can be switched in as an option
• software-selectable A/µlaw operation
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 468 of 544 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
• software-selectable digital pads on a per channel basis
• frame alignment and multiframe alignment detection
• frame and multiframe pattern generation
• CRC-4 transmission and reception (software selectable)
• card status and alarm indication with faceplate-mounted LEDs
• Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) counting
• outpulsing of digits on any of the abcd bits
• Card-LAN for maintenance communications
• per-channel and all-channel loopback capabilities for near-end and far-
end
• self-test
• download of incoming abcd validation times from software
• warm SYSLOAD (TS16 AS16 transmitted)
Applicability to France
Features specific to DTI requirements for France are implemented in
firmware, and are switch-accessed. The requirements met are as follows:
• transmission and reception of alarm indication signaling (AIS) in TS16
(card disabled, warm SYSLOAD, etc.)
• France-specific PPM counting
• decadic dialing
• France-specific alarm report and error handling
Physical description
The 2Mb DTI pack uses a standard IPE-sized (9.5" by 12.5"), multilayer
printed circuit board. The faceplate is 7/8" wide and contain six LEDs.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Page 469 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
In general, the LEDs operate as follows:
• after the card is plugged in, the LEDs (a-e) are turned on by the power-
up circuit. The clock controller LED is independently controlled by its
own microprocessor
• after initialization, the LEDs (a-e) flash three times (0.5 seconds on, 0.5
seconds off) and then individual LEDs will go into appropriate states, as
shown in Table •.
Table 147
NTAK10 LED states
LED State Definition
DIS On (Red) The NTAK10 circuit card is disabled.
Off The NTAK10 is not in a disabled state.
OOS On (Yellow) The NTAK10 is in an out of service state
Off The NTAK10 is not in an out of service state
NEA On (Yellow) A near end alarm state has been detected
Off No near end alarm
FEA On (Yellow) A far end alarm state has been detected
Off No far end alarm
LBK On (Yellow) NTAK10 is in loop-back mode
Off NTAK10 is not in loop-back mode
CC On (Red) The clock controller is switched on and disabled
On (Green) The clock controller is switched on and is either locked to a
reference or is in free-run mode
Flashing
(Green)
The clock controller is switched on and locking onto the
primary reference
Off The clock controller is switched off
Note: See “Clock controller interface” on page 474 in this
chapter for more on tracking and free-run operation.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 470 of 544 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Power requirements
The 2MB DTI obtains its power from the backplane. It draws less than 2A on
+5V, 50mA on +15V and 50mA on -15V.
Environment
The NTAK10 meets all applicable Nortel Networks operating specifications.
Architecture
The main functional blocks of the NTAK10 architecture include:
• DS-30X interface
• signaling interface
• three microprocessors
• digital pad.
• Card-LAN interface.
• carrier interface.
• clock controller interface.
A description of each block follows.
DS-30X interface
The NTAK10 interfaces to one DS-30X bus which contains 32 byte-
interleaved timeslots operating at 2.56 Mb. Each timeslot contains 10 bits in
A10 message format, 8 are assigned to voice/data (64 Kbps), one to signaling
(8 Kbps), and one is a data valid bit (8 Kbps).
Transmit data
To transmit data on the carrier, the incoming serial bit stream from the
NTAK02 circuit card is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes. The signaling bits
are extracted by the signaling interface circuitry.
Digital Pad: The parallel data is presented to the pad PROM. The PROM
contains pad values, idle code, and A/µ-law conversion. They can be set
independently for incoming and outgoing voice on a per channel basis. Four
conversion formats are provided: A-law to A-law, A-law to µ-law, µ-law to
A-law, µ-law to µ-law.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Page 471 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Each of these four formats has up to 32 unique pad values. The NTAK10 card
provides the pad values of -10, -9, -8, -7, -6,-5, -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 0.6, 1, 2, 3, 4,
5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14 dB (also idle and unassigned code). A
negative pad is a positive gain.
The pad PROM output is converted from parallel to serial format and passed
on to a multiplexer, which passes PCM/data, TS0, and TS16 information. The
FAS pattern is sent in even TS0s, while in odd TS0s alarm information is sent.
The multiplexer output is fed to the carrier interface which can forward it to
the carrier or perform per channel loopback.
Receive data
To receive data, PCM/Data from the carrier interface is converted from serial
to parallel, is buffered, and is fed to the pad prom. It then sent onto the DS-
30X interface, where signaling information from the signaling interface
circuitry is multiplexed.
DS-30X microprocessor
The DS-30X is a utility processor, responsible for the following tasks:
• controlling the DS-30X interface
• receiving and decoding of messages and taking appropriate action
• transmitting TS16 messages to the TS16 microprocessor
• receiving TS16 messages from the TS16 microprocessor and passing
these messages to the A07
• providing the 19.2 Kbps serial interface to the Card-LAN
• controlling LEDs
• downloading LCAs
• monitoring errors and alarms
• detecting the change of state in TS0, and outputting TS0 data
• counting bipolar violations, slips, PLL alarms, frame-alignment errors,
and CRC-4 errors
• monitoring the status of frame alignment and multiframe alignment
• detecting and reporting of alarm indication signals (AIS)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 472 of 544 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
• updating of per channel loopback registers
• controlling the far-end loopback and digroup loopback functions
Signaling interface
Interconnections
The external interconnection is through a 50-pin MDF connector with a
NTBK05 carrier cable A0394217.
CEPT interface
For the Conference of European Postal Communications (CEPT) interface,
the connection to the external digital carrier is through NT5K85 DTI cable
assembly A0392021. It converts the 120ohm D-connector to 75ohm coax.
The impedance is switch set. See the switch-settings table at the end of this
chapter for options.
If a coax interface is required, use NT5K85 in conjunction with the NTBK05.
Channel associated signaling
Channel associated signaling implies that each traffic carrying channel has its
own signaling channel permanently associated with it. Timeslot 16 is used to
transmit two types of signaling: supervisory and address.
Incoming signal
Functions of the NTAK10 with regard to incoming signaling include:
• recognizing valid changes.
• determining which channels made the changes.
• collecting PPM.
• reporting changes to software.
Outgoing supervisory signals
The desired abcd bit pattern for a channel is output by the NTAK10, under
the control of the System Core card. The bit pattern to be transmitted is held
on the line for a minimum period of time. This time is specified in the same
message and ensures that the signal is detected correctly at the far end.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Page 473 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
With the exception of the outpulsing signals and special signals, such as
Denmark's Flash signal and Sweden's Parking signal, the minimum duration
of any signal state is 100 msec. Some signal states may have a minimum
duration time that is longer than 100 msec.
Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM)
PPM is used to collect toll charges on outgoing CO trunk calls.
TS16 microprocessor
The functions of this microprocessor include:
• receiving signaling messages supplied by the DS-30X microprocessor,
decoding these messages, and taking subsequent actions
• transmitting messages to the DS-30X microprocessor
• handling PPM
• updating the TS16 select RAM and TS16 data RAM
• providing outpulsing
• receive data from the change-of-state microprocessor
• transmitting AIS for CNET (France) application
Change-of-state microprocessor
The functions of this processor are:
• detecting valid change of state in TS16.
• when a valid change has been found, passing the new abcd bits to the
TS16 microprocessor, along with five bits to indicate the associated
channel.
Carrier interface
Tx Direction
The HDB3 encoded multiplexer output is fed to the output selector, which
selects the PCM/Data output or the looped around far end data. The HDB3 is
converted from digital to AMI and fed to the carrier. A transformer provides
isolation and impedance matching (75 ohms or 120 ohms).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 474 of 544 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Rx Direction
The AMI data of the carrier is converted to digital and fed to the input selector
as well as the output selector for far end loopback. Clock recovery circuitry
within the receiving device extracts the 2.0 MHz clock. This clock is used to
generate the frame and multiframe count and is sent to the clock controller as
a reference.
Clock controller interface
The recovered clock from the external digital facility is provided to the clock
controller through the backplane-to-clock controller interface. Depending
upon the state of the clock controller (switched on or off), the clock controller
interface will, in conjunction with software, enable or disable the appropriate
reference clock source.
The clock-controller circuitry on NTAK10 is identical to that of the
NTAK20. Note that while several DTI/PRI packs may exist in one system,
only one clock controller may be activated (all other DTI/PRI clock
controllers must be switched off).
Clocking modes
The clock controller can operate in one of two modes: tracking or non-
tracking (also known as free-run).
Tracking mode
There are two stages to clock controller tracking:
• tracking a reference, and
• locked onto a reference.
When tracking a reference, the clock controller uses an algorithm to match its
frequency to the frequency of the incoming clock. When the frequencies are
very near to being matched, the clock controller is locked onto the reference.
The clock controller will make small adjustments to its own frequency until
both the incoming and system frequencies correspond.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Page 475 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
If the incoming clock reference is stable, the internal clock controller will
track it, lock onto it, and match frequencies exactly. Occasionally, however,
environmental circumstances will cause the external or internal clocks to
drift. When this happens, the internal clock controller will briefly enter the
tracking stage. The green LED will flash momentarily until the clock
controller is locked onto the reference once again.
If the incoming reference is unstable, the internal clock controller will
continuously be in the tracking stage, with the LED flashing green all the
time. This condition does not present a problem, rather, it shows that the clock
controller is continually attempting to lock onto the signal. If slips are
occurring, however, it means that there is a problem with the clock controller
or the incoming line.
Free-run (non-tracking)
In free-run mode, the clock controller does not synchronize on any source, it
provides its own internal clock to the system. This mode can be used when
the Option 11C is used as a master clock source for other systems in the
network. Free-run mode is undesirable if the Option 11C is intended to be a
slave. It can occur, however, when both the primary and secondary clock
sources are lost due to hardware faults or when invoked by using software
commands.
Clock controller functions and features
The NTAK10 2MB DTI clock controller functions and features include:
• phase-locking to a reference, generating the 10.24 Mhz system clock,
and distributing it to the CPU through the backplane. Up to two
references at a time may be accepted.
• providing primary to secondary switchover and auto-recovery
• preventing chatter
• providing error burst detection and correction, holdover, and free
running capabilities
• complying with 2.0Mb CCITT specifications.
• communicating with software.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 476 of 544 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
• providing jitter filtering.
• making use of an algorithm to aid in detecting crystal aging and to
qualify clocking information.
Reference switchover
Switchover may occur in the case of reference degradation or reference
failure. When performance of the reference degrades to a point where the
system clock is no longer allowed to follow the timing signal, then the
reference will be said to be out of specification. If the reference being used is
out of specification and the other reference is still within specification, an
automatic switchover is initiated without software intervention. If both
references are out of specification, the clock controller provides holdover.
Autorecovery and chatter
If the software command “track to primary” is given, the clock controller
tracks to the primary reference and continuously monitors the quality of both
primary and secondary references. If the primary becomes out of
specification, the clock controller automatically tracks to secondary provided
that it is within specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the clock
controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors both
references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that recovers
first. If the secondary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the
secondary, but switches over to the primary whenever the primary recovers.
If the primary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the primary.
If the software command “track to secondary” is given, the clock controller
tracks to the secondary reference and continuously monitors the quality of
both primary and secondary references. If the secondary becomes out of
specification, the clock controller automatically tracks to primary provided
that it is within specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the clock
controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors both
references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that recovers
first. If the primary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the
primary, but switches over to the secondary whenever the secondary
recovers. If the secondary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the
secondary.
A time-out mechanism prevents chatter due to repeated automatic switching
between primary and secondary reference sources.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Page 477 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Reference clock selection via software
The 2MB DTI card has the necessary hardware for routing its reference to the
appropriate line on the backplane
Software is responsible for the distribution of the secondary references and
ensures that no contention is present on the REFCLK1 backplane line.
Software designates the 2MB DTI Card as a primary reference source to the
clock controller. The secondary reference is obtained from another 2 Mbps
DTI card, which is designated by a craft person. No other clocks originating
from other 2MB DTI packs are used.
The clock controller provides an external timing interface and is capable of
accepting two signals as timing references. In this case, an external reference
refers to an auxiliary timing source which is bridged from a traffic carrying
signal. This is not intended to be a dedicated non-traffic bearing timing signal.
The clock controller uses either the two external/auxiliary references or the
2MB DTI references.
Reference clock interface
The recovered clock derived from the facility is available on the MDF
connector. The signals at these connectors conform to the electrical
characteristics of the EIA RS-422 standard.
Switch settings
Various 2MB DTI switchable options exist on the NTAK10. These are:
Switch
Off
(Switch Open)
On
(Switch Closed)
S1-1 - -
S1-2 CC Enabled CC Disabled
S2-1 120 ohm 75 ohm
S2-2 75 ohm 120 ohm
S3-1 non-French Firmware French Firmware
S3-2 - -
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 478 of 544 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Note: The ON position for all the switches is towards the bottom of the
card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board adjacent to the
bottom left corner of each individual switch.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 479 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
492
Chapter 31 — NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
DS-30X interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Signaling interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Carrier interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Carrier grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
CEPT transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Slip control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
D-channel support interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Card-LAN interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Clock controller interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Overview
The NTAK79, which can be located in the main and IP expansion cabinets,
provides a 2.0 Mb PRI interface and an onboard D-channel handler (DCH)
for the Option 11C system. This circuit card also includes onboard circuitry
equivalent to the NTAK20 Clock Controller that can be manually switched in
or out of service.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 480 of 544 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Functional description
NTAK79 provides the following features and functions:
• recovery of the 2.048 kbps data by the CEPT receiver, at signal levels
which have been attenuated by up 10 dB
• control of CEPT line density using HDB3 which provides 64 kbps clear
channel
• performance monitoring of the receive carrier by means of Bipolar
Violations (BPV), Slips, CRC-4 (CRC), and Frame Bit Errors (FBER)
• monitoring of receive carrier alarms including AIS, LOS, and RAI
• transmission of remote alarm when instructed
• slip-buffering receive messages
• supporting National and International bits in time slot 0
• on-board clock controller
• onboard D-channel interface
• 32 software-selectable Tx & Rx Pad values
• conversion of PCM commanding Laws (A-A, u-u, A-u, u-A)
• Card-LAN for maintenance communications
Physical description
The NTAK79 uses a standard IPE-sized (9.5" by 12.5"), multilayer printed
circuit board. The faceplate is 7/8" wide and contains seven LEDs.
In general, the LEDs operate as shown in Table 148.
Table 148
NTAK79 LEDs (Part 1 of 2)
LED State Definition
OOS On (Red) The NTAK79 2MB PRI circuit card is either disabled
or out-of-service.
Off The NTAK79 2MB PRI is not in a disabled state.
ACT On (Green) The NTAK79 2MB PRI circuit card is in an active
state.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 481 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Power requirements
The NTAK79 obtains its power from the backplane, drawing maximums of 2
amps on +5 V, 50 mA on +12 V and 50 mA on -12 V.
Off The NTAK79 2MB PRI is not in a disabled state. The
OOS LED will be red.
RED On (Red) A red alarm state has been detected. This represents
a local alarm state of:
Loss of Carrier (LOS)
Loss of Frame (LFAS), or
Loss of CRC Multiframe (LMAS).
Off No red (local) alarm.
YEL On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected. This
represents a remote alarm indication from the far
end. The alarm may be either Alarm Indication (AIS)
or Remote Alarm (RAI).
Off No yellow (remote) alarm.
LBK On (Green) 2MB PRI is in loop-back mode.
Off 2MB PRI is not in loop-back mode.
CC On (Red) The clock controller is switched on and disabled.
On (Green) The clock controller is switched on and is either
locked to a reference or is in free run mode.
Flashing (Green) The clock controller is switched on and is attempting
to lock (tracking mode) to a reference. If the LED
flashes continuously over an extended period of
time, check the CC STAT in LD60. If the CC is
tracking this may be an acceptable state. Check for
slips and related clock controller error conditions. If
none exist, then this state is acceptable, and the
flashing is identifying jitter on the reference.
DCH On (Red) DCH is equipped and disabled.
On (Green) DCH is equipped and enabled, but not necessarily
established.
Off DCH is switched off.
Table 148
NTAK79 LEDs (Part 2 of 2)
LED State Definition
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 482 of 544 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Environment
The NTAK79 meets all applicable Nortel Network’s operating specifications.
Architecture
The main functional blocks of the NTAK79 architecture include:
• DS-30X interface
• A07 signaling interface
• digital pad
• carrier interface
• CEPT transceiver
• SLIP control
• D-Channel support interface
• 8031 microcontroller
• Card-LAN / echo / test port interface
A description of each block follows.
DS-30X interface
The NTAK79 interfaces to one DS-30X bus which contains 32 byte-
interleaved timeslots operating at 2.56 Mb. Each timeslot contains 10 bits in
A10 message format; 8 are assigned to voice/data (64 Kbps), one to signaling
(8 Kbps), and one is a data valid bit (8 Kbps).
The incoming serial bit stream is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes to be
directed to padding control.
The signaling bits are extracted and inserted by the A07 signaling interface
circuitry. Following is the mapping of the DS-30X timeslot number to the
PCM-30 channel number. Timeslots 0 and 16 are currently unused for PCM.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 483 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Digital PAD
Software selects A-law or Mu-Law and one of 32 possible PAD values for
each channel. These values are provided in a PROM through which the data
is routed. The idle code for A-law is 54H and for Mu-law is 7FH. The
unequipped code is FFH for both A-law and Mu-law. As the idle code and
unequipped code may be country dependent, the software instructs the
NTAK79 to use different codes for each direction. The 32 digital pads
available are illustrated below. The values shown are attenuation levels, i.e.
1.0dB is 1dB of loss and -1.0dB is 1db of gain.
Table 149
Digital Pad - values and offset allocations
PAD SET 0 PAD SET 1
Offset PAD Offset PAD
0 0.6 dB 0 0.0 dB
1 1.0 dB 1 -1.0 dB
2 2.0 dB 2 -2.0 dB
3 3.0 dB 3 -3.0 dB
4 4.0 dB 4 -4.0 dB
5 5.0 dB 5 -5.0 dB
6 6.1 dB 6 -6.0 dB
7 7.0 dB 7 -7.0 dB
8 8.0 dB 8 -8.0 dB
9 9.0 dB 9 -9.0 dB
10 10.0 dB 10 -10.0 dB
11 11.0 dB 11 spare
12 12.0 dB 12 spare
13 13.0 dB 13 spare
14 14.0 dB 14 Idle Code
15 spare 15 Unassigned Code
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 484 of 544 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Signaling interface
The Meridian 1 signaling interface consists of the A07 DS-30X signaling
controller. This interface provides an 8 Kbps signaling link via the DS-30X
timeslot zero data bit zero. Messages are 3 bytes in length.
Carrier interface
For the E-1 interface, the connection to the external digital carrier is provided
by the line interface chip. This device provides accurate pulse shaping to meet
the CCITT pulse mask requirements. It provides clock recovery functions on
the receive side as well as tolerance to jitter and wander in the received bit
stream.
Impedance matching
The line interface provides for the use of either 75ohm coaxial or 120ohm
twisted pair cable. The impedance is selected by a switch, as shown in the
settings table below.
Note: The ON position for all the switches is towards the bottom of the
card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board adjacent to the
bottom left corner of each individual switch.
Table 150
Impedance matching switch selection
Cable On Off
75 Ohm S2 S1
120 Ohm S1 S2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 485 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Carrier grounding
NTAK79 provides for the capability of selectively grounding the shield of the
Tx and/or Rx pairs of the carrier. Closing (down) the on-board switch will
apply FGND to the appropriate carrier cable shield. The switch settings are
shown below.
Receiver functions
The receiver extracts data and clock from an AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion)
coded signal and outputs clock and synchronized data. The receiver is
sensitive to signals over the entire range of cable lengths and requires no
equalization. The clock and data recovery meets or exceeds the jitter
specifications of the CCITT recommendation G.823 and the jitter attenuation
requirements of CCITT recommendation G.742. This provides jitter
attenuation increasing from 0 dB to 60 dB over the frequency range from
about 6 Hz to 6 KHz.
Transmitter functions
The transmitter takes the binary (dual unipolar) data from the PCM
transceiver and produces bipolar pulses which conform to CCITT
recommendation G.703 pulse shape.
Loopbacks
The remote loopback function causes the device to transmit the same data that
it receives using the jitter attenuated receive clock. The data is additionally
available at the receive data outputs. Local loopback causes the transmit data
and clock to appear at the receive clock and data outputs. This data is also
transmitted on the line unless transmit AIS is selected.
Table 151
Carrier shield grounding switch settings
Switch Carrier Pair On Off
S4-1 Rx shield Open GND
S4-2 Tx shield Open GND
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 486 of 544 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
CEPT transceiver
The transmitter and receiver functions are used for synchronization, channel,
and signal extraction. The functions meet applicable specifications of the
CCITT recommendation G.703 & G.732.
The transceiver provides transmit framing based on the 2.048 MHz clock
derived from the DS-30X system clock and 1KHZ framing pulse.
Slip control
Slip control provides organized recovery of PCM when the clock recovered
from the external facility is at a different frequency with respect to the local
clock.
D-channel support interface
The D-channel support interface is a 64 kbps, full-duplex serial bit stream
configured as a DCE device. The data signals include: (1) Receive data
output, (2) transmit data input, (3) receive clock output, and (4) transmit clock
output. The receive and transmit clocks can be of slightly different bit rates
from each other as determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks.
The NTAK79 has an onboard D-channel handler interface (DCHI). It is the
equivalent to a single port of an NTAK02 SDI/DCH pack. This allows for a
completely operational ISDN PRA link with clock synchronization and D-
channel on a single circuit card.
The onboard D-channel has one status LED on the NTAK79 faceplate to
indicate enabled/disabled states. (See Table 148).
The on-board DCHI can be operated in two separate modes as defined by an
on-board dip switch. It can operate in a standard DCHI mode common to
most ISDN standard countries. It can also operate in an U.K. specific mode
using the DPNSS format.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 487 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
DCHI special applications connection
The connection between the PRI2 and the on-board D-Channel Handler
Interface card is also available at the MDF connector. The signals confirm to
the EIA RS-422 standard. Connections would not be made to these pins for
normal on-board DCHI operation. They are available for future or special
applications.
Card-LAN interface
A Dual Port UART handles the functions of the serial ports for the Card-LAN
serial link and the echo canceller/test port interface. The echo/test interface is
an asynchronous 4800 bps 8-bit connected to port A of the UART. The card-
LAN interface is an asynchronous 19.2 kbps 9 bit start/stop connected to port
B of the UART.
The connection to the echo canceler/test port is available at the backplane/
MDF connector. The signals at this port conform to the EIA RS-232C.
Clock controller interface
The clock controller circuitry on the NTAK79 is identical to that of the
NTAK20 clock controller.
Note that while several DTI/PRI packs may exist in one system, only one
clock controller may be activated (all other DTI/PRI clock controllers must
be switched off).
Clocking modes
The clock controller can operate in one of two modes: tracking or non-
tracking (also known as free-run).
Table 152
Settings for the DCHI dip switch (SW1)
Switch Function On Off
S1-1 En/Dis Enabled Disabled
S1-2 F/W Mode DPNSS DCHI
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 488 of 544 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Tracking mode
There are two stages to clock controller tracking:
• tracking a reference, and
• locked onto a reference.
When tracking a reference, the clock controller uses an algorithm to match its
frequency to the frequency of the incoming clock. When the frequencies are
very near to being matched, the clock controller is locked onto the reference.
The clock controller will make small adjustments to its own frequency until
both the incoming and system frequencies correspond.
If the incoming clock reference is stable, the internal clock controller will
track it, lock onto it, and match frequencies exactly. Occasionally, however,
environmental circumstances will cause the external or internal clocks to
drift. When this happens, the internal clock controller will briefly enter the
tracking stage. The green LED will flash momentarily until the clock
controller is locked onto the reference once again.
If the incoming reference is unstable, the internal clock controller will
continuously be in the tracking stage, with the LED flashing green all the
time. This condition does not present a problem, rather, it shows that the clock
controller is continually attempting to lock onto the signal. If slips are
occurring, however, it means that there is a problem with the clock controller
or the incoming line.
Free-run (non-tracking)
In free-run mode, the clock controller does not synchronize on any source, it
provides its own internal clock to the system. This mode can be used when
the Option 11C is used as a master clock source for other systems in the
network. Free-run mode is undesirable if the Option 11C is intended to be a
slave. It can occur, however, when both the primary and secondary clock
sources are lost due to hardware faults or when invoked by using software
commands.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 489 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Clock controller functions and features
The NTAK79 clock controller functions and features include:
• phase lock to a reference, generate the 10.24 Mhz system clock, and
distribute it to the CPU through the backplane. Up to two references at a
time may be accepted.
• provide primary to secondary switchover (auto-recovery is provided)
• prevent chatter
• provide error burst detection and correction, holdover, and free running
capabilities
• comply with 2.0Mb CCITT specifications
• communicate with software
• provide jitter filtering
• make use of an algorithm to aid in detecting crystal aging and to qualify
clocking information
Reference switchover
Switchover may occur in the case of reference degradation or reference
failure. When performance of the reference degrades to a point where the
system clock is no longer allowed to follow the timing signal, then the
reference will be said to be out of specification. If the reference being used is
out of specification and the other reference is still within specification, an
automatic switchover is initiated without software intervention. If both
references are out of specification, the clock controller provides holdover.
Autorecovery and chatter
If the software command “track to primary” is given, the clock controller
tracks to the primary reference and continuously monitors the quality of both
primary and secondary references. If the primary becomes out of
specification, the clock controller automatically tracks to secondary provided
that it is within specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the clock
controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors both
references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that recovers
first. If the secondary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the
secondary, but switches over to the primary when the primary recovers. If the
primary recovers first, the clock controller tracks to the primary.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 490 of 544 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
If the software command “track to secondary” is given, the clock controller
tracks to the secondary reference and continuously monitors the quality of
both primary and secondary references. If the secondary becomes out of
specification, the clock controller automatically tracks to primary provided
that it is within specifications. On failure (both out of spec.), the clock
controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors both
references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that recovers
first. If the primary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the
primary, but switches over to the secondary whenever the secondary
recovers. If the secondary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the
secondary.
A time-out mechanism prevents chatter due to repeated automatic switching
between primary and secondary reference sources.
Holdover and free-run
In the temporary absence of a synchronization reference signal, or when
sudden changes occur on the incoming reference due to error bursts, the clock
controller provides a stable holdover. The free-run mode is initiated when the
clock controller has no record of the quality of the incoming reference clock.
If the software command “free run” is given, the clock controller enters the
free-run mode and remains there until a new command is received. Note that
the free-run mode of operation is automatically initiated after the clock
controller is enabled.
Reference clock selection via software
The NTAK79 has the necessary hardware for routing its reference to the
appropriate line on the backplane
Software is responsible for the distribution of the secondary references and
ensures that no contention is present on the REFCLK1 backplane line.
Software designates the NTAK79 as a primary reference source to the clock
controller. The secondary reference is obtained from another NTAK79 card,
which is designated by a craft person. No other clocks originating from other
NTAK79 circuit cards are used.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 491 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
The clock controller provides an external timing interface and is capable of
accepting two signals as timing references. In this case, an external reference
refers to an auxiliary timing source which is bridged from a traffic carrying
signal. This is not intended to be a dedicated non-traffic bearing timing signal.
The clock controller uses either the two external/auxiliary references or the
NTAK79 references.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 492 of 544 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 493 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
502
Chapter 32 — NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
DS-30X interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Signaling interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Carrier interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Carrier grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
CEPT transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Slip control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
D-channel support interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Card-LAN interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 494 of 544 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Overview
The NTBK50 card provides a 2Mb PRI interface and is installed in the main
and IP expansion cabinets. The NTBK50 supports the NTAK20 clock
controller daughterboard and either the NTAK93 D-Channel interface or the
NTBK51 Downloadable D-Channel handler. The NTAK93 DCHI
daughterboard provides identical performance to the on-board NTAK79
DCHI. The NTBK51 DDCH daughterboard provides support for protocols
based on the MSDL platform.
Functional description
NTBK50 provides the following features and functions:
• recovery of the 2.048 kbps data by the CEPT receiver, at signal levels
which have been attenuated by up to 10 dB
• control of CEPT line density using HDB3 which provides 64 kbps clear
channel
• performance monitoring of the receive carrier by means of Bipolar
Violations (BPV), Slips, CRC-4 (CRC), and Frame Bit Errors (FBER)
• monitoring of receive carrier alarms including AIS, LOS, and RAI
• transmission of remote alarm when instructed
• slip-buffering receive messages
• support of National and International bits in time slot 0
• clock controller daughterboard
• D-channel interface daughterboard
• Downloadable D-channel handler daughterboard
• 32 software-selectable Tx and Rx Pad values
• conversion of PCM commanding Laws (A-A, u-u, A-u, u-A)
• Card-LAN for maintenance communications
Physical description
The NTBK50 uses a standard IPE-sized (9.5" by 12.5"), multilayer printed
circuit board. The faceplate is 7/8" wide and contains seven LEDs.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 495 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
In general, the LEDs operate as shown in Table 153.
Table 153
NTBK50 faceplate LEDs (Part 1 of 2)
LED State Definition
OOS On (Red) The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI circuit card is either
disabled or out-of-service. Also, the state of the card
after power-up, completion of self test, and exiting
remote loopback.
Off The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI is not in a disabled state.
ACT On (Green) The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI circuit card is in an active
state.
Off The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI is in a disabled state. The
OOS LED is red.
RED On (Red) A red alarm state has been detected. This
represents a local alarm state of Loss of Carrier
(LOS), Loss of Frame (LFAS) or Loss of CRC
Multiframe (LMAS).
Off No red (local) alarm.
YEL On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected. This
represents a remote alarm indication from the far
end. The alarm may be either Alarm Indication (AIS)
or Remote Alarm (RAI).
Off No yellow (remote) alarm.
LBK On (Green) 2.0 Mb PRI is in loop-back mode.
Off 2.0 Mb PRI is not in loop-back mode
CC On (Red) The clock controller is software disabled
On (Green) The clock controller is enabled and is either locked
to a reference or is in free run mode
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 496 of 544 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Power requirements
The NTBK50 obtains its power from the backplane, drawing maximums of
2 amps on +5 V, 35 mA on +15 V and 20 mA on -15 V.
Environment
The NTBK50 meets all applicable Nortel Networks operating specifications.
Architecture
The main functional blocks of the NTBK50 architecture include:
• DS-30X interface
• A07 signaling interface
• digital pad
• carrier interface
• CEPT transceiver
• SLIP control
• D-channel support interface
Flashing (Green) NTAK20 is equipped and is attempting to lock
(tracking mode) to a reference. If the LED flashes
continuously over an extended period of time, check
the CC STAT in LD60. If the CC is tracking this may
be an acceptable state. Check for slips and related
clock controller error conditions. If none exist, then
this state is acceptable, and the flashing is
identifying jitter on the reference.
Off The clock controller is not equipped.
DCH On (Red) DCH is disabled.
On (Green) DCH is enabled, but not necessarily established.
Off DCH is not equipped.
Table 153
NTBK50 faceplate LEDs (Part 2 of 2)
LED State Definition
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 497 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
• clock controller interface
• Card-LAN / echo / test port interface
• 80C51FA Microcontroller
A description of each block follows.
DS-30X interface
NTBK50 interfaces to one DS-30X bus which contains 32 byte-interleaved
timeslots operating at 2.56 Mb. Each timeslot contains 10 bits in A10
message format; 8 are assigned to voice/data (64 Kbps), one to signaling
(8 Kbps), and one is a data valid bit (8 Kbps).
The incoming serial bit stream is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes to be
directed to padding control. The signaling bits are extracted and inserted by
the A07 signaling interface circuitry. Timeslots 0 and 16 are currently unused
for PCM.
Digital PAD
Software selects A-law or Mu-Law and one of 32 possible PAD values for
each channel. These values are provided in a PROM through which the data
is routed. The idle code for A-law is 54H and for Mu-law is 7FH. The
unequipped code is FFH for both A-law and Mu-law.
As the idle code and unequipped code may be country dependent, the
software instructs the NTBK50 to use different codes for each direction. The
32 digital pads available are illustrated in Table 154 on page 498. The values
shown are attenuation levels (1.0dB is 1dB of loss and -1.0dB is 1db of gain).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 498 of 544 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Signaling interface
The Meridian 1 signaling interface consists of the A07 DS-30X signaling
controller. This interface provides an 8 Kbps signaling link via the DS-30X
timeslot zero data bit zero. Messages are 3 bytes in length.
Table 154
Digital Pad - values and offset allocations
PAD SET 0 PAD SET 1
Offset PAD Offset PAD
0 0.6 dB 0 0.0 dB
1 1.0 dB 1 -1.0 dB
2 2.0 dB 2 -2.0 dB
3 3.0 dB 3 -3.0 dB
4 4.0 dB 4 -4.0 dB
5 5.0 dB 5 -5.0 dB
6 6.1 dB 6 -6.0 dB
7 7.0 dB 7 -7.0 dB
8 8.0 dB 8 -8.0 dB
9 9.0 dB 9 -9.0 dB
10 10.0 dB 10 -10.0 dB
11 11.0 dB 11 spare
12 12.0 dB 12 spare
13 13.0 dB 13 spare
14 14.0 dB 14 Idle Code
15 spare 15 Unassigned Code
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 499 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Carrier interface
For the E-1 interface, the connection to the external digital carrier is provided
by the line interface chip. This device provides accurate pulse shaping to meet
the CCITT pulse mask requirements. It provides clock recovery functions on
the receive side as well as tolerance to jitter and wander in the received bit
stream.
Impedance matching (Switch SW2)
The line interface provides for the use of either 75ohm coaxial or 120ohm
twisted pair cable. The impedance is selected by SW2, as shown in the
settings table below.
Note: The ON position for all the switches is towards the bottom of the
card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board adjacent to the
bottom left corner of each individual switch.
Carrier grounding
NTBK50 provides for the capability of selectively grounding the shield of the
Tx and/or Rx pairs of the carrier. Closing (down) the on-board switch will
apply FGND to the appropriate carrier cable shield. The switch settings are
shown below.
Table 155
Impedance matching switch settings
Cable Type SW 2-1
75¾ Down (On)
120¾ Up (Off)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 500 of 544 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Carrier Shield grounding (Switch SW4)
Settings are shown in the Table below.
Note: The usual method is to ground the outer conductor of the receive
coax signal.
Receiver functions
The receiver extracts data and clock from an AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion)
coded signal and outputs clock and synchronized data. The receiver is
sensitive to signals over the entire range of cable lengths and requires no
equalization. The clock and data recovery meets or exceeds the jitter
specifications of the CCITT recommendation G.823 and the jitter attenuation
requirements of CCITT recommendation G.742. This provides jitter
attenuation increasing from 0 dB to 60 dB over the frequency range from
about 6 Hz to 6 KHz.
Transmitter functions
The transmitter takes the binary (dual unipolar) data from the PCM
transceiver and produces bipolar pulses which conform to CCITT
recommendation G.703 pulse shape.
Loopbacks
The remote loopback function causes the device to transmit the same data that
it receives using the jitter attenuated receive clock. The data is additionally
available at the receive data outputs. Local loopback causes the transmit data
and clock to appear at the receive clock and data outputs. This data is also
transmitted on the line unless transmit AIS is selected.
Table 156
Carrier shield grounding switch settings
Switch Down (On) Up (Off)
SW 4-1 Rx—FGND Rx—OPEN
SW 4-2 Tx—FGND Tx—OPEN
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 501 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
CEPT transceiver
The transmitter and receiver functions are used for synchronization, channel,
and signal extraction. The functions meet applicable specifications of the
CCITT recommendation G.703 & G.732.
The transceiver provides transmit framing based on the 2.048 MHz clock
derived from the DS-30X system clock and 1KHZ framing pulse.
Slip control
Slip control provides organized recovery of PCM when the clock recovered
from the external facility is at a different frequency with respect to the local
clock.
D-channel support interface
The D-channel support interface is a 64 kbps, full-duplex serial bit stream
configured as a DCE device. The data signals include: (1) Receive data
output, (2) transmit data input, (3) receive clock output, and (4) transmit clock
output. The receive and transmit clocks can be of slightly different bit rates
from each other as determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks.
The NTBK50 supports a daughterboard D-channel handler interface (DCHI).
It is the equivalent to a single port of an NTAK02 SDI/DCH card. As well,
the NTBK50 supports a Downloadable D-channel handler interface (DDCH).
It will bring the MSDL D-channel capability into the Option 11C system.
DCHI Configuration for NTAK93 only (SW1)
The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard can be operated in two separate modes as
defined by an on-board dip switch. It can operate in a standard DCHI mode
common to most ISDN standard countries. It can also operate in a U.K.
specific mode using the DPNSS format. The DDCH will support only a single
port which will directly interface to the PRI motherboard.
Table 157
Settings for the DCHI dip switch (SW1)
Switch Function On Off
S1-1 — — —
S1-2 F/W Mode DPNSS DCHI
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 502 of 544 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Card-LAN interface
A Dual Port UART handles the functions of the serial ports for the Card-LAN
serial link test port interface. The test interface is an asynchronous 4800 bps
8 bit connected to port A of the UART. The card-LAN interface is an
asynchronous 19.2 kbps 9 bit start/stop connected to port B of the UART.
The connection to the test port is available at the backplane/MDF connector.
The signals at this port conform to the EIA RS-232C standard.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 503 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
512
Chapter 33 — NTAK20 clock controller
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Clocking modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Faceplate LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Phase difference detector circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Digital phase lock loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Digital to analog converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
CPU-MUX bus interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Signal conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Sanity timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Microprocessor . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
External timing interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Hardware integrity and regulatory environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Overview
The NTAK20 clock controller daughterboard mounts directly on the
following cards:
• NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card (page 447)
• NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card (page 493)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 504 of 544 NTAK20 clock controller
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
• NTBK22 MISP card (page 261)
• NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card (page 461)
It is consequently located in slots 1 to 9 of the main and IP expansion cabinets
and can support 1.5 Mb, 2.0 Mb, and 2.56 Mb clock recovery rates
Note: The card is restricted to slots 1 through 3 in EMC- type cabinets
(such as NAK11Dx and NTAK11Fx cabinets). It will not work in slots 4
through 10 in these cabinets.
NTAK20 provides the following features and functions:
• phase lock to a reference, generation of the 10.24 Mhz system clock, and
distribution of the clock to the CPU through the backplane
• accepts one primary and one secondary reference
• primary-to-secondary switchover and auto-recovery
• chatter prevention due to repeated switching
• error-burst detection and correction, holdover, and free running
capabilities
• communication with software
• jitter filtering
• use of an algorithm to aid in detecting crystal aging and to qualify
clocking information
Clocking modes
The clock controller can operate in one of two modes: tracking or non-
tracking (also known as free-run).
IMPORTANT
If an IP Expansion multi-cabinet system is equipped with digital trunk
cards, it is mandatory that at least one trunk card is placed in the Main
Option 11C cabinet. A cabinet that has a digital trunk must have a
clock controller.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTAK20 clock controller Page 505 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Tracking mode
There are two stages to clock controller tracking:
• tracking a reference
• locking on to a reference.
When tracking a reference, the clock controller uses an algorithm to match its
frequency to the frequency of the incoming clock. When the frequencies are
very near to being matched, the clock controller is locked on to the reference.
The clock controller will make small adjustments to its own frequency until
both the incoming and system frequencies correspond.
If the incoming clock reference is stable, the internal clock controller will
track it, lock on to it, and match frequencies exactly. Occasionally, however,
environmental circumstances will cause the external or internal clocks to
drift. When this happens, the internal clock controller will briefly enter the
tracking stage. The green LED will flash momentarily until the clock
controller is locked on to the reference once again.
If the incoming reference is unstable, the internal clock controller will
continuously be in the tracking stage, with the LED flashing green all the
time. This condition does not present a problem, rather, it shows that the clock
controller is continually attempting to lock onto the signal. If slips are
occurring, however, it means that there is a problem with the clock controller
or the incoming line.
Free-run (non-tracking)
In free-run mode, the clock controller does not synchronize on any source, it
provides its own internal clock to the system. This mode can be used when
the Option 11C is used as a master clock source for other systems in the
network. Free-run mode is undesirable if the Option 11C is intended to be a
slave. It can occur, however, when both the primary and secondary clock
sources are lost due to hardware faults or when invoked by using software
commands.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 506 of 544 NTAK20 clock controller
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Physical description
Faceplate LEDs
Each of the motherboards have 5 DTI/PRI LEDs and one clock controller
LED. The CC LED is dual-color (red and green), with states represented as
follows:
Functional description
The main functional blocks of the NTAK20 architecture include:
• phase difference detector circuit
• digital phase-lock loop
• clock detection circuit
• digital-to-analog converter
• CPU MUX bus interface
• signal conditioning drivers and buffers
• sanity timer
• microprocessor
Table 158
Faceplate LEDs
State Definition
On (Red) NTAK20 is equipped and disabled.
On (Green) NTAK20 is equipped, enabled, and is either locked to a reference or is in
free run mode.
Flashing (Green) NTAK20 is equipped and is attempting to lock (tracking mode) to a
reference. If the LED flashes continuously over an extended period of time,
check the CC STAT in LD60. If the CC is tracking this may be an
acceptable state. Check for slips and related clock controller error
conditions. If none exist, then this state is acceptable, and the flashing is
identifying jitter on the reference.
Off NTAK20 is not equipped.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTAK20 clock controller Page 507 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
• CPU interface
• external timing interface
A description of each block follows.
Phase difference detector circuit
This circuit, under firmware control, allows a phase difference measurement
to be taken between the reference entering the PLL and the system clock.
The phase difference is used for making frequency measurements, and
evaluating input jitter and PLL performance.
Digital phase lock loops
The main digital PLL enables the clock controller. to provide a system clock
to the CPU. This clock is both phase and frequency locked to a known
incoming reference.
The hardware has a locking range of + 4.6 ppm for Stratum 3ND and
+ 50 ppm for Stratum 4 (CCITT).
A second PLL on board the clock controller provides the means for
monitoring another reference. Note that the error signal of this PLL is routed
to the phase difference detector circuit so the microprocessor can process it.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 508 of 544 NTAK20 clock controller
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
System clock specification and characteristics
Since the accuracy requirements for CCITT and EIA Stratum 3ND are so
different, it is necessary to have two TCVCXO which feature different values
of frequency tuning sensitivity.
EIA/CCITT compliance
The clock controller complies with 1.5 Mb EIA Stratum 3ND, 2.0 Mb CCITT
or 2.56 basic rate. The differences between these requirements mainly affect
PLL pull in range. Stratum 4 conforms to international markets (2.0Mb) while
stratum 3 conforms to North American market. (1.5 Mb).
Monitoring references
The primary and secondary synchronization references are continuously
monitored in order to provide autorecovery.
Reference switchover
Switchover may occur in the case of reference degradation or loss of signal.
When performance of the reference degrades to a point where the system
clock is no longer allowed to follow the timing signal, then the reference is
out of specification. If the reference being used is out of specification and the
other reference is still within specification, an automatic switchover is
initiated without software intervention. If both references are out of
specification, the clock controller provides holdover.
Table 159
System clock specification and characteristics
Specifications CCITT EIA
Base Frequency 20.48 MHz 20.48 MHz
Accuracy + 3 ppm + 1 ppm
Operating Temperature 0 to 70 C + 1 ppm 0 to 70 C + 1 ppm
Drift Rate (Aging) + 1 ppm per year + 4 ppm in 20 years
Tuning Range (minimum) + 60 ppm min.
+ 90 ppm max.
+ 10 ppm min.
+ 15 ppm max.
Input Voltage Range 0 to 10 volts, 5V center 0 to 10 volts, 5V center
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTAK20 clock controller Page 509 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Autorecovery and chatter
If the command “track to primary” is given, the clock controller tracks to the
primary reference and continuously monitors the quality of both primary and
secondary references. If the primary goes out of specification, the clock
controller automatically tracks to secondary if that is within specifications.
On failure (both out of specification), the clock controller enters the
HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors both references. An
automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that recovers first. If the
secondary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the secondary, but
will switch over to the primary when the primary recovers. If the primary
recovers first, the clock controller tracks to the primary and continues to do
so even if the secondary recovers.
If the command “track to secondary” is given, the clock controller tracks to
the secondary reference and continuously monitors the quality of both
primary and secondary references. If the secondary goes out of specification,
the clock controller automatically tracks to primary provided that is within
specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the clock controller
enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors both references. An
automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that recovers first. If the
primary recovers first, the clock controller tracks to the primary, but switches
over to the secondary when the secondary recovers. If the secondary recovers
first, the clock controller tracks to the secondary and continues to do so even
if the primary recovers.
To prevent chatter due to repeated automatic switching between primary and
secondary reference sources, a time-out mechanism of at least 10 seconds is
implemented.
Digital to analog converter
The DAC (digital to analog converter) allows the microprocessor to track,
hold, and modify the error signal generated in the digital PLL.
The firmware uses the available memory on board the clock controller to
provide error-burst detection and correction. Temporary holdover occurs in
the momentary absence of the reference clock.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 510 of 544 NTAK20 clock controller
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Holdover and free-run
In the temporary absence of a synchronization reference signal, or when
sudden changes occur on the incoming reference due to error bursts, the clock
controller provides a stable holdover. The free-run mode is initiated when the
clock controller has no record of the quality of the incoming reference clock
If the command “free run” is given, the clock controller enters the free-run
mode and remains there until a new command is received. Note that the free-
run mode of operation automatically initiates after the clock controller has
been enabled.
CPU-MUX bus interface
A parallel I/O port on the clock controller. provides a communication channel
between the clock controller and the CPU.
Signal conditioning
Drivers and buffers are provided for all outgoing and incoming lines.
Sanity timer
The sanity timer resets the microprocessor in the event of system hang-up.
Microprocessor
The microprocessor does the following:
• communicates with software
• monitors 2 references
• provides a self-test during initialization
• minimizes the propagation of impairments on the system clock due to
errors on the primary or secondary reference clocks
Reference Clock Selection
The DTI/PRI card routes its reference to the appropriate line on the
backplane. The clock controller distributes the primary and secondary
references and ensures that no contention is present on the REFCLK1
backplane line. It designates the DTI/PRI mother board as a primary
reference source. The secondary reference is obtained from another DTI/PRI
card, which is designated by a craft person. No other clock sources are used.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTAK20 clock controller Page 511 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
External timing interface
The clock controller provides an external timing interface and can accept two
signals as timing references. An external reference is an auxiliary timing
clock which is bridged from a traffic carrying signal and is not intended to be
a dedicated non-traffic-bearing timing signal. The clock controller uses either
the external/auxiliary references or the DTI/PRI references.
Hardware integrity and regulatory environment
The clock controller complies with the following hardware integrity and
regulatory specifications:
EMI FCC part 15 sub- part J
CSA C108.8
CISPR publication 22
ESD IEC 801-2
Temperature IEC 68-2-1
IEC 68-2-2
IEC 68-2-14
Humidity IEC 68-2-3
Vibration/Shock IEC 68-2-6
IEC 68-2-7
IEC 68-2-29
IEC 68-2-31
IEC 68-2-32
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 512 of 544 NTAK20 clock controller
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 513 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
518
Chapter 34 — NTAK93 D-channel handler
interface
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Features and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Faceplate LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Microprocessors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
DMA controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Random Access Memory (RAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Read Only Memory (ROM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
LAPD Data Link/Asynchronous Controller . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Counter/Timer controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Software interface circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
DPNSS/DCHI Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
D-Port — SDTI/PRI interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 514 of 544 NTAK93 D-channel handler interface
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Overview
The NTAK93 provides D-channel handler interfaces required by the ISDN
PRI trunk. It performs D-channel layer 2 message processing and layer 3
preprocessing. It is a daughterboard that mounts to the NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/
PRI card or NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card using standoff reference pins and
connectors.
Features and functions
NTAK93 provides the following features and functions:
• D-channel or DPNSS interface
• special features included for LAPD implementation at DCH:
— system parameters are service changeable (system parameters are
downloaded from software)
— incoming Layer 3 message validation procedures are implemented
in the D-PORT firmware
— supported message units and information elements may be service
changed
— translation of the CCITT message types information elements into a
proprietary coding scheme for faster CPU operation
— convention of IA5-encoded digits to BCD-encoded digits for
incoming layer 3 messages for faster CPU operation
— self-test
— loopback
Physical description
The DCH function can be located in the main and IP expansion cabinets. The
DTI/PRI card which carries a DCH daughterboard resides in the main and IP
expansion cabinets.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTAK93 D-channel handler interface Page 515 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Faceplate LEDs
NTAK09 1.5 Mb PRI and NTBK50 2.0 MB PRI cards
LEDs are located on the faceplate of the NTAK09 and NTBK50 cards. The
DCH LED is dual-color (red and green), with states represented as follows:
Power consumption
Power consumption is +5V at 750mA; +12V at 5mA; and -12V at 5mA.
Functional description
The main functional blocks of the NTAK93 architecture include the
following.
Microprocessors
One microprocessor handles data transfer between each pair of serial ports
and software, reports the status of each port and takes commands from
software to control the activities of the ports. The microprocessors also do
some of D-channel data processing in DCHI mode.
DMA controller
A Z80A-DMA chip controls the data transfer between local RAM memory
and communication ports. Note that the DMA channels will only be used in
the receive direction (from line to CPU), not in the transmit direction.
Random Access Memory (RAM)
A total of 32K bytes of RAM space for each pair of ports is used as the
communication buffer and firmware data storage.
Table 160
Faceplate LEDs
State Definition
On (Red) NTAK93 is equipped and disabled.
On (Green) NTAK93 is equipped and enabled, but not necessarily established.
Off NTAK93 is not equipped.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 516 of 544 NTAK93 D-channel handler interface
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Read Only Memory (ROM)
A total of 32K bytes of ROM space for each pair of ports is reserved as a code
section of the DCH-PORT firmware.
LAPD Data Link/Asynchronous Controller
One chip controls each pair of independent communication ports. It performs
the functions of serial-to-parallel and parallel-to-serial conversions, error
detection, frame recognition (in HDLC) function. The parameters of these
functions are supplied by the DCH-PORT firmware.
Counter/Timer controller
Two chips are used as real-time timers and baud-rate generators for each pair
of communication ports.
Software interface circuit
This portion of the circuit handles address/data bus multiplexing, the
interchange of data, commands, and status between the on board processors
and software. It includes transmit buffer, receive buffer, command register,
and status register for each communication channel.
DPNSS/DCHI Port
The mode of operation of the DCH-PORT is controlled by a switch setting on
the NTAK09/NTBK50. For DPNSS the switch is ON; for DCHI it is OFF.
The port will operate at:
The address of ports is selected by hardwired backplane card address.
Port characteristics and LAPD parameters are downloaded from
software.
Data Rate 56kbps, 64kbps
Duplex Full
Clock Internal / External
Interface RS422
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTAK93 D-channel handler interface Page 517 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
D-Port — SDTI/PRI interface
Below is a brief description of signals. When connected to SDTI/PRI, DCH-
PORT is to be DTE.
• SDA, SDB: Transmit Clock provided by SDTI/PRI
• RTA, RTB: Receive Clock provided by SDTI/PRI
• RR, CS: SPDC ready signal provided by DCH-PORT
• TR: D-PORT ready signal provided by DCH-PORT
• RDA, RDB: Incoming serial data bit stream, driven by SDTI/PRI
• SDA, SDB: Transmit serial data bit stream driven by DCH-PORT
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 518 of 544 NTAK93 D-channel handler interface
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 519 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
524
Chapter 35 — NTBK51 Downloadable
D-channel handler
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Features and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Microprocessors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Main Memory . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Shared Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
EPROM Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Flash EPROM Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
EEPROM Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Serial Communication Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Sanity Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Bus Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Download Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
System Initialization . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Card enabling or application enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Card reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Background audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 520 of 544 NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel handler
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Overview
The NTBK51 provides Downloadable D-channel handler (DDCH) interfaces
based on the Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL). The DDCH provides a
single purpose full-duplex serial port capable of downloading the D-channel
application and base software into the card.
Features and functions
The NTBK51 provides the following features and functions:
• ISDN D-channel related protocol
• Selftest
• Loopback
• D-channel loadware including:
— management and maintenance
— LAPD- software for data link layer processing
— Meridian 1 DCH interface
— layer 3 preprocessor
— traffic reporting including link capacity
Physical description
The Downloadable D-channel (NTBK51) is a daughterboard that mounts on
either the NTAK09 1.5 DTI/PRI or the NTBK50 2 Mb PRI card. The DDCH,
in conjunction with the NTAK09/NTBK50 circuit card, can reside in any
physical slot 1-9 of the main cabinet and 11-19, 21-29, 31-39, or 41-49 of an
IP Expansion cabinet.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel handler Page 521 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
LEDs are located on the faceplate of the NTAK09/NTBK50 card. The DCH
LED is a dual-color (red/green), with the states represented as follows:
Functional description
The main functional blocks of the NTBK51 architecture include the
following:
• Microprocessors
• Main memory
• Shared memory
• EPROM memory
• Flash EPROM memory
• EEPROM memory
• Serial communication controller
• Sanity timer
• Bus timer
Microprocessors
One microprocessor handles data transfer between each serial interface and
software, reports the status of each port and takes commands from software
to control the activities of the ports. A high performance MPU supports the
D-channel from the PRI card and other software applications running
simultaneously on other ports of the DDCH card.
Table 161
Faceplate LEDs
State Definition
On (Red) NTBK51 is disabled.
On (Green) NTBK51 is enabled, but not necessarily established
Off NTBK51 is not equipped.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 522 of 544 NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel handler
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
The microprocessor performs the following functions:
• Sanity check and self tests
• Message handling between the Option 11C and the card
• Four port serial communication controller handling with DMA
• Program download from Option 11C CPU
Main Memory
The main 68EC020 system memory is comprised of 1 Mbyte of SRAM and
may be accessed in either 8 or 16 bits. The software, base code and
application, resides in main RAM and is downloaded from software through
the shared memory.
Shared Memory
The shared memory is the interface between the Option 11C CPU and the
68EC020 MPU. This memory is a 16 Kbyte RAM, expandable to 64 Kbytes
and accessible in either 8 or 16 bits.
EPROM Memory
The Bootstrap code resides in this 27C1000 EPROM and is executed on
power up or reset.
Flash EPROM Memory
Flash EPROM provides non volatile storage for the DDCH loadware which
will minimize the impact to sysload. The Flash EPROM, in reference to
current devices, provides an increase in system service with a reduced delay
after a brown-out and faster testing of a hardware pack after it is plugged in.
EEPROM Memory
The DDCH uses a 1,024 bit serial EEPROM for storing the NT product code
and a revision level. This information can be queried by software.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel handler Page 523 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Serial Communication Controller
The serial controller is the Zilog Z16C35 and is referenced as the Integrated
Controller (ISCC). The ISCC includes a flexible Bus Interface Unit (BIU)
and four Direct Memory Access (DMA) channels, one for each receive and
transmit. The DMA core of the ISCC controls the data transfer between local
RAM and the communication ports.
Sanity Timer
A sanity timer is incorporated on the DDCH to prevent the MPU from getting
tied-up as the result of a hardware or software fault. The sanity timer permits
the DDCH to reset itself should it enter into an infinite loop.
Bus Timer
The bus timer presents an error signal to the MPU if an attempt to access a
device did not receive acknowledgment within the bus time-out period of 120
microseconds.
Download Operation
Downloading may be performed in either of two modes: background or
maintenance. Before any downloading can take place, a D-channel link must
be configured. The following situations may lead to software downloading:
• during initialization when new software is installed
• when enabling the card or application
• during card reset (due to loss of software, corruption)
• during a background audit
System Initialization
When new base or application software is installed on an Option 11C, the
downloading decision is made during system initialization. Actual MSDL
base software downloading is done in background mode which may take
several minutes to complete, depending on the traffic of the switch and the
size of the MSDL base software.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 524 of 544 NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel handler
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Card enabling or application enabling
If a normal download enable command is executed, the MSDL base code and
application will be conditionally downloaded to the DDCH card. This
conditional download will depend on the result of the check made by the
Option 11C CPU on the MSDL base code and application software.
If a forced download enable command is executed in maintenance LD 96, the
MSDL base code and application are forced down to the DDCH card, even if
the base and application software is already resident on the DDCH card. In
order to complete a forced download, the following conditions must be met:
• The DDCH card must be enabled
• The D-channel port must be disabled
Card reset
Following a card reset, the MSDL base code and the D-channel application
software will be validated by the Option 11C CPU. Because software is stored
in flash EPROM on the DDCH card it does not have to be downloaded.
However, if the software is missing (due to new installation, corruption
loadware version mismatch), the CPU will automatically download the base/
application into the DDCH card.
Background audit
If during background audit of the card and associated applications it is found
that downloading is required, the card is queued in the PSDL tree.
Downloading is performed in background mode based on the entries in the
PSDL tree.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 525 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
530
Chapter 36 — NT5D14 Line Side T-1 card
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Reference List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Card interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
T-1 interface circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Signaling and control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Card control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Reference List
The following are the references in this section:
• Line Cards: Description (553-3001-105)
Overview
The line side T-1 card is an Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) line card
that interfaces one T-1 line, carrying 24 channels to the Option 11C. This card
occupies two card slots in the main or expansion cabinets. The line side T-1
card can be installed in the system’s main cabinet or one of the expansion
cabinets (there are no limitations on the number of cards that can be installed
in the Option 11C system).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 526 of 544 NT5D14 Line Side T-1 card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
The line side T-1 card emulates an analog line card to the Option 11C system
software; therefore, each channel is independently configurable by software
control in the Single-line Telephone Administration program (LD 10). The
line side T-1 card also comes equipped with a Man-Machine Interface (MMI)
maintenance program. This feature provides diagnostic information
regarding the status of the T-1 link.
Physical description
The line side T-1 card mounts into any two consecutive IPE slots. The card
consists of a motherboard and a daughterboard; both are printed on standard
circuit board.
In general, the LEDs operate as shown in Table .
Table 162
NT5D14AA Line Side T-1 Faceplate LEDs (Part 1 of 2)
LED State Definition
STATUS On (Red) The NT5D14AA card either failed its self-test or it
hasn’t yet been configured in software.
Off The card is in an active state
RED On (Red) A red alarm has been detected from the T-1 link.
(This includes, but is not limited to: not receiving a
signal, the signal has exceeded bit error thresholds
or frame slip thresholds.)
Off No red alarm exists.
YEL On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected from the
terminal equipment side of the T-1 link. If the
terminal equipment detects a red alarm condition, it
may send a yellow alarm signal to the line side T-1
card (this depends on whether or not your terminal
equipment supports this feature).
Off No yellow alarm.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NT5D14 Line Side T-1 card Page 527 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Power requirements
The line side T-1 card obtains its power from the Option 11C’s backplane.
Line side T-1 card: power required
Functional description
The NT5D14AA provides the following features and functions:
• Card interfaces
• T-1 interface circuit
• Signaling and control
• Card control functions
• Microcontroller
• Card LAN interface
• Sanity Timer
• Man-Machine Interface (MMI)
MAINT On (Red) The card detects whether tests are being run or that
alarms have been disabled through the Man-
Machine Interface. The LED will remain lit until these
conditions are no longer detected.
Off The line side T-1 card is fully operational
Table 163
Power requirements
Voltage Current (max.)
5.0 V dc 150 mA.
+15.0 V dc 1.6 Amp
-15.0 V dc 1.3 Amp
Table 162
NT5D14AA Line Side T-1 Faceplate LEDs (Part 2 of 2)
LED State Definition
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 528 of 544 NT5D14 Line Side T-1 card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Architecture
Card interfaces
The line side T-1 card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops
through the DS-30X Interfaces circuits and maintenance data over the card
LAN link.
T-1 interface circuit
The line side T-1 card contains one T-1 line interface circuit which provides
24 individually configurable voice interfaces to one T-1 link in 24 different
time slots. The circuit demultiplexes the 2.56 Mbps DS-30X Tx signaling
bitstreams from the DS-30X network loop and converts it into 1.544 mHz T-
1 Tx signaling bitstreams onto the T-1 link. It also does the opposite,
receiving Rx signaling bitstreams from the T-1 link and transmitting Rx
signaling bitstreams onto the DS-30X network loop.
The T-1 interface circuit performs the following:
• Provides an industry standard DSX-1 (0 to 655 ft/200 meters) interface.
• Converts DS-30X signaling protocol into FXO A and B robbed bit
signaling protocol.
• Provides switch-selectable transmission and reception of T-1 signaling
messages over a T-1 link in either loop or ground start mode.
Signaling and control
The line side T-1 card also contains signaling and control circuits that
establish, supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits work
with the system controller to operate the T-1 line interface circuit during calls.
The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the controller and
return incoming call status information to the controller over the DS-30X
network loop.
Card control functions
Control functions are provided by a microcontroller and a Card LAN link on
the line side T-1 card. A sanity timer is provided to automatically reset the
card if the microcontroller stops functioning for any reason.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NT5D14 Line Side T-1 card Page 529 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Microcontroller
The line side T-1 card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal
operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card. The
microcontroller controls the following:
• reporting to the CPU via the card LAN link:
— card identification (card type, vintage, serial number)
— firmware version
— self-test results
— programmed unit parameter status
• receipt and implementation of card configuration:
— control of the T-1 line interface
— enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card
— programming of loop interface control circuits for administration of
channel operation
— maintenance diagnostics
• interface with the line card circuit:
— converts on/off-hook, and ringer control messages from the DS-30X
loop into A/B bit manipulations for each time slot in the T-1 data
stream, using robbed bit signaling.
• the front panel LED when the card is enabled or disabled by instructions
from the NT8D01 controller card.
Card LAN interface
Maintenance data is exchanged with the CPU over a dedicated asynchronous
serial network called the Card LAN link.
Sanity Timer
The line side T-1 card also contains a sanity timer that resets the
microcontroller in the event of a loss of program control. The microcontroller
must service the sanity timer every 1.2 seconds. If the timer is not properly
serviced, it times out and causes the microcontroller to be hardware reset.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 530 of 544 NT5D14 Line Side T-1 card
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Man-Machine Interface (MMI)
The line side T-1 card provides an optional man-machine interface that is
primarily used for T-1 link performance monitoring and problem diagnosis.
The MMI provides alarm notification, T-1 link performance reporting and
fault isolation testing. The interface is accessed through connections from the
I/O panel to a terminal or modem.
The MMI is an optional feature since all T-1 configuration settings are
performed through dip switch settings or preconfigured factory default
settings.
For more information on the Line Side T-1 card, refer to the Line Cards:
Description (553-3001-105).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 531 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
536
List of terms
This chapter lists, in alphabetical order, the acronyms and abbreviations used
in this guide.
AC Alternating Current
ACD Automatic Call Distribution
ACD-C ACD Management Reports
AHR Ampere hour
AML Application Module Link
APL Auxiliary Processor Link
ATM Automatic Trunk Maintenance
ATTN Attendant Console
AUD Audicron
AUX Auxiliary
AWU Automatic Wakeup
BARS Basic Automatic Route Selection
BGD Background Terminal
BIMP Balance Impedance
BIU Bus Interface Unit
BKO LD 43 data dump command to copy the customer records in the Primary
Flash drive to the PCMCIA device
BTU British Thermal Unit
BUG Software error
CAP Central Answering Position
CAS Centralized Attendant Service
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 532 of 544
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
CCBR Customer Configuration Backup and Restore
CCITT Comité Consultatif International Télégraphe et Téléphone
CCOS Controlled Class of Service
CDP Coordinated Dialing Plan
CDR Call Detail Recording
CD-ROM Compact Disk Read Only Memory
CEC Canadian Electrical Code
CFCT Call Forward by Call Type
CFNA Call Forward No Answer
CMAC ESN Communication Management Center
CMS Command and status link
CO Central Office
COM Component
Conf Conference
COS Class of Service
CPG Console Presentation Group
CPND Call Party Name Display
CPU Central Processing Unit
CSL Command Status Link
CTY CDR TTY port
CUST Multi-Customer
DC Direct Current
DCH D-channel Handler
DDCH Downloadable D-channel handler
DGT Digital
DISA Direct Inward System Access
DIG Dial Intercom Group
DIP Dial Pulse
DLC Digital Line Card
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 533 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
DLI Digital Line Interface
DN Directory Number
DND Do Not Disturb
DOD Direct Outward Dialing
DPNSS Digital Private Network Signalling System
DS Data Service
DTE Data Terminal equipment
DTI Digital trunk Interface
DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency
DTN Digitone
DTR Digitone Receiver
EAM E&M 2 Wire
EBLF Enhanced Busy Lamp Field
EDD LD 43 data dump command to write the customer data in DRAM to the
Primary and Backup flash drives on the NTDK20 SSC card
EFD External Flexible DN
EFTC Enhanced Flexible Tones and Cadences
EHOT Enhanced Hot Line
EHT External Hunt DN
EM4 E&M 4 Wire
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
ESDI Enhanced Serial Data Interface
ESN Electronic Switched Network
EX4 4 Wire Duplex
FCA Forced Charge Account
FCBQ Flexible Call Back Queuing
FCC Federal Communications Commission
FFC Flexible Feature Code
FTC Flexible Tones and Cadences
FX Foreign Exchange
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 534 of 544
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
GRD Ground Start
HDLC High-Level Data Link Controller
HOT Hot Line Services
HPIB High Priority Input Buffers
ICT Incoming Trunk
IMS Integrated Messaging System
IPE Intelligent Peripheral Equipment
ISA Integrated Services Access
ISL ISDN Signalling Link
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
KLS Key Lamp Strings
LAPD Link Access Protocol D-channel
LAPW Limited Access to Overlays
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LDR Loop Dial Repeating
LED Light Emitting Diode (lamp)
LLC Line Load Control
LOP Loop Start
LPIB Low Priority Input Buffers
LSL Low Speed Link
MF Multi Frequency
MFC Multifrequency Compelled Signaling
MFR Multifrequency Receiver
MISP Multi-Purpose ISDN Signaling Processor
MMI Man-Machine Interface
MPDA Meridian Programmable Data Adapter
MPU Micro Processing Unit
MSDL Multipurpose Serial Data Link
MTBF Mean Time Between Failures
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 535 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
MTC Maintenance
NARS Network Automatic Route Selection
NCOS Network Class of Service
NFCR New Flexible Code Restriction
NTP Nortel Networks technical publication
NTRF Network Traffic
OAD Outgoing Automatic Incoming Dial
ODAS Office Data Administration System
OGT Outgoing Trunk
OHQ Off Hook Queuing
OPS Off-Premise Station
OPTF Advanced Features
PBX Private Branch Exchange
PCM Pulse Code Modulation
PFTU Power Fail Transfer Unit
PMSI Property Management System Interface
PPM Periodic Pulse Metering
PRA Primary Rate Access
PRI Primary Rate Interface
RAN Recorded Announcement
RAM Random Access Memory
RMS Room Status
ROM Read Only Memory
SCC Special Common Carrier
SCH Service Change
SCI Station Category Indication
SDI Serial Data Interface
SILC S/T Interface Line Cards
SR Set Relocation
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 536 of 544
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
SWP LD 43 data dump command to swap or exchange database records
between the Primary Flash drive’s main and secondary databases
TDS Tone and Digit Switch
TIMP Termination Impedance
TN Terminal Number
TSET Digital Set M3000 (Touchphone)
TTY Teletype
UILC U Interface Line Card
UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply
VAS Value Added Server
WATS Wide Area Telephone Service
XEM NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card
XMFC/MFE Extended Multi-frequency Compelled/Multi-frequency sender-receiver
XMFR Extended Multi-frequency receiver
XUT NTD14 Universal Trunk Card
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
Page 537 of 544
544
Index
Symbols
µ-Law, 158
Numerics
10baseT port, 219
A
ABCD
protected data store, 73
ACD
data store, 35
protected data store, 62, 72
ACD Enhancement
data store, 39
active state
M3820, M3310, M3110, 327
A-Law, 158
alerting tones
M3820, M3310, M3110, 330
AML
data store, 47
protected data store, 82
Analog (500/2500 type) telephones
protected data store, 53
Analogue Terminal Adapter (ATA), 316
ATM
protected data store, 67
Authorization Code
protected data store, 63
B
Balance
longitudinal, 174
BARS
protected data store, 59
battery backup time calculation, 110
BGD Automatic Timed Job
protected data store, 80
BLF/Console Graphics Module, 362
Brandline Inserts, 316, 328
Bus interface
CPU to MISP, 263
MISP network, 263
C
Call Park
data store, 39
Call Registers
data store, 37
Card slot assignments, 103
CardLAN, 457
cards
DLC (Digital Line Card), 320
ISDLC (Integrated Services Digital Line
Card), 320
Circuit Card Power Consumption, 144
closet power supplies, 332, 333
Commands
CCBR, 16
data dump, 14
PRT PDV, 179
Communications software, 24
Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP)
protected data store, 61, 79
cords
and TELADAPT snap-in connectors, 333
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 538 of 544 Index
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
CPND
protected data store, 68
CPU capacity
real time, 25
Crosstalk, 174
custom labeling (logos) with Brandline Inserts, 316,
328
Customer Configuration Backup and Restore
(CCBR), 23
commands, 16
Customer data
protected data store, 70
D
Data
dump commands, 14
pre-programmed, 18
restoring, 18
storage, 14
trunk route, 20
Data store requirements, 30
ACD, 35
ACD Enhancement, 39
AML, 47
Call Park, 39
Call Registers, 37
DCH, 46
DCHI, 41
digital phone ports, 40
EBLF, 42
IMS, 39
Inpit/Output buffers, 41
ISDN, 42
junctor groups, 47
MFR, 47
NTRF, 36
trunk block, 34, 44
TTY block, 35
virtual terminal, 40
DCH
data store, 46
protected data store, 81, 82
DCHI
data store, 41
Dial intercom
protected data store, 58
Digital Line Card (DLC), 266
Digital telephone ports
data store, 40
Digitone receiver (DTR)
load capacity, 121
requirements, 99, 117
Direct Inward Dial, 385
Directory Number (DN)
protected data store, 56
DISA
protected data store, 63
DLC (Digital Line Card), 320
Downloadable D-channel handler, 520
DPNSS/DCHI Port, 516
DTI2
protected data store, 82
DTI/DLI
protected data store, 66, 81
E
EBLF
data store, 42
electromagnetic interference specifications
M3820, M3310, M3110 telephones, 329
EMC grounding clip, 213
Enhanced Flexible Tones and Cadences
protected data store, 72
environmental and safety considerations
M3820, M3310, M3110, 318, 329
ESDI settings, 240
European Digital telephones, 319
External Alerter interface, 316, 328
F
Failure rate, 191
FFC
protected data store, 73
FGD ANI
protected data store, 84
Fiber Expansion daughter boards, 210, 440
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Index Page 539 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
NTDK22, 441
NTDK24, 441
NTDK79, 441
NTDK84, 441
NTDK85, 441
Fiber optic cable and interfaces, 439–446
Fiber Receiver cards, 216, 442
NTDK23, 442
NTDK25, 442
NTDK80, 442
Flexible Tones and Cadences (FTC)
protected data store, 72
Forecasting growth, 91
G
Gain versus level variation, 169
Ground start, 385
Group delay and distortion, 173
Group DND
protected data store, 63
H
High-Level Data Link Controller, 263
History file buffer
protected data store, 64
hold state
M3820, M3310, M3110, 327
I
idle state
M3820, M3310, M3110 telephones, 327
IMS
data store, 39
protected data store, 65
Input and balance impedances, 166
Input/Output buffers
data store, 41
Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE), 525
Intermodulation, 172
IP Expansion
Security device, 217
Storage and CPU capacity, 13
Transmission losses, 177
ISA_SID_MTHPTR fixed memory pointer, 70
ISDLC (Integrated Services Digital Line Card), 320
ISDN
BRI - protected data store, 74
data store, 42
PRA - protected data store, 69
PRI trunk, 514
ISL trunk TN table
protected data store, 70
J
jacks
and TELADAPT snap-in connectors, 333
Junctor groups
data store, 47
K
Key Expansion Module, 316
L
LAPD Data Link/Asynchronous Controller, 516
LCD indicators
M3820, M3310, M3110, 327
Limited Access to Overlays (LAPW)
protected data store, 83
logos with Brandline Inserts, 328
Loop start, 385
Loss plan
insertion loss, 159
insertion loss limits, 164
M
M2006, 284
M2008, 284
M2016S, 284
M2112
handsfree operation, 266
M2216ACD, 284
M2250 Attendant Console, 353–363
M2317, 271–281
M2616, 284
handsfree, 291
M3000 Touchphone, 309–318
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 540 of 544 Index
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
M3820, M3310, M3110, 319–334
environmental and safety considerations, 318,
329
line engineering, 318, 330
local alerting tones, 330
M3820, M3310, M3110 telephones, 331
M5317 BRI Terminal, 335–352
M5317TX, M5317TDX, 337
Memory requirement calculations, 110
Memory requirements, 14
Meridian Communications Adapter (MCA), 316
Meridian Digital Telephones, 265
Meridian digital telephones M3820, M3310,
M3110, 327
Meridian Modular Telephones, 283–307
display module, 293
Key Expansion Module, 294
Meridian Programmable Data Adapter, 294, 306
message waiting feature, 326
MFC, 399
MFE, 402
MFR
data store, 47
protected data store, 80
Micro Processing Unit (MPU), 263
MISP, 261
Model telephones, 19
protected data store, 73
Model trunks
protected data store, 73
Multiple office code screening line
protected data store, 66
Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL), 520
Multi-Tenant Service feature
protected data store, 67
N
Name Display DMS feature
protected data store, 84
NARS
protected data store, 60
NAS
protected data store, 73
NFCR
protected data store, 65
Noise
Idle Channel, 168
Impulse, 169
NT1R20 Off Premise Station (OPS) analog line
card, 423–??
NT5D14 Line Side T-1 card, 525–530
NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card, 399–407
NT6D70 SILC line card, 415–418
NT6D71 UILC line card, 419–421
NT8D02 Digital Line Card, 365–370
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card,
371–376
NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card, 377–387
NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card, 389–398
NTAG26 XMFR card, 409–413
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card, 234
NTAK03, 244
NTAK03 TDS/DTR card, 231
NTAK09 1.5 DTI/PRI card, 447–454, 514, 520
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card, 503
NTAK10 2.0 DTI card, 467–478
NTAK20 clock controller, 503–511
NTAK20 Clock Controller (CC) daughterboard,
465
NTAK75
dimensions, 195
spares planning, 195
NTAK75/QBL24A1
back-up time, 156
NTAK76
back-up time, 155
dimensions, 195
spares planning, 194
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card, 479–491
NTAK93 DCH interface, 513–517
NTBK22 MISP card, 261, 504
NTBK45, 243
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card, 503
NTBK50 2.0 PRI card, 493–502, 514, 520
NTDK01, 443
NTDK02, 443
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Index Page 541 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
NTDK16 Digital Line Card, 365–370
NTDK20 SSC card, 15, 208–221
Conferencing, 219
Ethernet Interface, 219
Network Switching and signaling, 220
PCMCIA interface, 217
SDI ports, 218
Tone services, 221
NTDK20 System Core card, 243
NTDK22, 441
NTDK23, 241, 442
NTDK24, 441
NTDK25, 241, 442
NTDK79, 441
NTDK80, 241, 442
NTDK83, 443
NTDK84, 441
NTDK85, 441
NTDK97, 243
NTDK97 MSC card, 221–225
Conferencing, 224
Ethernet Interface, 224
Network Switching and signaling, 224
PCMCIA interface, 223
SDI ports, 223
NTDK99, 443
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card, 504
NTRB21 TMDI card, 455–466
NTRF
data store, 36
Numbering plan, 20
O
ODAS
protected data store, 66
Off-Premise Station, 423
P
Paging, 387
PCM channels, 265
Peripheral Equipment shelf, 320
Physical I/O table
protected data store, 82
Power Consumption, 144
Power Fail Transfer Unit (PFTU), 202
power requirements
for headsets, 331
M3820, M3310, M3110 telephones, 331
Power supplies, 197–204
Pre-programmed data, 18
benefits, 21
Model telephones, 19
Numbering plan, 20
removing, 23
SDI ports, 21
Tone and Digit Switch (TDS), 21
Trunk route data and model trunks, 20
PREXL_SCLN
protected data store, 71
PRI(2)
protected data store, 81
programmable keys
M3820, M3310, M3110, 327
Protected data store requirements, 48
ABCD, 73
ACD, 62, 72
AML, 82
Analog (500/2500 type) telephones, 53
ATM, 67
Authorization Code, 63
BARS, 59
BGD Automatic Timed Job, 80
Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP), 61, 79
CPND, 68
customer data, 70
DCH, 81, 82
dial intercom, 58
Directory Number (DN), 56
DISA, 63
DTI2, 82
DTI/DLI, 66, 81
Enhanced Flexible Tones and Cadences, 72
FFC, 73
FGD ANI, 84
Flexible Tones and Cadences (FTC), 72
group DND, 63
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 542 of 544 Index
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
History file buffer, 64
IMS, 65
ISDN BRI, 74
ISDN PRA, 69
ISL trunk TN table, 70
LAPW, 83
MFR, 80
model telephones, 73
model trunks, 73
multiple office code screening line, 66
Multi-Tenant Service feature, 67
Name Display DMS feature, 84
NARS, 60
NAS, 73
NFCR, 65
ODAS, 66
physical I/O table, 82
PREXL_SCLN, 71
PRI(2), 81
SDI, 82
SL-1 sets, 76
Speed Call
list, 58
package, 71
System Speed Call List Head Table, 64
template, 79
tone detectors, 80
TRUNK BARRING, 72
trunk routes, 69
VAS Data Services, 67
virtual terminal, 85
voice/data port, 66
Provisioning, 87
comparative method, 93
conference/TDS loops, 108
default method, 96
line, trunk, and console load, 98
manual calculation, 95
number of IPE cards required, 103
number of loops required, 102
number of trunks, 97
total system load, 102
Provisioning worksheets, 90
A - Growth forecast, 135
B - Total load, 137
battery current and ac line calculation, 153
battery current calculation, 154
C - system cabinet requirements, 138
D - unprotected memory calculations, 141
E - protected memory calculations, 142
F - equipment summary, 143
G - system power consumption, 144
total system power consumption, 151, 152
PSDL, 457
PVC cable, 330
R
Receiver cards
NTDK23, NTDK25, and NTDK80, 241
Recorded Announcement, 386
Remote computer access, 25
remote ringers, 316, 328
Removing pre-programmed data, 23
Reserve power, 203
ringing state
on M3820, M3310, M3110, 327
S
SDI
ports, 21, 227
protected data store, 82
SL-1 sets
protected data store, 76
Software delivery, see Pre-programmed data
Spares planning, 187
definitions and assumptions, 188
failure rates, 191
NFT values, 193
NTAK75, 195
NTAK76, 194
Speed Call list
protected data store, 58
Speed Call package
protected data store, 71
Spurious signal, 172
SSC card, see NTDK20 SSC card
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Index Page 543 of 544
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide
S/T Interface Line Cards (SILC), 415
SYSLOAD, 16
System Core and Controller cards, 207
System Power Consumption, 144
System Speed Call List Head Table
protected data store, 64
T
T-1, 525
TDS/DTR card, 243
TELADAPT connectors, 265
TELADAPT snap-in connectors, 333
temperature and humidity ranges for operations
Meridian digital telephones, 318, 329
Template
protected data store, 79
Tie Outgoing Automatic Incoming Dial, 386
Tie Two-way Dial Repeating, 386
Tone and Digit Switch (TDS), 21
Tone Detectors
protected data store, 80
transformers
local plug-in, 332
Transmission parameters, 157
distortion, 170
frequency response, 165
input and balance impedances, 166
loss plan, 159
return loss, 166
transhybrid loss, 167
TRUNK BARRING
protected data store, 72
Trunk block
data store, 34, 44
Trunk routes
protected data store, 69
TTY block
data store, 35
U
U Interface Line Card (UILC), 419
V
VAS Data Services
protected data store, 67
Virtual terminal
data store, 40
protected data store, 85
Voice/data port
protected data store, 66
volume control
M3820, M3310, M3110, 326
W
wiring and loop lengths
M3820, M3310, M3110, 333
M3820, M3310, M3110 telephones, 330, 331
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Page 544 of 544 Index
553-3011-100 Standard 14.00 January 2002
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Family Product Manual Contacts Copyright FCC notice Trademarks
Document number Product release Document release Date Publish
Meridian 1
Option 11C and 11C Mini
Technical Reference Guide
Copyright © 1991–2002 Nortel Networks
All Rights Reserved
Information is subject to change without notice. Nortel
Networks reserves the right to make changes in
design or components as progress in engineering and
manufacturing may warrant. This equipment has been
tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules,
and the radio interference regulations of Industry
Canada. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference
when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and
used in accordance with the instruction manual, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference in which case the
user will be required to correct the interference at their
own expense.
SL-1 and Meridian 1 are trademarks of Nortel
Networks.
Publication number: 553-3011-100
Document release: Standard 14.00
Date: January 2002
Printed in Canada
1

TM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine